iMH CRITICISMS MASSED ON THE SECOND EDITION OF THIS WORK. n^ ¥' From the XLVII. JVb. of the JVbrth Amencan Revieta, The author has shown much ability, both in regard to the metho- dical arrangement of his materials, and the clear expositions he has given of the principles and difficulties in the grammatical construction of the language. His views are well explained in the preface, from which it is evident, that he has studied the subject with care, and gained much practical knowledge from experience. In the full con- jugations and copious list of irregular verbs, and in the illustration of all the rules of syntax, by explanations, remarks, and well chosen examples, this gi-ammar is deciiUjdly supenor to any we liave seen. This we deem particularly worthy of notice, because the success of the learner in studying .Spanish, as perhaps almost every other lan- guage, depends very much on the readiness with which he may be- come acquainted with the verbs and syntax. That terrible critx to all beginners, the different uses of the verbs ser and estar^ the authoi' lias laboured with earnestness and ingenuity to remove. He has ex- plained the difficulty with as much clearness, probably, as the nature of the subject will admit. Mr. Cubi has published in this country a small Spanish dictionary, com])iied Ironi the best authorities, designed as a manual for learners; and also selections from classical Spanish writers. Within the last year he has published a grammar in Spanish, intended for the South American market. To a gentleman of his talents, zeal, and indus- try, we cannot but wish a success proportioned to his ardour and exertions. From the BuUimore Gazette. The second edition of this elementary work has just issued from the press, anii^^^ L\0 1 DISTRICT OF MARYLAND, TO IVITI BE I r REMEMBERED, That on the nineteenth day of July, in the fifty- first year of the Iiult-peiidence of the United States of Ame?iea. jMaiiano Cubi y Solei-, of the said district, hath deposited in this office, the title of a book, th^ i-ighl wliereof he claims as author, iu the words following, to wit: "A New Spanish Grammar, adapted to every class of learners By Mariano Cubi y Soler. Third edition, revised, corrected, simplified and much improved.'* In conformity to the act of the Congrei'^ of the United States, entitled "An act for the encouragement of learning, by securing the copies of maps, charts and books, to the authors and propr'-ef-.-i of such copies, during the times therein mentioned;" and also to the act, entitled "An act supplementary to an act, entitled 'An act for the encouragement of learning, by securing the copies of maps, charts and books, to the authors and proprietors of such copies during the times therein mentioned.' and extending the benefits thereof to the arts of designing, engraving, and etching hisforical and other prints.'' PHILIP MOORE, Clfrk of the District (^Maryland, J. D. Tovi, frinttr' I. :/ PREFACE TO THE THIRD EDITION. For the unexampled patronage which has been ex- tended to this work, the author cannot but feel grateful to the American people. His exertions to render it more and more worthy of their approbation, have not been in any manner suspended or relaxed. In the second edition the economy of the work was entirely changed, and the most essential parts, com- pletely remodelled. This tended to establish its character more extensively, and it became generally used both in North and South America. Utility has been the sole aim of the author; and he has con- sequently availed himself of any remark, whether kind- ly suggested, or clothed in the asperities of enmity, which might render this work more worthy of public patronage. This third edition will, he hopes, afford sufficient evidence in support of this assertion. That the rules of orthography might not be without practical illustrations, the author has annexed to them a few reading lessons, which he has WTitten himself, to introduce whatever words he considered necessary for the improvement of the student's pronunciation. The explanations of the tenses have been simplified, and placed under the liead of Syntax. The complaint, with regard to the difficulty which the scholar encoun- tered in the commencement of the exercises, will na longer exist Their arrangement has been entirely 1* ■n. PREFACE. changedi and those under the first rules, written in a manner suitable to the capacity of young persons^ Every rule which was before considered either incor- rect or obscure, has been rendered accurate and per- spicuous. The whole grammar has, in fine, been re- vised and improved with all care and attention possible. To conclude these few remarks, the author will observe, that as language is antecedent to grammar, grammar can scarcely be called original; that there are certain rules immutably fixed, which have been, and must necessarily be the same so long as language exists; that, with regard to these, all grammarians have drawn from the same source, or one has followed the footsteps of another; and that, therefore, the public will not think the less of this production if some traces of the Spanish Academy, Fernandez, McHenry, Mur- ray, and other authors, are occasionally to be marked in it. For, with the exception of these instances, the writer thinks he has a claim to originality. Nor will it be withheld from him by any impartial judge, who will compare this work with any other of a similar nature now extant* PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION. It is a remarkable circumstance, that the Spanish language, which, since the days of Shakspeare, has remained in a state of oblivion, should now become an indispensable study, in a polite or commercial educa- tion. The gallant struggle of the Spaniards against the efforts of Napoleon; and the glorious achievements accomplished in South America, are the principal causes to which this revolution may be attributed. To support the Spanish literature, or to exhibit the merits of the illustrious men, who have enriched it with their productions, has, until lately, been consider- ed a useless and an idle task. It is only within these last eighteen years, that the English reviewers,* the German professors,! and the French literati,.t have viewed with astonishment and surprise the "prodigious" * See the Edinburgh Review, for Oct. 1306, p. 224— the Edin- burgh Review, for Oct. 1823-24, p. 393. This number contains a critical essay on the lyric poetry of Spain, which highly sup- ports the eminent character of this periodical work. t Lectures on the History of Literature, Ancient and Modern, by Frederick Schlegel, in 2 vols., — vol. 1, pp. 343 — 346: vol. 2, lectures xi. xxii. and pp. 186, 187, 188, &c. See the 3d vol. of the excellent History of Elegant Literature, by Bouterwek, (Ges« «hichte der Poesie und Beredsamkeit seit dem Ende des dreizehur ten Jahrhunderts,) 12 vols. Svo., 1801—1819. X See Sismundi's Literature of the South, (De la Litterature dn Midi de I'Europe,) 4 vols. 8vo., 1813. viii PREFACE. genius of Lope de Vega, and Calderon de la Barca: the ''sublimity and sympathetic feeling" of Garcilaso, and Boscan; and the ''lofty merits" of Frai Luis de Leon, Mendoza, Montemayor, Lrcilla, &c. Cervantes himself, whose Don Quixote is, "of all works of wit, the richest in spirit and invention, " and his Numanciaj SL perfect piece of dramatic composition, had not, until lately, been shown in a proper light. Now, however, that the merits and defects of the Spanish literature are daily placed before our view, in an able and unpre- judiced manner,* and that perfect translations! of the authors of merit who have been concealed for ages, are continually issuing from the press, the public may judge for itself. While the pens of the literary world are thus em- ployed in tracing the beauties and merits of the authors and language of Spaing it has been presumed, that to * A course of lectures on the History and Criticism of Spanish Literature, has been written by Professor George Ticknor, of Boston. This is certainly the production of much taste and la- bour. Although it has not yet been published, we have had the pleasure of perusing it; and we do not hesitate to pronounce this work, for plan and execution, the best of the kind, that has yet appeared. The perfect acquaintance which this gentleman pos- sesses with the Spanish language; the access which he has to the best editions of the many works he mentions; and his inde- fatigable industry in the pursuit of literary and scientific know- ledge, have rendered him so completely master of the subject he handles, that his production may be considered an invaluable acquisition, and entitled to the thanks of every friend to litera» ture and science. t See the works of Garcilaso de la Vega, surnamed the prince of Castilian poets, translated into English verse; with a critical and historical essay on Spanish poetry, and a life of the author; by J. K. Wiffeo, 8vo. PREFACE. ix labour in a work, which might tend to facilitate the ac- quisition of this noble idiom, could not but be desirable. This is the object of the present performance: how far it may prove successful, experience alone can deter- mine. The anxiety which the author feels for the diffusion of his native tongue, and the sense of grati- tude which he cherishes towards this nation, are the only motives that have induced him to embark in the present undertaking. In the composition and arrangement of this grammar, it has been the wish of the author to adapt it to all classes of learners. It is not, however, to be pre- sum.ed, that the necessity of teachers will be super- seded. The impression that a work can be written, by means of which alone, any capacity may learn the science it treats, is as common as it is fallacious. AVe cannot regard the books or methods adopted to com- pass the object of our pursuit-^, under any other aspect, than indispensable or necessary aids. They may afford more or less advantages, in proportion as they are adequate or indiflerent^ but the final success of the student will, and must absolutely depend, on his ap- plication, knowledge, capable instructors, particular talents, or appropriate age. This is as true as it is apparent. Can a youth, who has scarcely had time to leai'n the rudiments of his own language, understand the nature of another, with the same facility as the adult, who, by study and reflection, has acquired experience; quickened his penetration, and matured his judgment? Or, can a person without any general knowledge, and perhaps imperfect in his maternal tongue, apprehend AS rapidly, and apply as judiciously, the rules of any X PREFACE. science, as he who has made universal information the object of his constant pursuit? It must be confessed that these considerations have prevented the author from annexing to this volume the common and attractive phrase of ^''without a teacher ^^"^ not, however, from bestowing upon it all the labour and study possible, to render it as perspicuous and in- telligible, as the subject would permit. The convic- tion, that human capacity is limited in its operations, and that it is to very few individuals that nature has been bountiful in her gifts; has also induced the author to use his utmost efforts in endeavouring to place the contents of this grammar in a constant and regular gradation; and to make its arrangement suitable to the various modes of instruction. On the present edition of this work, more care and attention have been bestowed, than it was supposed it would ever require. The rapidity with which the first impression has been exhausted; the encomiums past upon it by the most eminent American journals; and the promptitude with which it was introdtKjed into the institutions of the United States, where the Spanish forms a branch of their instruction, are circumstances as flattering as they were unexpected to the writer. They have given impulse to new studies and researches; new discoveries have ensued, and when a second edi- tion of this performance has become necessary, the additions and improvements have been so numerous, that it may be pronounced almost a different book. It is hoped that, although no grammar can be entirely new, this may have claims, both in plan and execution, to some originality. It has not been a hasty produc- tion, nor has the zeal of the author been abated by PREFACE. xi difficulties, or has, in anj manner, the consideration, that seldom does the writer of an elementary work obtain much credit for his toil, weakened his exertions. When therefore, it shall be found, that in this present task, errors have been committed, or room for improvement has been left, let it be attributed to the deficiency of the author, and not to his pressure of time or want of study. As simplicity and clearness have been the guides by which the writer of this work has been directed, he has divided it into Orthography, Etymology, Syntax, and Prosody. These are the heads most commonly used, and most generally understood. It has always been the peculiar care of the author, never to sacrifice perspicuity to novelty, or precision to fancy. He is perfectly convinced, that how philosophical or logical soever new technical terms or modes of expression may appear, they always destroy the very purpose for which they are intended. It is a matter of peculiar gratification, that English words have been found, by means of which, the pre- cise and exact sound of the Spanish vowels can imme- diately be attained. The consonants have also been rendered perfectly intelligible; and rules for the true Castilian pronunciation have been laid down. As the sound of some consonants has given rise to various discussions, tiiey have been explained at large; and it is presumed, that irrefragable authorities having been produced, their pronunciation will now be permanently established. The hope may, therefore, be indulged, that the study of Spanish orthography will no longer be considered as a matter of difficulty. W ith a View to affi)rd greater facilities to those in- dividuals, who, being unacquainted with tlie rudiments xii PREFACE. of language in general, are anxious to acquire the Spanish, a concise treatise on grammar has been intro- duced into Etymology. The gender of nouns will, the author trusts, be found remarkably simple. A few clear and succinct rules, to distinguish it, have been given, and the exceptions to these rules, are placed in alphabetic order. Great care has been taken to place the declensions within the reach of any common capa- city. In regard to cases, two only have been adopted. It was imagined, that by this means, the difficulties, rules and anomalies of the Spanish language, could be much better elucidated, than if six had been used. Independently of this, the Castilian idiom differs, in this respect, from the ancient languages, in which, the words receive new modifications, according to their position in the sentence. The verb being the principal mover and spring of language, much attention has been bestowed upon it| and it is fondly hoped, not without some success. New and easy modes of conjugating the verbs have been in- troduced^ and to render them easy of acquisition, the English equivalent has always been added. The irregular verbs, which have always been considered one of the greatest intricacies in the study of the Span- ish language, no longer will present, it is believed, any difficulty to the learner. During the sixteenth and successive centuries, the tenses of Spanish verbs, underwent some changes, and a variety of riiodifications. To prevent the embarrass- ment which this novelty might offer, when the student should peruse the books written in those days, a view of the ancient terminations has been annexed to the verbs. Strong as the notion was, that the use of the • PREFACE. xiii tenses, which had been copied in the first edition of this volume, was beyond the possibility of change; fur- ther experience and study have devised some improve- ments and meliorations, which it is presumed, will not be altogether unworthy of the public. In the progress of the art of acquiring foreign lan- guages, it must be considered as a lamentable circum- stance, that each professor should be addicted to form a method of his own; and that whilst scientific men have been occupied in exploring the abstract regions of language, they should have left to the caprice of fashion, or to the fancy of innovators, the steps which end, where philosophical researches commence. Within late years, however, we find some individuals employed in explaining the elements of grammar, whose names cannot be mentioned without sentiments of reverence. It is to this circumstance, that we are to attribute the general adoption of exercises, to explain, elucidate, and impress the grammatical rules. This custom must be considered as the greatest advancement which has been made towards the art of acquiring languages. In taking a view of the many advantages resulting from the adoption of exercises, some are found, which cannot be passed in silence. By means of these prac- tical themes, no rule can be too obscure for the student's penetration; or misapprehended through his want of judgment. Practice brings his knowledge to the test^ if there be any deficiency or mistake, it immediately be- comes apparent; and it can therefore be supplied or cor- rected, by the explanation of an instructor, or the re- • newed efforts to which the learner is impelled. The act of correcting, either by writing or reading, a num- ber of sentences in which the rule, note, or observation 2 xiv PREFACE. in question is applied, must necessarily inculcate it on the student's mind; and the frequency of reference, supplies him with an abundance of words, and what is better, with the power of using them correctly. To the young beginner this method will teach, that some- thing more than mere repetition is necessary for im- provement; and in the adult, it will supersede the apti- tude which he once had to recollect words, and which he maynow have insensibly lost, either by the want of prac- tice, or the habit of reflection. Exercises will tend to establish firmly the long neglected truth, that he who re- collects a rule, may fail in the application of it; — that the manner in which a child acquires its native tongue, is, and must be essentially different from what vocabula- rists call to learn a language as nature teaches it;— that in the first instance, we acquire the oral signs, and their use, by the sensation which their sound and the novelty of their application produces upon our tender faculties, and the insensible impression' created in us by the con- stant desire of expressing our wants, or the curiosity we feel as new objects are presented to our view; — that in the second, we must possess a good memory to acquire a number of words and sentences, which, when known, (as no rules are given for their application,) throw the mind into confusion, the moment they are to be modi- fied, or our ideas differ from those conveyed in the phrases learned; — that to know the rules, or under- stand the books of an idiom, is not to speak it or to write it; — and that, practice in language, as in all other sciences, is the soul of improvement. These reflections, which the experience of years em- ■ boldens the author to believe are founded on the solid principles of common sense, have induced him to sup- PREFACE. XV ply every syntactical rule, note, and observation of this grammar, with a number of coi-respondmg exer- cises. In the arrangement of them, it will be per- ceived, that the gradual progress of the student, has been an object of great consideration. Much attention has also been paid to their selection. None have been admitted but those wliich had a moral tendency, or which would afford the student some instruction, in the various departments of useful learning. Reference has always been preferred to repetition; the author being convinced, that this is what most ac- customs the learner to study and reflection; the only two means by which he can make any rapid or solid advancement. As it cannot be supposed, that every one who will use this work, to acquire a knowledge of the Spanish language, has directed his attention to rhetoric, logic, or universal grammar; the rules, notes, or observations^ which, for the want of those studies, might appear obscure, have been fully explained. Having taken into consideration, that this work is intended to carry the student through a theoretical, as well as practical course of Spanish; peculiar care has been taken that the difference between the Imperfect, and the Preterite tenses; that of Ser and Estar; that of le and lo; the use of se; and of the pronouns in general, should be treated in a perspicuous and com- prehensive manner, to remove the impression that these parts of speech constitute insurmountable barriers in the acquirement of this language. As the speaking of the Spanish with propriety, as far as pronunciation is concerned, depends on a good knowledge of the accent: this has been treated at full m PREFACE. length in Prosody. The Versification has been mucR enlarged, and written in Spanish. This change has been effected, under the persuasion that it would afford infinite advantages to the learner. In the Appendix, the sjnonymes have been increas- ed| and the colloquial idioms, useful words, dialogues, and commercial documents, corrected and much im- proved. This grammar has also been supplied with an alphabetical Index, which, it is imagined, will be of great service to those persons, who, having learned the Spanish, may have occasion, from time to time, to solve some rising difficulties. In fact, nothing susceptible of melioration, has remained unnoticed^ and every thing, within the power of the author, that could ren- der this work valuable, has been added. It has been his constant care to avoid typographical mistakes, or inaccuracies of language; fully persuaded, that these imperfections are more apparent and inju- iious in grammars than in other works. As to the first, justice compels him to say, that owing to the accustom- ed unremitting attention of the printer, the number of them is so insignificant, that an errata is rendered to- tally unnecessary. Respecting the second, if any have escaped, the wTiter hopes, that as he has expressed himself in a foreign idiom, they will be regarded with some degree of lenity. The author will finally observe, that having been animated by the desire of being serviceable; no toil has been considered too irksome — no research too labo- rious — no study too difficult — no expense too great, to produce a complete Spanish grammar. Whether his wishes have been realized, he entirely leaves to the future decision of a free and enlightened people,' HISTORICAL SKETCH CASTILIAN LANGUAGE. That idiom, which has so often exacted the appella- tion of "the language of the gods," from men, both candid and learned, is spoken in that country, known in ancient times by the name of Iberia, from the river Iberus, by which it is watered. All eminent writers concur in the opinion, that, about fifteen hundred years before Christ, it was peopled by a colony of Phoenicians, who gave it the name of Spania, which, in their lan- guage, means a rabbit, from the multitude of these ani- mals which inhabited this place when they first entered it. ' After the Phoenicians had remained in peaceful pos- session of this country for 1142 years, in 468, before our era, it was entered by the Cartliaginians. This people, concealing their real intentions under the pre- text of commerce, began, by insinuating means, to strengthen themselves in this territory; but their inimi- cal designs were soon manifested; for, 233 years after their first appearance, Hamilcar, their general, brought 2* sviii HISTORY OF THE the unsuspecting Phoenicians entirely under his do- minion. The unjust Carthaginians did not, however, long en- joy the benefit of this ungenerous and treacherous con- duct. In the year 200, before Christ, the Romans, whose power was now wide and irresistible, took pos- session of that country;— established there their own form of government; — introduced their own language; — and habituated the natives to their manners and cus- toms, for the space of 616 years, during which period they kept this territory under absolute subjection. When in 416, that mighty empire, at the mention of which all nations trembled, was inundated by hordes of fierce northern tribes, and was precipitated from that pinnacle of glory and power, to the vale of obscurity and insignificance, Spania, like most of Europe, was overrun by hosts of these barbarous invaders. In pro- portion as the Romans, in Spania, were subdued, they were, no doubt, anxious to be understood by their assailants, that, by this communication, their fall might be less intolerable. To accomplish this, they were obliged to have recourse to the desperate remedy of mutilating their precious and sonorous language. The Goths or Teutonicks, on the other hand, being unac- quainted with the beauties of language, were not ambi- tious either to refine or impart their idiom to the newly conquered provinces. As they found several difficul- ties to surmount in the Latin, they were unwilling to adopt this language of the subdued Romans. Among the greatest difficulties which the Goths experienced in the adoption of the Roman language, was the de- clension of nouns, for which reason they abandoned them, and in their place substituted prepositions. eASTILIAN LANGUAGE. xix This inflection of language, how trivial soever it may appear at first, hastened, more than any thing else, the destruction of the Latin and Gothic tongues in Spania; for, in 623, not long after the entire rejection of the declensions, when the Goths obtained full possession of that portion of the Roman empire, these two lan- guages were so adulterated, that they entirely con- stituted a new dialect, which received the name of Romance. This Romance became then the vernacular tongue of all Spania. In the year 714, when the Arabs suddenly over- whelmed, like a mighty torrent, all this country, the Romance underwent new modifications. It was then that it received those palatical sounds and sonorous expressions, which so eminently characterize the noble Castilian language. During the contests of the descendants of the Goths with the Musselmen, the Romance was recovering strength, in proportion as the former were gaining su- periority over the latter. As the first descendants of the Goths who distinguished themselves against the Musselmen, were natives of a province of that territory called Castilla, Castile; they all received the appella- tion of Castellanos, Castilians. The Phoenician term, Spania, had also now been converted into Espaiia, Spain, and thus the inhabitants of this country in general, were, and have ever after been, called Uspaholes, Spaniards. When the Spa- niards had entirely shaken off their Arabic yoke, the Romance received so great a cultivation in Castile, that it afterwards obtained the name of La Lengita Castellana^ the Castilian language, an appellation XX HISTORY OF THE which we ought always to give to the idiom of Spain, when spoken in its purity. Notwithstanding all the adulterations which the Latin or Roman language had undergone, when any thing was to be committed to public writing, it always appeared in the Latin language in its most correct state. This was continued until the time of Alphonsus the Wise, who, seeing the superiority which their own language would obtain if properly cultivated, prohibited the custom of writing in Latin, royal ordinances, con- cessions, privileges, and other public documents. This prince, the father of Castilian literature, evinced the greatest enthusiasm in the cultivation of the Ro- mance. To excite a taste and eagerness for it in every Castilian heart, he furnished, in the new language, a code of laws, which his father, St. Ferdinand, caused to be framed by the best advocates of his time. These laws were divided into sections or heads, called parti- das. Such was the reputation which these laws had acquired, that partida, when used in reference to them, became a term of excellence; and when Alphonsus had concluded them in the Romance, he entitled them las leyes de las partidas. The style in which he wrote these laws was so pure and majestic, that it not only dis- played the beauty and strength of the language at that early period, but it was not surpassed, or even equalled, by many cotemporary or posterior productions. These glorious labours of Alphonsus, which show at once his learning and attachment to his country, had the desired effect. They roused from a dormant state the Castilian genius — communicated emulation to those cold and indifferent hearts — showed them the treasure they possessed in their then imperfect language ; and CASTILIAN LANGUAGE. xxi literature and science became the objects of the Castil- ian mind. The Spaniards being inspired with this praiseworthy ambition,, thought of soaring higher than employing themselves, as they had done heretofore, in writing ballads and chivalric poems. For sOon after, the Chronicles of king St. Ferdinand, Don Alphonsus the Wise, Don Sancho IV. Don Ferdinand IV. and Don Alphonsus XI. appeared written in this language, which was not an inconsiderable step towards its per- fection. Whilst the Castilian genius was thus employed in beautifying and perfecting the newly adopted language, Pedro Lopez de Ayala^ that classical writer, made his appearance; and composed in a chaste, handsome, and relatively speaking, elegant style, the Chronicles of king Don Peter, those of Don Henry II., and those of Don John I. The Spaniards, at a very early period, were inspired with an almost irresistible taste for the romance, and in this species of composition they then excelled, and have ever after equalled, and even surpassed all other European nations. As to the chivalric writings, the Spaniards also distinguished themselves over the French, Italians, and English. In all their composi- tions, particularly in that entitled the Cid, the name of whose author was buried with himself, or has unfortu- nately remained concealed to the present day, the true Castilian spirit, a simplicity at those times not to be excelled, and a national feeling, worthy of the highest encomiums, manifested themselves. The greatest monument, however, that perpetuates the memory of the early efforts of Castilian genius, is the production of Juan Manuel^ efttitled, '''•El Condc xxii HISTORY OF THE Luccmor,^'^ Count Lucanor. This work, though writ- ten in the beginning of the fourteenth century, is not distinguished by any of the pomp or ostentation which disfigured, in some measure, the productions of that age. Experience and observation seem to have enrich- ed the author's fertile mind with a great fund of practi- cal philosophy, and modest, dignified sentiment, which he infused into the spirit of his writings. In his style he introduces no sought beauty or artificial embellish- ment^ a natural and even neglected simplicity pervades throughout, which greatly enhances the vast erudition and deep reflections with which all his works abound. This writer was a lineal descendant of king St. Fer- dinand, and distinguished for every good and great quality, that can adorn the human mind. Under king Alphonsus XL, he achieved so many heroic exploits, and performed so many brilliant actions, that obtained him a lasting glory. Endowed, as he was, with senti- ments lofty and generous, and with a judgment that nothing could misguide, he never became the victim of kingly jealousy or of party feeling. A universal ad- miration of the man and his works, was the happy lot of this author to enjoy during his life? and it has been the monument consecrated to his memory after his death. The productions of such a character and at such a period, gave great impulse to the budding genius of the Spaniards. Their effect on the language was not so immediate, half a century having elapsed since the wise Alphonsus had used so many exertions to carry it to some degree of perfection. The polished form, how- ever, that the Castilian idiom assumed in the fifteenth century, was owing in a very great measure to the la- CASTILIAN LANGUAGE. xxiii hours and popularity of Don Juan Manuel. This age is conspicuous in the literary annals of Spain for having produced Juan de Mena, the first of the Spanish great poets. Immortal praise is due to this son of the Muses for the labours he bestowed on his maternal tongue, and for his exertions to improve it, without the aid of any other dialect or idiom. Boscan, Garcilaso de la Vega, and liUis de Leon, the three greatest stars that, in the sixteenth century, rose to illumine the dawn of Castilian poetry, changed in some degree the character of the language. By their close imitation of the Italian poets, they gave the Span- ish those soft and sweet tones, which are heard amidst its Latin majesty, Gothic strength, and Oriental pomp. By the labours of these eminent authors, the Spanish idiom had taken some rapid strides towards refinement and elegance. Happily, they were only harbingers of the degree of perfection to which it would be carried by a Cervantes, whose genius for the Romance has been the inimitable example of all other nations, and by which he has immortalized his name and his composi- tions. By a Francisco de Quevedo Villegas, whose prose and poetical writings are entitled to the highest admiration of the learned. By a Granada, whose chaste and eloquent style will ever be the pride of Spain. By an Alego Venegas, a Fernando Perez de Oliva, whose profound and philosophical treatises will always be read \nth interest and advantage. By a Lopez de Vega, a Calderon de la Barca, whose dramatic powers have entitled Spain to the boasted appellation of being equal to any as to comedy. By a Juan Rufo, an Alphonso de Ercilla, whose two heroic poems. La Austriada of tlie fonner. La Araucaua of the latter, xxiv CASTILIAN LANGUAClE. reflect honor on the poesy of Spain. By a Solis, a Clarijo, a Palafox, an Argensola, a Jovellanos, a Mon- tengon, an Isla, a Melendez Valdez, and, in fine, by numberless other eminent writers, who have rendered Spain, in a literary point of view, the competitor of any country. CONTENTS. PART I.— ORTHOGRAPHY. Page. Characters of the Spanish language, .... 25 Sound of the vowels, 26 Sound of the consonants, ib. Rules to rea'd the Spanish, without any foreign accent, 29 Diphthongs and Triphthongs, . . . '. . 31 Reading lessons, . ...... 32 On spelling, 43 A list of words similar in sound, but different in spelling, 44 On the manner of dividing the Spanish, words into syllables, 45 Of some marks used in punctuation, ... 46 The Accent, . 47 List of Abbreviations used in writing, . . . 49-54 PART II.— ETYMOLOGY. Of the Noun, . 56 Of Augmentative and Diminutive nouns, ... 57 Of Collective nouns, .^ ib. Of Gender, 58 Of Number, 64 Of Case, . 65 Of the Article, 67 Of the Adjective, 69 Of the degrees of Comparison, 71 Of Cardinal and Ordinal numbers, .... 72 Of Pronouns, . 75 Pronouns, personal, relative, .interrogative, definitive, 76-80 Of Verbs. . 80 Of number, person, tense, mood, participle, gerund, 82-84 Of Conjugation, . . ..... 85 Conjugation of the auxiliary verbs, , . 85-100 Of regular verbs, , , , lOO xxvi CONTENTS. . Formation of the tenses of the regular verbs, , 101-108 Formation of the participle and gerund, . . 107-108 Conjugation of regular verbs active, . . . 109-116 Conjugation of passive verbs, .... 117-119 Conjugation of a reflective verb, .... 119-121 Regular verbs, . . . . . . . . 121 Irregular verbs, . . 122 Conjugation of the irregular verbs, .... 125 Alphabetical list of all the irregular verbs, . . 156-164 Impersonal verbs, . ib. Defective verbs, , . . . " . . . . 169 Irregular participles, . . . . . . 171 Properties of some participles, . . . , . 1 74 Ancient and modern terminations of verbs, . . 175 Of Adverbs, . 179 Adverbial phrases, ■ . • 183 Of Prepositions, . . 184 English prepositions, with their correspondent in Spanish, 185 Of Conjunctions, . , 188 Of Interjections, 190 PART III. —SYNTAX. Explanation of some marks used in the exercises, . 192 Agreement of the Article, rule 1, notes and exercises, . 193 Use of the Article, rules 2, 3, 4, 6, 6, 7, notes and exercises, 194-205 Omission of the Article, rules S, 9, 10, l\, notes and exercises, 205-213 Use of the neuter article la, rule 12, notes and exercises, ib. Rules for the use of the English definite article c, . 214 Use of the noun, ruie 13, noies and ea?emses, . . . 219 Observations on the Adjectives, . . . . 221 Agreement of Adjectives, rule 14, notes and exercises, 222-226 Position of Adjectives, rule 15, notes and exerciseSy . ib. Accidents of Adjectives, rule 16, notes, &c. . 229-235 Of Comparison, rides 17, IS, notes and exercises, . 235-240 Of Superlatives, rules 19, 20, notes and exercises, . 240-244 Of Adjectives which require some prepositions, • 244-247 Of Pronouns, ........ 248 Of Personal Pronouns, . ... . . . 249 Observations on vos^ vosotros and vmd., , • • ib. Position of the Nominative, and exercises^ > > - 250 CONTENTS. xxvii Position of the Ist objective case, and exercises, . 25S Position of the 2d objective case, and exercises, . . 266 Use of the 1st objective case, and exercises, . . 257 Use of the 2d objective case, and exercises, . . . 259 Observation on the two objective cases, and exercises, . 261 Observation on se, and exercises^ 263 Observation on le and Zo, and exercises, . , . 267 Agreenient and use of possessive pronouns, . . . 270 Observation on the possessive pronouns, and exercises, . 274 Agreement and relations of relative pronouns, notes, &c. 279 Use of the relative pronouns, rules, notes, and exercises, 280 Interrogative Pronouns, notes and exercises, . . 286 Agreement and use of demonstrative pronouns, 288-295 Indefinite Pronouns, rules, notes, and exercises, . 296-304 Of Verbs, 305 The present tense, 305 Imperfect Indicative, 309 Perfect Indefinite, 310 Observation on the Imperfect and Perfect, . . .311 Perfect Definite, 314 Pluperfect, 316 Future Imperfect, . * 318 Future Perfect, ib. Imperative mood, 320 Subjunctive mood, 322 Present, . ib. Imperfect, . 323 Terminations ra, ria, se, 324-326 Perfect, 329 Pluperfect, 330 Future Imperfect, 331 Future Perfect, 332 Observation between the imperfects and future of the sub- junctive, ib. Infinitive mood— present, perfect, gerund, participle, 334-338 Recapitulatory exercises of the tenses of verbs, . . 340 Agreement of verbs, . ..... 344 Collective nouns, . 349 Use of /looer and fener, ■. 351 xxtiii CONTENTS. Use of ser and estar, ...,.., 354 Recapitulatory exercises on the impersonal and irregular verbs, . ....... 363 Government of verbs, ....... 366 Of verbs governing the infinitive, ..... 367 Verbs governing the indicative or subjunctive, notes and exercises, . . . . . , . .370 Of verbs requiring certain prepositions, . . . 374 Verbs requiring the preposition de, notes and exercises, . ib. Verbs requiring the preposition a, notes and exercises, 378 Verbs requiring en, notes and exercises . . . 382 Verbs requiring con, 383 Of Prepositions required by verbs of motion, notes, obser- vations and exercises, ...... 385 Of Adverbs, notes, observations and exercises, . . . 389 Of Prepositions, 390 Of Conjunctions, nofes and ea;e?-cises, .... 391 Of Interjections, wo^es and ea^ercises, .... 397 Prudence — Gratitude — Discretion — Employment of time — Judgment; — being extracts, used as exercises, . 398-403 PART IV.— PROSODY. Accent, 405 Rules to know on vt^hich vowel to lay the stress in the tenses of verbs, 409 APPENDIX. Colloquial idioms, . 411 Synonymes, . ....... 423 A concise and useful vocabulary of the most necessary words, . . ...... 428 The most necessary and useful dialogues, . . 443 Commercial documents, 461 Versification, . • 470. Alphabetical Index, . , . . . , . 481 SPANISH GRAMMAR. Spanish Grammar is the art of speaking and of writing the Spanish Language with propriety. It is divided into four parts, viz: Orthogi'aphj, Etymology, Syntax, and Prosody. PART I. ORTHOGRAPHY. Orthography shows the sound, power, and proper combination of letters, to form syllables or words. The Spanish Alphabet is composed of the following Characters: A, B, C, CH, D, E, F, Names:* «/i,t bai, thai, chaV, they, o, ai'ffey, G, H, I, J, K, L, LL, M, hay, at'chey, ee, hot'tah, kah, ai'ley, aiVliey, ai'mey N, N, 0, P, Q, R, S, T, ai'ney, ain'niey, o, pay, koo^ air'rey, ais'sey, tay, V, V, X, Y, Z. 00, vai, ai'keez^ eegreeai' ghah, thai'tah, * The name should not be mistaken for the sound of the letters. For instance, the name of the character Z, is Ihnitah; at the same time that its sound is like tli in thanks. The name has therefore relation to the peculiar appellation by which a letter, when it forms no combination with others, is distinguished. The sound is that noise which is made in pronouncing a letter when com- bined Avith others. t The author is well aware that it is impossible to give, by English sounds, the names of the Spanish letters exactly, as a 26 ORTHOGRAPHY. A, E^ I, 0, U, are called vowels, because they con- tain a perfect sound in themselves; all the rest are consonants, because it is impossible to utter them with- out the assistance of the vowels. The consonants are divided into mutes, and semi- vowels. Mutes are those letters, the sound of which, begins with themselves, and the vowel is placed last. They are B, C, CH, D, G, J, K, P, Q, T, V, Z. Semivowels are those, whose sound cannot be uttered without beginning with a vowel, such are: F, H, L, LL, M, N, N, R, S, X. SOUND OF THE VOWELS. The sound of the Spanish vowels, is exactly the same as that of the English vowels, in the following words: BdiV, Pr^y, Pique, No, Rvde. SOUND OF THE CONSONANTS. B, D, F, K,* L, M, N, P, T,t V, sound as in Eng- lish. Spaniard would pronounce them. He has, however, endeavoured to effect it, as well as the variety of sound that can be formed by the several combinations of the letters of the English Alphabet, would permit him. * This letter is used in foreign words only, its place being sup- plied in Spanish by c and q. t The sound of d and f, is not exactly the same in English, as it is in Spanish. There is a difference, which, although trifling in itself, is very perceptible, and therefore should be noticed. It will be observed, that, in speaking the English, the sound of t and d, is formed by striking the end of the tongue against the roof of the mouth. In Spanish the end of the tongue is used in ORTHOGRAPHY. 27 C, before «, o, ?/, or a consonant, sounds like k; as, caco, cuco; before e, f,* like th in the word ^AicA;/ as,. Ciceron. CH, is pronounced like ch in the English word cha- rity; as, chalon, chacho. the same manner, but instead of striking the palate, it strikes the upper teeth. The d, therefore, uttered after the Spanish manner, is very similar to the sound of th, in the English word f/ian, f/iough, &c. This sound of (?, not being very easy, those Spaniards who have not attended particularly to the study of elocution, are apt to give this letter, when it terminates a word, the sound of t.. Those whose education has been neglected, do not pronounce it at all. Certain it is, however, that one of the principal rules of the Spanish orthography is, never to give two sounds to a letter, nor ever to express two sounds by one single character. From this then it follows, that not to pronounce the d at the end of words, or to pronounce it like t, is inconsistent with the funda- mental rules of Spanish orthography, and that, it must necessa- rily be pronounced as in any other part of the word. The sound of d therefore at the end of Spanish w^ords, is like, or very nearly like, ih, in soof/i, loa/Ae, &c. as, Deidad,verdad, tened, ardid. This sound is supported by the most eminent Spanish preachers, ora- tors, lawyers, such as Ergiiellas, Galiano, &c. * With regard to the sound of c, before e or i, it must be ob- 3erved, that it is not universal. In some provinces of Spain, as for instance, Galicia, Estremadura, Jlsturias, and in all South Jlmtri- ca, the generality of people sound it as s, in the English words, set, seat. The Andalusians give it a kind of lisp, and sound it with some affectation. It is in old and new Castile alone, that it is universally given to this letter the sound of th. But as the most erudite people of all the provinces both of old and new Spain, sound the c in the manner that is done by the Castilians; — as no rules of the Spanish Academy at Madrid, are more strongly inculcated than those relative to the sounding of the c before e or i like th in the English words thank, thick; — and as this sound, according to our opinion, is the most compatible with the genius of the Spanish languagCj we have no hesitation in saying, that 28 , ORTHOGRAPHY. G, Ijefore a, o, u^ or a consonant, sounds as in Eng- lish in the word gate.^ as, gana^ laguna; before e, i, ?/, as the English aspirate hf as, gigo^ geme. In the syllables gue, gui^ the u is mute, unless there oe a diseresis on it. H, is never pronounced. J, sounds always as g^ before e, i; eiS,jaco^jo, LL, sounds like the li of the English word pavilion; as, Uanto, lloro^ llega. N, sounds like ni in the English word pinion; as iiono, nudo, Una, Q, which is always followed by w, is pronounced as In English. In the syllables que, qui, the u is mute^ unless there be a diuresis on it. R,t sounds rough; 1st, when it is doubled; Sndly, when it begins a word; and 3rdly, after I, n, s; in all other caseSj it is pronounced smoothly. those who wish to speak the Spanish with purity, should adopt this manner of pronouncing the c. * Absolutely speaking, the English possesses no equivalent to the sound of Spanish g before e or i. The sound of the aspirate h in horde, host, seems to be the most similar to it. It is not how- ever, exactly alike. There exists some difference, which is this, that the sound of the English aspirate h is effected by an effort of the throat; and the Spanish g by an effort of the palate. It is for this reason, that the late Spanish writers on orthoepy, call this, a palatical, not a guttural sound. The author concurs per- fectly well with their opinion; and he, therefore, advises those persons anxious to acquire this sound, never to endeavour to form it by a strong impulse of the throat and lungs, but by a gen» tie effort of the upper end of the root of the mouth. f The Rj in the Spanish language, must always be thrilled; that is, it must be sounded by applying the end of the tongue to 1>,p inside of the upper teeth, and make it vibrate, ORTHOGRAPHY. 29 S, is always sounded as in the English word six^ as, sesos, sesera. X, before a vowel without a circumflex accent, sounds like g before e, i; as, coxo; in all other cases as in English; as, extinguir, exdmen. Y, is sounded as in English. When it stands alone, in which case it is a conjunction meaning and, it must be pronounced as i* in the English words fatigue^ ma- chine; as, padre j madre; father and mother. Z, sounds always as th in the word tliorn; as, zazoro^ zarza. Fundamental rules to read the Spanish loithout any foreign accent. 1st. To pronounce every letter, except the /i, and the u in gue, gui, and que, qui. 2nd. To pay particular attention to the peculiar ac- cent of each word, to know which, rules are given in Prosody. 3rd. To sound every vowel fully and distinctly, leaving, as it were, the consonants to take care of themselves. 4th. Never to pass over the small words, but to pro- nounce them clearly and distinctly. Tliis rule must be particularly attended to, as it is a cliaracterlstic of the English language never to have such words as, me, the, to, up, on., in, &c., sounded distinctly; unless the meaning of the sentence should reouire an emphasi« upon them. 5th. Never to give a very strong emphasis to any particular word in the sentence; for, as every word is * Many late authors make use of i instead oft/, to express thi? conjunction. 80 ORTHOGRAPHY. fully pronounced, there is not much room for particu- larizing any one with uncommon vehemence. 6th. In the general tone of conversation, the sound must never be transmitted to the throat, as is generally done in English at the end of sentences; but let it be extinguished in the hollow of the mouth. 7th. It is necessary not to fall into the erroneous impression that the Spaniards sound the letters B and V alike. There is no rule in the late treatise upon orthography, by the Spanish Academy at Madrid, which is so strongly inculcated as the one relating to the difference which must necessarily exist between the sound of B and V. The Spanish Academy, ought, on any occasion, to be sufficient authority to prove the correctness of any rule we may be disposed to give. But, as this erroneous impression has become very general, particularly among those persons, who, not understanding the Spanish language perfectly well, have heard native Spaniards speak, we shall explain the reason which has induced them to form an opinion so contrary to the rules of Spanish pronunciation. The Spaniards in pronouncing the V, join, like the English, the upper teeth to the lower lip. But, as in all those languages which have been chiefly formed from the Latin, the consonants are never sounded strongly, the pressure in Spanish, is not so strong as it is in English. In fact, none of the consonants are so strongly pronounced in Spmiish^ Italian^ &c., formed from the Latin, as they are in English, Gennan, &c. Hence it is, that the sound of V seems to be so near that of B; and that persons, who are not perfectly con- versant with the Spanish, find it so difficult to perceive the distinction between these two sounds; but which •listinction, is, in fact, as great as it is in English* ORTHOGRAPHY. 31 DIPHTHONGS AND TRIPHTHONGS. When in the same syllable two vowels come together they are called a diphthong; and when three, a triphthong. Diphthongs, ai, as in amms, ye love. au, causa., cause. ei, tenets, ret ye havei king- ea, sea, let it be. eo, reo. culprit. eUf dewda. debt. ia, tia, aunt. ie, hien, well. io, \io. bundle. ill, \iifdaL, widow. oe, roe, he gnaws. oi, sols, doi, ye are 5 give. Utty- ipua, sharp point. lie, hueyo. egg- ui, ciadado, care. no, ardz^o. ' arduous. Triphthongs. iai, teniais, ye had. iei, lidieis, ye may contend. uai, santigwms. huei, ye bless; ox. uei, averigzVeis, ye may investigate. Whenever any of the vowels of the diphthongs are ac- cented, they cease to be diphthongs; because each vowel belongs then to a separate syllable; as, lei, bria^ k-f, bri-o. 35 ORTHOGRAPHY. READING LESSONS. Lesson 1. Woi 'ds of one Syllable, la the sud south ml dog luz light dar to give cruz cross san saint frai father ser to be rei king ver to see sets six el he veis ye see te tea reo culprit sS I know leo I read mes month sien temple ir to go mio mine niit a thousand tio uncle fin end lio bundle col cabbage Bios God sol sun doi I give por for soi I am don gift vol I go un one juez judge su his Le« iSON 2. Words of two Syllables. Accent over the first. ar4e art lu-na moon al-ma soul ra-yo ray ham-bre Imnger cla-ro clear dn-gel angel ye-lo ice saurto saint glo-bo fflobe ORTHOGRAPHY. mr-te north ner-vio nerve es-te east ve-na vein oes-te west san-gre blood ist-mo isthmus pe-lo hair cues4a cost fren-te forehead fo-so ditch cue-llo neck pol-vo dust pe-cho breast lo-do mud hom-hros shoulders o-la w'£i\e co-do elbow puer-to port ma-no hands fuen-te spring ce-ja eyebrow si-glo age o-dio hatred a-no year go-zo joj mar-zo March de-seo desire ma-yo May vis-ta sight ju-lio July oi-do hearing quin-ce fifteen tac-to the touching ho-ra hour guan-tes gloves lu-nes Monday sue-gro father-in-law jue-ves Thursday sim-bol symbol vier-nes Friday ju-go juice al-va dawn ja-que bully tar -de evening jue-go play no-che night yer-ro error fies-ta holiday jar-ro pitcher cuer-po body zon-zo dunce hue -so bone L ESSON S. Accent over the second na-riz nose re-loj watcli a-loR wing bas-ton stick a -mar love cor- don tag 34 ORTHOGRAPHY. ju-bon spencer Ge-sus Jesus mu-ger woman do -lor pain pin-tor painter ver-dad truth Plu4on Pluto sa-lud health In-'gles English pre-til breastwork Fran-ces French ju-gad play ye Sac-son Saxon ja-bon soap du-dad city sa-gaz sagacious fi-gon cook shop US-ted you por-tal threshold gor-jal collar jar-din garden bajad descend ye si-llon armchair dei-dad deity per-diz partridge cau-sais ye excite pi-chon pigeon ren-dis ye surrende:P ja-mon ham te-neis ye hold mor-tal mortal vol-veis ye return vir-tud virtue ger-men germ so-cial social lu-gar village sa-lon hall ea-fe coffee fi-lial filial so-lar ground-floor Lesson 4. Words of three Syllables. Accent over the second. hor-ras-ca storm gra-ni-zo hail es-tre-lla star se-re-no evening dew htc-ma-no humane pe-lle-jo skin cria-tu-ra creature ca-be-za head co-lo-nia colony ce-le-bro brain con-da-dc shire me-gi-lla cheek a-bis-mo abyss mu-ne-ca wrist eo-lla-do hill ro-di-lla knee ml-za-da cause-way me-mo-ria memory ORTHOGRAPHY. 35 ca-mi-no road ves-ti-do dress cas-cci'jo gravel he-bi-llas buckles ar-ro-yo brook som-bre-ro hat es-tan-que pond cor-ba-ta cravat E-ne-ro January pa-ra-gua umbrella ma-na-na morning en-ca-ge lace cua-res-ma lent ^ zar-ci-llos ear-rings do-min-go Sunday sor-ti-ja ring in-vier-no winter man-ti-lla shawl a-yu-no fast day man-gui-to snuff a-bue-lo grand-father con-de-sa countess mu-cka-cho boy mar-que-sa marchioness mo-ci-to lad se-no-ra lady ma-dras-tra step-mother vi-driT-'o glazier his-nie-to great grand li-bre-ro book-seller son can-te-ro mason cu-na-do brother-in- Bo-hS-mio Bohemian law Pru-sia-no Prussian so-hri-no nephew Po-la-co Pole her-ma-no brother mer-ca-do market pa-dri-no god-father pa-la-cio palace pa-dras-to step-father co-me-dia play-house jKi-rien-te relation a-jon-ge birdlime o-bis-po bishop men-jun-ge a beverage sol-te-ro bachelor don-ce-lla maid his-nie-to grand-son Lesson 5. Accent over the first. vas-ta-go bud bi-bli-co biblical cd-ma-ra chamber bu-ca-ro earth-vessel bdr-ba-ro barbarian cdr-di-ne hinge ge-ne-ro kind laU'da-no laudanum m 36 ORTHOGRAPHY. ha-ja-mar low water cdl-cu-lo calculation hi-ga-do liver cS-du-la slip of paper huer-fa-no horfan ce-fi-ros zephyrs Bd-va-ro Bavarian S-po-m epoch Hiin-ga-ro Hungarian e-po-do epode In-cli-to renowned gim-ni-co gymnastical dn-gu-lo angle ju-bi-lo jubilee ti-tu-lo title in-ti-mo injtimate hdl-sa-mo balsam vd-li-do valid Id-gri-ma tear ro-tu-lo inscription Ids-ti-ma Ft J ndu-ti-ca nautical jd-be-ga moorish flute . ul-ti-mo last jd-ca-ra prattle tdc-ti-ca tactics prdc-ti-ca practice pul-pi-to pulpit s6-li-do solid Lesson 6^ Words of four Syllables. Be-pu-bli-ca republic ma-yo-rdz-go heir es-pi-ri-tu spirit za-pa-te-ro shoemaker n-ni-vSr-so universe ho-ri-z6nte horizon e-le-men-tos elements bo-fi-cd-rio apothecary fe-sur-reodon resurrec- cer-ra-ge-ro locksmith tion in-vd-li-do invalid es46-ma-go stomach jor-na-dz-ta little jour- Ja-za-ri-no Algerine ney jo-cun-di-ddd jocundity in-flec-si-on^ inflexion jar-re-ti-Ho little ram las-ci-vid-so lascivious jar-di-ni-co little gar- par-vi-fi-co parsimo- den nious a-jon-jo-li purging pa-ja-ri-co little bird grain pe-pi-na-zo blow with a-la-bdn-za praise cucumber DRTHOGRAPHY. 37 Lesson 7'. Words of five^ six^ ^c. Re-tro^gra-da-cion ge-ne-ra-li-si-mo Ge-ro-so-li-7ni-td-no Jo-co-sa-mai-te lu-ju-rio-sa-men-te pe-chi-co-lo-rd-do no-na-ge-nd-rio im-pres-cin-di-ble pa-ra-do-gi-co hi-po-ces-ti-de ca-pe-Iar-den-te in-cer-ti-dum-bre ca-ha-lle-ri-za de-se-cha-da-men-tt ar-qui'tec-tu-ra con-des-cen-den-cia ec-sa-ge-ra-cion es-tra-or-di-na-ria-men-tc gra-cid-si-si-mo mag-na-ni-mi-ddd ra-zo-na-mien-to ri-si-bi-li-ddd su-pers-ti-cio-so re-mo -li-mien-to re-in-cor-po-ra-cidn ir-re-mi'Si-ble-men-te con-de-co-ra-ci6n re-mu-ne-ra-cion in-de-pen -den-da al-ti-so-ndn-cia tem-pes-tl-va-men-te 4 Syllables, retrogradation commander in chief native of Jerusalem jocosely luxuriously goldfinch nonagenarian inseparable paradoxical a shoot of the cistus a funeral pile inceititude stable vilely architecture condescendence exaggeration extraordinarily very gracefully magnanimity speech risibility superstitious act of regrinding re-incorpoiation unpardonably decoration remuneration independence high so'Jtidedness opportunely 38 ORTHOGRAPHY. Lesson 8. LA LENGUA CASTELLANA. Este noble idioma que se distinguio en los tiempoc de obscuridad j riideza por su cultivo j magestad; en los dias de ilusti^acion y elegancia, le vemos estendido liasta los ultimos coniines del nuevo miindo, j sobrepii- jar en utilidad a los demas del orbe. Digan lo que quieran los enemigos de esta lengua, jamas podran negar, que tanto por riqueza, j hermosura, como por copiosidad j energia, no iguale y aun Ueve ventaja a cuantos se conocen. Los autores que con sus pro- ducciones imortales la ban enriquecido, son y seran el deleite y la admiracion de los siglos presentes y venide- ros. No hai materia por abstrusa que sea por la cual la Espaiia no haya producido varones insignes que la hayan tratado como merecia. No hai ninguna especie de poesia ya sea del genero elevado 6 del simple en que no cuente esta nacion sus hijos eminentes. No hai ningun evento historico, ocurrido en tiempos antiguos 6 modernos, que no se halle mencionado con veracidad, pureza y elegancia, por los cronologos de esta nacion. La Espaiia ha producido tambien hombres elocuenti simos; profundisimos jurisconsultos, grandes astrono- mos, que con todos los demas varones ilustres en la literatura y en la ciencia, han elevado el magestuoso idioma Espaiiol al auge en que se halla. Lesson 9. LA LENGUA INGLESA. Pretenden muchos que a este sublime idioma le faltan conos suaves; que la frecuencia de s fuerte hace sus sen- tencias desagradables al oidoj que sus aspiraciones le GRTHOliRAPHY. 39 quitan sii elegancia? j que se lialla todavia en un estado de rudeza ;Ciian ciega es la iguorancia! Nada es su~ perfluo en un lenguage, toda voz tiene su propio lugar seiialado. j siempre sera dura 6 suave, harmoniosa 6 desagradable, segun se use en la frase. Ni la s, ni la //. ni la sh, son de ninguna desventaja; al contrario cuan- do se hayan de espresar palabras que por su sonido se quiera hacer entender el sentido, son e:5tas letras las que mas lo efectuan. Tiene el idioma Ingles tantos difereiites sonidos, tantas modificaciones de acento y enfasis, tanta variedad de pronunciacion, que hace su adquisicion dificilisiina d todo estrangero. No es pues de cstranar que uno? desalentados por sus dificultadesj j otros frustados en la esparanza de adquirirle, le hayan pronunciado en un estado de rudeza. Sin embargo no se espresan asi, aquellos, que, penetrados de los obstaculos que han de vencerse en el estudio de esta lengiia, le hayan abierto por medio de su perseveranciu y aplicacion, sus inmen- sos tesoros; aquellos, digo, que enlienden y sienten la suavidad y fuerza que se deben dar a muchos sonidos. cuya dureza solo ecsiste en la iniaginacion de los prin- cipiantes. Pero a que discurrir sobre los meritos de uij idioma que fue sacado de su rudeza por Chocer, eleva- do por Shakespear, Milton y Dryden. y establecido poi Johnson? ^De un idioma, que si le hallamos energico en las obras profundi sima.s de Locke, Stewart, y Brown: le admiramos magnifico en los labios de Chatham y Burke, y se convierte en melifluos acentos en la? paginas de Pope? <:De un idioma que sirve hoi dia para decorar los conceptos de tantos eminentes varones. cuyos acentos retumban por todos los hemisferios del *nundo civilizado? 4d ORTHOGRAPHY. Lesson 10. LOS NORTE AMERICANOS. Jamas ha presentado el mundo en su marcha hacia la perfeccion, un fenomena tan estupendo como le presen- tan hoi dia los Estados Unidos. Ni las historias anti- guas, ni las modernas, nos hablan de una nacion que en el cortisimo espacio de medio siglo despues de haberse emancipado de una de las mas formidables naciones del mundo, compita en elegancia, ilustracion, j energia a cuantas contiene el orbe civilizado. Un progreso tan rapido, en estos siglos de luces, ha formado en los habi- tantes de esta nacion un caracter mui diferente de los conocidos antes. Su deseo de libertad, les hizo valero- sos^ sus sucesos, nobles y humanosj su emulacion, activos; iu comercio, sagaces; sus instituciones y naturaleza, re- decsivos y graves. Sin embargo las dos calidades que dan mas golpe en los Americanos, son su energica activi- dad y su madura reflecsion, que nacen de las institucio- nes del pais. Estas se ven en todas sus operaciones, y son las que dan origen a tantas otras calidades, que la ignorancia y falta de conocimiento les dan muchas veces mal sentido. Estas son las que les hacen ser temperados en sus demostraciones, lo que se convierte muchas veces en falta de sensibilidad; las que les inspiran sen- limientos de decoro en sus amistades, que se considem muchas veces como a falta de sociabilidad^ las que les hacen siempre estar dentro los confines de la prudencia en las acciones de la vida, que se iniplica frecuente- mente a policia refinada^ las que les hacen observantes, y estudiosos de las cosas y de los hombres, cautos en sus espresiones, y reservados en sus costumbres, lo que ORTHOGRAPHY. 41 se toma frecuentemente por frigidez de almaj las que les hacen persuadir que pueden hoi levantarse todos en cuerpos formidables a repeler el enemigo, y manana volver a sus ocupaciones, que se interpreta en orgullo y altivez. Pero si estas dos calidades lian deslumbrado a muchos que no los conocen, han servido a levantar una sociedad civil, que hace gloria a la nacion a quieii los Americanos deben su ecsistencia. Faltas, ni a nin- gun individuo, ni a ninguna nacion pueden faltar; y el que considere que aun cuando las cosas humanas se trageran a su mas alto auge de perfeccion podrian me- jorarse, no encontrara dificultad en perdonar las que nazcan de la grandeza. Lesson 11. INDUSTRIA. ;Qu6 cosa mas necesaria en esta vida que la iiidus tria.^ (jQuien pudo jamas adelantar en ninguna empresa sin ella.^ ^jQuien se encontro jamas libre de corazon. desenredado de vapores melancolicos, sin esta hija de la felicidad.^ ; Ah, que engaiiados vivis, los que pensais que la indolencia trae consigo reposo! De nada nos sirven nuestras facilidades si no nos valemos de ellas por medio de nuestros esfuerzos personates. Mira, reconoce, observa aquellos hombres que les hace el mundo tantos acatamientos, y les da tantas alabanzas por su ingenio y talentos; observalos, digo, y veras cuan pocos mementos de su vida sacrifican a la indo- lencia. ,;Que fruto sacaria el labrador de sus fertile? terrenos, si con su industria no los cultivase? ^'De que servicio puede ser el hombre a sus semejantes, si no pone en accion las potencias que le fueron concedidas por el Omnipotente.P Piensa, ;0 mortal! que haciendo- 4* 4a ORTHOGRAPHY. te iltil a los hombres, cumples tino de los tines por que fiiiste piiesto en este valle de miserias. (-'Como piiede& 'pues hacerlo sin la actividad^ como puedes cumplirla, si permitas que tus facultades esten adormecidas, j queden sepultadas en un profundo letargo, durante los preciosos momentos de tu vida? Lessox 12. LA RELIGION. (jQuien saco a los hombres de un estado de tinieblas^ Y barbaridad.^ (jQuien les inspire aquellos sentimientos elevados y nobles que vemos espresados en tantas ocasiones.^ iQuien difundio por tanta parte del globo la civilizacion.^ jQuien liace temblar al malo, engoifar en un pielago de miserias al incredulo, j elevar a tan alto grado el alma del justo.*^ La religion. Ellapura, casta, y firme, al mismo tiempo que perfecciona nuestra na- turaleza; nos inspira en nuestras perfidias, un pavor terrible, que cuanto le ocultamos con la cara, tanto nos roe el eorazon. Si, tu, ;0 adorable religion! tan perseguida de los malos, eres la que les pones a sus ojos ios medios de la eterna salvacion. Tu eres la que por tantos titulos debieran abrazarte; la que por los vincu- los de la gratitud, debieran adorarte. ; Que locura del hombre, despreciar al que le ofrece los medios de feli- cidad temporal y eterna ! t Que ceguera, no ver la rapi- dez con que vuela al tiempo hacia la eternidad donde nuestra suerte se decidira! Pero todavia mas ceguera, no querer seguir los santos dogmas que provienen del Eterno, para asegurar en esta vida la salvacion de la atra. ORTHOGRAPHY. 45 ON SPELLING. According to the rules given, for the pronunciation of consonants: c, or q; z, or c; g, or j; &c. might be in- discriminately used in the syllables cua, cuo; ge, gi, &c. The best usage, however, has sanctioned the following rules, which must be observed b j every accurate writer, 1st. C is always to be used in the syllables ce, ci^ and not z; although c and z in these cases, sound alike; as, celos, and not zelos. 2nd. P is never to be followed by /?, an/ being sub- stituted in place of these two letters; as, /«/«?? o-e, and not phalange; but whenever it shall be found in books written long since, or in proper names of countries, places, &c. the ph is to be pronounced as in English. 3rd. Q is used only in the syllables que, qui; qiiiero, quema: qua, que, qiii, quo, are to be written with c; as. ciianto, cuento, cuota. 4th. X; thig letter, when found in books, is to be pro- nounced according to the rules given, but now its pala- tical sound is supplied by^ before a, o, u, and by^, be- fore e, i; so that, the palatical sounds in Spanish, must always be spelled thus, ja, jo, ju, ge,^ gi. The sub- stitute of X before a consonant, must be an s; as, estre- mo, and not extremo; escitar and not excitar; and be- fore a vowel with a circumflex accent on it a cs; as ecsdmen and not exdmen,'\ * Many persons write the syllables ge, gi, with j. Others write some words with g, and some with j. The most simple manner, and therefore the most consistent with the rules of the Spanish Orthography is, to write the syllables ge, gi, always with g. t This letter x has therefore been exploded from the Spanish Alphabet. We must say, however, that some persons, do not, as yet, use the cs instead of x. In this case, they never place the cir- 44 ORTHOGRAPHY. 5th. Heretofore the y has been used both as a conso- nant, and a vowel. Now, the most eminent Spanish writers, use it as a vowel only. Hence the syllables «?/, ey^ oy^ uyr are no longer written with a y, but with an z; as, estai, rei^ soi, muL N. B. Words are to be written as they are pro- nounced. ^ List of Words similar in Sound, but different in Spelling, dcerbo, harsh Acervo, a head Halal hallo! Jlla, wing Ahi, there m, alas ! Hai, there is Corbeta, a sloop Corveta, a curvet Deshojar, to deprive of leaves Desojar, to deprive of ejes Envestir, to invest Embestir, to attack Envestidura^ an investment Embestidura, an attack Grabar. to engrave Gravar, to oppress Ha, he has A, to Halon^ a halloo Mon, a pinion Hastcu until Asia a haft Hdtago a herd Atago, a cross path Haya, a beach tree Aya, a governess He, I have E, and Herrar, to shoe horses Errar to err HHiea, a phthysis Etica, ethics Hierro, iron Yerro, error eumflex aceent over the vowel which the x precedes. In reading the late publications, the x, is to be pronounced as cs; whether the vowel has a circumflex accent or not. * Some authors use the i instead of the conjunction y, and say, siete i ocho, seven and eight. This practice is not sufficiently ge- neral to sanction its adoption. ORTHOGRAPHY. 45 Hita, a brad nail Vaqueta, sole leather ltd. eta Baqneta, a ramrod Ho-ear, to turn over the Varon, a male human being leaves of a book Baron, a baron Ogear to start game Varolii a, descent by male Holal halloo ! issue Ola, a wave Baronia, a barony Hondas. slings Vasto, extensive Ondas, billows Basto coarse Huso, a spindle Vendicion, a sale Uso, usage Bendicion, a blessing Bebelarse, to rebel Veneficiar. to bewitch Revelarse, to reveal Beneficiar. to benefit Rib era, a shore Venejicio, bewitching Rivera, a rivulet Beneficio, beneficent Falar,'^ vallar Veta, a mineral vein Balar, to bleat Beta a rope's end Valon, a Walloon Volada, ■ the flight of birds Balon a large bale Bolada, the act of bowling Observations on the manner of dividing the Spanish Words into Syllables. Compound words are to be divided into their two component parts; as, ab-negacion, con-cavidad, pre- ambido, mal-rotar. When the second component part of a w ord begins with s, followed by another consonant, the s belongs to the first part; as, cons-truir, ins-pirar, pers-picaz. Two vowels coming together, must be parted; as, Sa-avedra, le-er, pi-zsimo, co-operar. * It is to be observed, that between Volar and Balar and other words of this kind, there is a similarity, not a sameness of soun(J. 46 ORTHOGRAPHY. A consonant coming between two vowels, belongs to the vowel bj which it is followed; as, a-mor^ pe-yia^ le-che,* ga-llo.* *- Two consonants, coming between two vowels, are divided; as, al-zai\ cas-tor^ 7yidr-tir. But should the first consonant be the semivowel/, or any oi the mutes, and the second I or r, both the consonants are then joined to the vowel by which they are followed; as, ta-bla, co-bre, la-cre, an-drajo. Except, at-leta, and at-lante. When s is preceded bj b, /, m, n, or r, and followed bj another consonant at the same time, s must be join- ed to the consonant by which it is preceded; as, Ams- terdam. Four consonants coming between two vowels are equally divided between them: as, tr secretaria secretaryship Secret'". > ' Secret'. ^ s-. . secretario secretary Secret'". ^ . Se . 7'\ Sefiembre September S-. serenisimo most serene Serv\ servicio service Serv"\ servidor servant Sig. sigtdente following SS™". P% santisimo padre most holy father SS"°. escribano notary Sup". suplica entreaty or petition Sup". suplicante petitioner Super''. superintendente superintendant Ten'% teniente lieutenant Tom. tomo volume Tpo. tiempo time V. V .Ven . venerable venerable V. A. vuestra alteza your highness V. B^ vuestra beatitud your blessedness V. E. vucelencia your excellency V. G. verbigracia for example Vm. Vmd . vuesamerced or usted a title similar to wor ship in English Vms. ustedes your worships V. P. vuestra paternidad your paternity I 54 ORTHOGRAPHY. V, S. vuesenoria or usza your iordsliip V. S. vuestra santidad your holiness V. S. S. vuesenorias your lordships V. S. I. vuesenoria ilustrzsima your grace Y\ vellon bullion Vol. volumen volume Vro. vuestro your X""". diezmo tithe Xptiano. Cristiano Christian Xpto. Crist Christ XptobaL Cristobal Christopher PART II. ETYMOLOGY. Etymology treats of words and their derivations^ enumerates their different species, and shows their va- rious modifications. Words are divided into primitive and derivative. A primitive word is that which is formed from no other word in the same language; as, cielo^ heaven; viento, wind. A derivative is derived from some otlier word in the language; as, celeste, heavenly; ventoso, windy. The Spanish language is composed of nine different sorts of words, called parts of speech: namely, Noun, Article, Adjective, Pronoun, Verb, Adverb, Preposition, Conjunction, Interjection. 1. A noun is a word which presents to the mind the idea of any object, being, or thing whatever; as, Nue- va-York, New-York; Sol, Sun; ciudacl, city. 2. An article is a word placed before a noun, to de- note the full extent of its signification; as, la reina, the queen; el hombre, the man. 3. An adjective is a word used to express the quali- ty of a noun; as, hombre valeroso, a valiant man; mu- ger virtuosa, a virtuous woman. 4. A pronoun is a word placed instead of a noun, to prevent the too frequent repetition of the same word; as, '•'eljusto aborrece el pecado, el le detestas^^ the right- eous man hates sin^ he detests itc 56 ETYMOLOGY, 5. A verb denotes the existence, action, or ptlssion of things 5 that is, being, doing, or suffering; as, eJ ec- siste, he exists; ella escribe, she icrites; el es herido, he is ivoimded. 6. Adverbs serve to modify the signification of verbs; as, lee bien, he reads well; es tarde, it is late. 7. Prepositions shew the relation that one word has with another; as, el fue de Baltimore a Boston^ he wentfro7n Baltimore to Boston. 8. A conjunction connects words and sentences to- gether; as, tu J el soisfelices^ porque sois bttenos, thou and he are happy because vou are good. 9. An interjection is a part of speech, which expres- ses the passions or emotions of the mind of the person who speaks; as, ""O hombrel man mudable eresP^ man how cfiangeable thou art! OF THE NOUN. A noun is a word which presents to the mind the idea of any object, being, or thing whatever; as JVue- va-Yorkj New York; Sol, Sun; ciudad, city. It is di- vided into three kinds, proper, appellative or common, and abstract. A Proper noun is that which relates to an individual person or thing; as Londres, London; Sol, Sun; Fila- deljia, Philadelphia; Espaha, Spain. An appellative is a name descriptive of a class of similar persons or things; as," animal, animal; ciudad, city; hombre, man; mesa, table. An M struct is a name which relates to an object, that exists in the mind only; as, corage, courage; tiempo, time; virtud, virtue. ETYMOLOGY. 5T There are other nouns, which, although included in the foregoing classes, are distinguished by other names, for greater grammatical perspicuity. These are: augmentative, diminutive, and collective nouns. Of j^ugmentative and Diminutive Nouns. There are in Spanish, some derivative nouns which are formed by the addition of certain terminations to their primitives. They are called augmentative and diminutive; because they denote increase or decrease in the noun from which they are formed. The terminations adopted to denote increase are: azo, on, and ote — and those to express decrease are: ico, illo, ito, and uelo; as, from hombre, man: is deriv- ed hombron, hombrazo, hombrote, a large man; from libro, book, is derived librillo, librito, libruelo, a small book. Jllo, sometimes, and uelo, almost always, denote contempt and disgust. 0/ Collective JVouns. Nouns singular, representing several persons or things, are called collectives. They are divided into definite and indefinite. Definite collective nouns are those, which define the persons or things of which they are composed; as, re- gimiento, many soldiers; arboleda, many trees. Indefinite collective nouns, denote a number of inde- termined persons or things; as, turba, a crowd; injini- dad„ infinity; muchedumbre, multitude. 58 ETYMOLOGY. TO NOUNS BELONG GENDER, NUMBER, AND CASE. Gender. Gender is the distinction of sex 5 there are properly speaking two genders only: masculine, denoting ob- jects of the male kind, and the feminine, denoting ob- jects of the female kind; as, hombre, man; muger, wo- man; libro, book; mesa, table. Some nouns which are so indefinitely used, that their gender cannot be determined, are termed neuter; and they must always be preceded by the neuter article lo; as, lo biieno, the good, or that which is good; lo ^nalo^ the bad, or that which is bad. Others which are equally applicable to objects denot- ing the male or female kind, and vary the article to show the distinction of genders, are called common; as, c^ testigo, the male witness; la testigo, the female wit- ness; el homicida, the homicide (man;) la homiciday the homicide (woman,) Others which, without varying the article, denote either the masculine or the feminine of a genus, arfe termed epicoen; as, elraton, the male or female mouse; la rata, tlie male or female rat; el j^cito, the duck, or drake. Rules to distinguish the Geiider of Nouns. There are two methods of distinguishing the gender of Spanish nouns; first, by their meaning, and second- ly, by their termination. Rule 1. Nouns which signify males, or which denote dignities, professions, employments, &c. applicable to men, are masculine; and those which signify females, ETYMOLOGY- 5§ or the dignities, professions, &c. generally applied to women, are feminine; as, hombre, man; caballo, horse; emperador^ emperor; monge, monk; sastre^ tailor, &c. and muger^ woman; gallina hen; emperatriz, empress; monja, nun; costurera^ sempstress, &c. N. B. Haca^ a ponj, is always feminine. Bule 2. Nouns ending in «, d, ion, are feminine; nouns ending otherwise, are masculine; ?i^,ventana, win- dow; salud, health; ititencion, intention; tcdle, shape; aleltf jilly-flower; clavel, pink. Rule 3. All abstract nouns, ending in ez, are femi- nine; as, esfrechez, narrowness; redondez, roundness; palidez, paleness. Bide 4. The names of the alphabetic characters, as well as of the figures of rhetoric, poetry, and grammar, (except metaplasmo, pleonasmo, hyperbaton^) are femi- nine. Ride 5. The names of sciences, arts, rivers, moun- tains, winds, and seasons, follow the rule of their ter- mination, according to rule the 2nd: hence Dibiijo^ Tajo, Helicon, Norte, Invierno, are masculine; and, Teologia, Escidtura, Tramontana, Primavera, are fe- minine; except Etna, wliich is masculine. Rule 6. Nouns which are used only in the plural are of the gender to which they would belong, according to their termination, had they a singular number. Thus VI ceres, provisions, is masculine; and teno.zas, tongs, is feminine; these being the genders to which vivere, and tenaza, would be referred, had the said nouns a singu- lar number; except efemerides, fasces, fauces, Hares, preces, trebedes, which are feminine. Rule 7. The names of the musical notes which com- pose the octave are masculine; as, el re, el mif el la, el fa, ^'c. i 60 ETYMOLOGY. Gender of Nouns. Exceptions from Rule 2. Feminine Nouns which do not end in a, d, ion. Sguachirle C Slipslop; (a fcinc/ I of beverage) catdstrofe catastrophe certidumbre certainly Chydromel; lio- cerviz cervix aguamiel < ney and loa- cliurre grease ( ter.) clase class alache shad clavazon row of nails alsine chickweed clave key unagdlide i pimpernel; {a '[ plant) clemdtide ( climber; (a I plant) anagiris beautrefoil din or crin mane antiperistasis antiperistasis* codorniz quail apoteosis ( apotheosis ;(dei- ( Jication) cohorte cohortet col cabbage arrumazon stowage colapiscis isinglass ave a fowl compdges a joint azumbre a measure corriente stream Bacdris flea-bane corte court harbarie barbarity costumbre custom harbechazon fallowing time coz kick hcifie basis crasicie flood tide bezoar bezoar creciente hilis bile crenche < the parting of ( the hair binazon < the second \ ploughing crisis crisis Calvicie baldness cruz cross cal lime cumbre summit calle street Decretal decretals capelardente a funeral pile desazon uneasiness capital metropolis ( a general term diapedisis ( diapedis; (ooz- \ ing of blood) ' tarambre } for hides of diartrosis diarthrosis§ y all kinds C diesis or sharp; came flesh diesis < (a musical car eel prison ( term) cargazon cargo diocesi diocese caridtide caryatidesf dulcedtimbre sweetness : * 'I'he action of two contrary qualities, one of which, by its opposi- tion, lieightens the other t Columns or pilasters under the figures of women dressed in long robes. ^ A body Df Roman troops com )Osed of 500 men. § Anatomical term, meaning loose juncture of the bones. ETYMOLOGY. 61 < smooth speed- l vre]l;(a plant) an herb C emphyteusis; < {alienation of ( property) epiglottis* ( bastard hfille- \ bore spheroid species race scarlea;(a;}Zanf) ( aetites; (eagle I bone) phalanx hunger phase visage faith fever forehead fountain ( dead-nettle; I (hemp) people gratiola(rtn herb) flock hunger bundle helix ( pellitory; (an I herb ( haematites; (ore I of iron) ( hemionite; a \ plant) rust of iron dregs gall ( hypocist; (a I plant) hypostasis! hypothesis a kind of cake sickle Matine enante enfiteiisis epiglotis epipactide esferoide especie estirpe etiopide elites Falange fame fase faz fe Jievre frente fuente Galiopsis, gente gi-aciadei grei Hambre haz helice helgine hematites hemionite herrumbre hez hiel kipocistide hipostasis hipotesis hojaldre hoi * Cartilage of the larynx, which covers the wind-pipe, t A theological term, meaning person. \ A glass espherically convex on both sides, such as a burning glass, a spectacle glass, &c. 6 Incertidnmbre imcertainty indole temper ingle groin imdgen image intemperie ( intemperate^ I ness labor work lande ( a species of a- \ corn landre ( a glandular I swelling laringe larynx laude praise leche milk legumbre pulse lei law lente lens| liebre hare Hendre nit lis flower de lys lite or litis litigation luinbre fire luz light Have key fmace; (the se- Mdcis i cond of three 1 coverings of a [^ nutmeg) mono hand jnansedumbre meekness mengxiante ebb tide rnente mind metamorfom metamorphosis metemsicosis metempsychosis metropoli metropolis miel honey mies crop mole mass molicie effeminacy muchedumbre multitude muerte death mugre dearth Aao ship nariz nose nave vessel nieve snow i I 62 ETYMOLOGY. ninez noche childhood night sardonics ( sardonyx; (a ( precious stone\ nube cloud sarten frying pan idue- nut sazon season Palmacristi palmachrist sede seat par af rase paraphrase segazon reaping time paraltcsis parallax* segur axe paralisis palsy selenites selenitesj paranesis paranesis senal signal paraselene mock moon serie series parte part serpiente serpent patente patent servidumbre servitude paz peace sien temple peplide wild purslain sineresis synaeresis§ perdiz partridge sinderesis remorse pesadumbre grief sinrazon wrong peste plague sintdcsis syntax pez pitch sirte quicksand piel skin sobrehaz surface pirdmide pyramid sobrepellis surplice pigide pixf suerte chance planicie plain superjicie superfice plebe rabble Tarde afternoon \ plomazon 1 the gilders' ] cushion teame a kind of stone techumbre roof podre P"^ . ,, temperie temperature polispdstos tackle of pulleys tesis thesis pomez pumice tez complexion progenie progeny tilde tittle prole issue ttsis phthisis q,uiete quietus torre tower j Jlaiz root [of malady) tos cough 1 ' raquUis rickets; (a sort trabazon juncture razon reason trabe beam or girder res head of cattle tribu tribe Sangre Wood tripods tripod sal salt troge granary 1 salumbre oxide of salt troj granary salve the salve regina Ubre udder salsifracs ■ < saxifrage; (a I plant) urdiembre Varice warp varix|j * Parallax, an astrononiical term, signifying the distance between the true and the apparent place of any star viewed from the earth, t A little box in vvhich the consecrated host is kept. X Crystalized gypsum. § A figure by which two syllables are united into on?., d Dilation of a vein, ETYMOLOGY. 63 velambre ( certain nuptial ( rights. vocal voz vowel voice vez time Zoster shingles vislumore glimmering Exceptions to Rule % Masculine Nouns with Feminine terminations. dogma drama| embryon enigma enthymen^ epigram sperm sparrow ;( a 6ird) Ca custom house i_ cutter maintop taclile a standard gyjst language telescope lute lemma|j manna map murrain paradignx umbrella musical staff planet poem Cprism;(«niMsfrw- (_ment of opticks) problem essay measles symptom system * A great swell of waters. t A transposition of the letters of a name, sentence or phrase. % And also its compounds; as, melo-drama, § An imperfect syllogism, consisting only of an antecedent, and a consequential proposition. J A proposition previously assumed- Jicsloma axiom dogma C the chief of a drama adalid < band of war- Embrion ( riors. enigma ^dema prop entimema alamud a door bar epigrama albacea executor esperma ■ a measure con- Gorrion alamud taining about the 9 th part gum-dacosta of a bushel guardavela aluvion alluvion* guion anagrama anagramf Huesped anbtwion sudden shock Id'wma ( aneurism,(adis- Largomira aneurisma < ease of the ar- laud ( teries) lema antipoda antipode Mand archilaud species of lute inapa ardid stratagem morrion ataud coffin Paradigma avion martin ; (o bird) paragua Cesped turf pentagrama chirrion tumbril or cart planeia clima climate poema cometa comet cnsma chrism prisma Dia day prcblema diafragma midriff progimnasma diagrama diagram Sarampion dilema dilemma stntoma diploma diploma sistema 64 ETYMOLOGY. sofa sofisma sofa sophism tapaboca Ca slap on the I mouth sud south ieorema theorem Taknud talmud* Viva cheer — huzza tema theme Nouns used with either article. Albald certificate Hermafrodita hermaphroditfe anatema anthema, {or eX- hiperbole hyperbole eommunication) Mar seaj oste artf mdrgen margin Canal canal Jfema seal of a lettei cisma schism orden order§ mtis skin Peringue dripping Dote dowry puenie bridge Emhlema emblem Reuma rheum Of Number, Number is that property of a noun by which we de- note one or more of the same class. There are two numbers 5 the singular, which signifies only onej as, ciudad, city; rio, river; and the plural, which denotes more than one; as, ciudades, cities, rios, rivers. Formation of the Plural Number. The Spaniards form the plural of their nouns by ad- ding an s, to the nouns ending in a rowel not accent- ed; as, libro, a book; libros, books; tintero, an inkstands linteros^ inkstands; and by adding es, to those which end with an accented vowel or a consonant; as, alholz, a granary; alholies, granaries; arbol, a tree; arboles, trees. If the final consonant be a z, it must be changed into ces; as, luz, a light; luces, lights. • A book containing the doctrines and laws of Moses. t It is almost always feminine in the plural; as, las artes mechanicas. I All the compounds of mar,- as, bajamar, &c. are feminine. § When synonymous with command, it is feminine. ETYMOLOGY. 65 If it be an i, it must be changed into yes; as, rei, a king; i^eyes, kings. N. B. The following nouns undergo no change in the plural: cortaplumus, penknife; sacamuelas, toothdraw-. er; sacatrdpos, corkscrew; Lunes, Monday; 3Iartes, Tuesday; 3Iiercoles, Wednesday; Jueves, Thursday; Viernes, Friday. These are used only in the plural: Albricias, a gift; alicates, pincers; bofes^ lungs; des- pabiladeras, snuffers; livianos, lights; lldres, pot-hang- ers; puches, pap; tendzas, tongs; trebedes, trevet; vis- peraSj vespers; viveres, provisions. Of Case, Case exhibits the different relations of nouns. The Spanish nouns have two cases; the nominative and the objective.* * In thus assigning two cases to Spanish nouns, the author has deviated from almost every Spanish grammarian, and even from the Academy at Madrid. Case, from (casus,) signifies, in its strict- est sense, the manner or mode in which a word stands in a sen- tence, and thereby, the relation which it bears to any other word, unaided by any other part of speech. In Spanish, properly speak- ing, nouns can only have one case, or in other words, they can only stand in one manner, as their relation to other words, is en- tirely expressed by prepositions. Thus in the phrase, "esfe libro es da Pedro,^'' {this look is Peter^s) it would be impossible to say that the relation existing between liiro and Pedro was expressed by either of the words, because it entirely depends on the preposition de. In the Greek, Latin, and all other ancient languages, the sub- stantives themselves either with, or without modification or in- flection, are expressive of the relation which they bear to other words. They are therefore susceptible of cases, or of standing in as diflferent manners, as they have inflections or modifications. It is true these languages are not destitute of prepositions. This 6^ I 66 ETYMOLOGY. The nominative case simply expresses the name of a thing, or the subject of a verbj as, el padre, the father^ el embajador escribe, the ambassador writes. The objective case expresses the object of an action^ or of a relation I and generally follows a verb or a pre- position^ as, con la pluma escribid el rei la carta, with the pen did the king write the letter. In this sentence the nouns pluma and carta are both in the objective case 5 pluma, because it has the preposition con prefix- ed 5 and carta, because it is the object to which the action of the verb is transmitted. circumstance, however, though it has misguided many gramma- rians, and has led them to the belief, that prepositions are nothing but mere modifications, is very strongly in favour of the Spanish nouns having but one case. If prepositions are but modifica- tions, how does it happen, that they always, in the ancient languages, presuppose the necessity of inflection in the word they govern? The author cannot conceive how it could be possible that a word should be modified to express a relation, which was plain ly and clearly pointed out by a preposition. Should it be taken lor granted, as many have done, that prepositions are always understood; and that, to modify a word, and to employ a pre- position to express the same relation, is merely to effect it in a more conspicuous or energetic manner, we must always come to the first conclusion, that substantives in ancient languages are sus- ceptible of being modified; and of thus expressing, without the necessity of prepositions, their various relations. Now it is per- fectly well known, that substantives of modern languages, the German and some other excepted, are not susceptible of any change, modification or inflection, which is the same as to say that they have no cases. It is also erroneous to suppose that prepositions in modern lan- guages are mere modifications, for the same reason stated above, that prepositions exist in ancient languages, in which, substan- tives are susceptible of modification. Besides, if we supposed prepositions to be modifications every one should govern oj; direct ETYMOLOGY. 07 Declension of Nouns. Singular. Nominative. Mesa, table. Objective. mesa, table. Plural. Nom. Mesas, tables. Object, mesas, tables. OF THE ARTICLE. An article is a word placed before a noun, to denote the full extent of its signification 5 as, la reina, the queen^ el hombre, the man. a new case, which the genius of any language cannot, in any man- ner, sanction. With regard to pronouns and verbs, there is a much greater si- milarity between the modern and ancient languages. In English, Spanish, French, &c. we find that pronouns are susceptible of in- flection and of modification. We say icAo, whosi, whom; and in Spanish, Yo, mi, me, &c. As to the verbs, they undergo nearly the same variations in Spanish, French, &c. as in Latin and Greek. It is remarkable that English verbs are less susceptible of inflec- tion, than those of any language known. However, the deficien- cies of inflection are supplied by the constant use of personal pronouns, and by a variety of auxiliary particles. As verbs de- note the existence of things and circumstances, together with the time of existence, verbs must have tenses and moods. The di- Tision of these in the ancient languages, being, so far, the most simple, is, perhaps better calculated for the modern languages than any other. In regard to cases or the modifications undergone by substan- tiyes, adjectives, and pronouns, according to their relations with 68 ETYMOLOGY. The article, like nouns, has the variation of gender, number, and case. The Spanish articles are; el, the, for the masculine singular. los, the, for the masculine plural. la, the, for the feminine singular. las, the, for the feminine plural. lo, the, for the neuter, which has no plural; it being always prefixed to singular nouns. Nouns declined with the Article. MASCULINE* Singular. Nom. El ret, the king. Object. *al rei, to the king. other words, the ancient, differ so essentially from the modern lan= guages, that we can no longer follow^, in this respect, the Latin grammar. As grammar is merely a collection of rules, gathered after a language has been formed, grammar must yield to the na- ture of the language it treats, and not the language to the caprices of grammarians. Hence, and be it said to the honour of Beattie and Murray, it has been found expedient to assign but two cases to all the languages, the substantives, adjectives and pronouns of which, are susceptible of very limited modification. One of these cases is called the nominative, to express the subject of an action or relation, and the objective, to express the object of this action or relation through the medium of a verb or preposition. This is the division of cases which the author of this grammar lias adopted. He is fully convinced that it is the most consistent with the genius of the Spanish, and the only one which can render to Americans or Englishmen, the rules of this grammar perfectly clear and simple. * alj to the, is a contraction of a el; and del, of the, of tie e?v ETYMOLOGY. 69 Plural. Nom, Los reyes, the kings. Object, d los reyes, to the kings Singular. Nom. El libro, the book^ Object, al libro, to the book. Plural. Nom. Los libros, the books. Object, d los libros, to the books. FEMININE. Singular. iVbm. La rema, the queen. Object, a la reina, to the queen. Plural. Nom. Las reinas, the queens. Object, a las reinas, to the queens. Singular. Nom. La casa, the house. Object, d la casa, to the house. Plural. Nom. Las casas, the houses. Object, d las casas, to the houses, OF THE ADJECTIVE, An adjective is a word used to express the quality of a noun^ as, hombre valeroso, a valiant man^ muger vir'- tuosa, a virtuous woma». TO ETYMOLOGY. Nouns declined with Jidjedives. Singular. Nom. El hombre sabio, the wise man. Object al hombre sdbio, to the Avise mam Plural. Nom. Los hombres sabios, the wise men. Object, a los hombres sabios, to the wise men. Singular. Nom. La muger buena, the good woman. Object, d la muger buena, to the good woman- Plural.. Norn* Las mugerea buenas, the good women. Object, d las mugeres buenas, to the good women. Since the adjective expresses the quality of the sub- stantive or noun, it is evident that it never can be used in a sentence without having a substantive, either ex- pressed or understood, to which the quality implied in the adjective is applicable. If to the noun understood we can ascribe a gender, the adjective is preceded by the article which the noun understood would require; as el bueno ama la virtud, a good man loves virtue. If the adjective qualifies some thing to which we cannot ascribe a gender, the adjec- tive, in that case, is preceded by the neuter article; as, el le dijo que no leyera, pero ella hizo lo contrario, he told her not to read, but she did the contrary. When- ever therefore we can prefix to the adjective in English, that which, or what, we must use in Spanish, the neu- ETYMOLOGY. 71 ter, not the definite article. Thus we might have said, she did that which or ivhat was the contrary. N. B. The plural of adjectives is formed like the plu- ral of substantives. OF THE DEGREES OF COMPARISON. There are three degrees of comparison, termed the positive, the comparative and the superlative. The positive is simply the adjective^ as, bueno, good; malo, bad. The comparative increases or lessens the quality of the positive, and is also used to compare one object with another; as, grande, great; mas grande, greater^ bueno, good; mejor, better; el sol es mas brillante que la lima^ the sun is brighter than the moon; el sol es mas brillante que las piedras preciosas, the sun is brighter than precious stones. The superlative increases or diminishes the significa- tion to the highest, or lowest degree; as, el sol es un planeta mui brillante, or brillantisimo, the sun is a very bright planet. When the superlative is to express com- parison, we must prefix el mas, most; or el menos, least, to the adjective, which must be followed by the preposi- tion de; as, Pedro es el mas sabio de todos los de su lugar^ Peter is the ivisest of all in his village; el es el menos eriidito de todos, he is the least erudite of all. OF CARDINAL AND ORDINAL NUMBERS. Some adjectives are termed cardinal, on accoant of iheir expressing numbers; as, three, six, eight, tres, seis, ochoy 4'c. OtherSjj ordinal, because they denote order, such as, third, fourth, fifths tercero, cuarto, quinto. ETYMOLOGY. dos tres cuatro cinco seis siete ocho nueve diez once doce trece catorce quince diez y seis diez y siete diez y ocho diez y nueve veinte veinte y unoH veinte y dos treinta treinta y uno^ treinta y dos cuarenta cuarenta y uno* cincuenta mncuenta y uno^ Cardinal Numbers. one two three four five six seven eight nine ten eleven twelve thirteen fourteen fifteen sixteen seventeen eighteen nineteen twenty twenty-one twenty-two thirty thirty-orfe thirty-two forty forty-one fifty fifty-one ♦fSome authors make the two numbers a single one, an^ write it thus: vmtxy,no, vtntidos^ ventures^ vintimatrOi cMcrenfiseis, &c. ETYMOLOGY. 7S sesmta sesenta y un(y^ setenta setenfa y uno^ ochenta ochenta y uno* noventa noventa y iino* ciento eiento y uno^ docientos* trecientos* cuatrocientos^ quinientos* seiscientos* setecientos* ochocientos* novecientos^ mil dos mil veinte mil cien mil docientos'^ mil iin millon or cuento dos millones or cuento s tres millones or cuentos un cuento de cuentos dos cuentos de cuentos, i sixty sixty-one seventy seventy-one eighty eighty-one ninety ninety -one a hundred a hundred and one two hundred three hundred four hundred five hundred six hundred seven hundred eight hundred nine hundred a thousand two thousand twenty thousand a hundred thousand two hundred thousand a million two millions three millions a billion 'C. two billions N. B. Every word in the cardinal numbers, which is marked with an asterisk, changes its last o into a when ever applied to a feminine noun. 7 ?4 E TYMOLOGY. Numeration, Unidad units decena tens centena hundreds miliar thousands decena de millaf tens of thousands centena de miliar hundreds of thousands cuento millions decena de mento^ 8rc. tens of millions. Ordinal Numbers, Primero first segundo second tercero third cuarto fourth guinto fifth sesto sixth septimo seventh octavo eighth nono or noveno ninth decimo tenth undecimo eleventh duodecimo twelfth decimo tercio thirteenth decimo cuarto fourteenth decimo quinto fifteenth decimo sesto sixteenth decimo septimo seventeenth decimo octavo eighteenth decimo nono nineteenth vigesimo twentieth vigesimo primo twenty-first vigesimo segundo twenty-second ETYMOLOGY. 70 twenty-third thirteenth fortieth fiftieth sixtieth seventieth eightieth ninetieth hundredth two hundredth three hundredth four hundredth five hundredtli six hundredth seven hundredth eight hundredth nine hundredth thousandth All the ordinal numbers are made feminine, by change ing into a; as, primero, primera; decimo tercio, ded- ma tercia. Nouns denoting Quantity, the half una docena a dozen the third una veintena a score the fourth una centena a hundred a couple un miliar a thousand media docena half a dozen un cuento a million una decena half a score vigesimo tercio trigesimo cuadragesimo quincuagesimo secsagesimo septuagSsimo octogesimo nonagesimo centesimo docenfesimo trecentesiino CfKadragentesimo quingentesimo secsentSsimo septengentesimo octogentesimo nonagentesimo milesimo La mitad el tercio el cuarto un par OF PRONOUNS. A pronoun is a word placed instead of a noun, to pre- ent the too frequent repetition of the same word: asj re ETYMOLOGY. eljusto aborrece, el vicio, el le detesta; a righteous maKi hates vice, he detests it. There are six sorts of pronouns : namely, persondy possessive, relative, interrogative, demonstrative^ and indefinite. Of tlte Personal Pronouns. Personal pronouns admit of number, person, gender and case. The numbers of personal pronouns, like those of nouns, are two: the singular and the plural^ Yo, I; tu, thou^ el, he I ella, she^ ello, it, for the singular. Noso- tros, we I vosotros, je; ellos, thej, for the plural. Ello, it, has no plural. The persons of pronouns are three in each number, Yo, for the first person, tu, for the second, l Singular. el, ella, ello, for the third. Nosotros, for the first person, I vosotros, for the second, }• Plural. ellos, for the third. isin •}■ The pronouns of the first and second persons are used for the masculine and feminine, without changing their terminations. The feminine of the third person is formed by adding la to the masculine; as, el, ella; ello is the neuter. In the plural, the pronouns of the first, second and third per- sons, form the feminine by changing os into as; as, nosotros, noso- tras; vosotros, vosotras; ellos, ellas. Declension of the Personal Pronouns. To the personal pronouns belong, for the sake of distinction, two objective cases. One of these is never preceded by a pre- position, and the other always. ETYMOLOGY. 77 First Person. Singular, Plural Nom. Yo, I. 1st Obj. me% me 2d Obj. a mi, to me. Nom, Nosotros-as\j we. 1st Obj. nos, us. 2d Obj. a nosotros-as^ to us. Second Person. Singular. Plural. Nom. Tu. thou. 1st Obj. te, thee. ^d Obj. a ti, to thee. Nom. Vosotros-as, je. 1st. Obj. OS, jou. 2d Obj. a vosotros-as,to you.. Third Person — Masculine. Singular. Nom. El, he. 1st Obj. le, him. Plural. Nom. Ellos, thej. 1st Obj. los, les, them, to them. td Obj. a ellos, to them. 2d Obj. d el, to him. Third Person — Feminine. Singular. Plural. Nom. Ella, she. Nom. Ellas, they. Ist Obj. la, le, her, to her. 1st Obj. las, les, them, to them. 2d Obj. d ella, to her. 2d Obj. d ellas, to them. * The author is sensible that some individuals will not, proba- bly, approve of his having assigned two objective cases to th© personal pronouns. If it be considered, however, that this divi- sion tends, in no small degree, to the perspicuous elucidation of pronominal rules; all objections against it, will, it is hoped, be in- stantly removed. I JVosotras-asj vosotros-as, Sf-c. are used for contractions of noso'- tros, nosotrasj vosotros, vosotras, SfC. 7* TS ETYMOLOGY. Third Person — Neuter. A'bm. Ello, it. 1 1st Obj. lo, it. tno plural. 2d Obj. a ello, to it. J There is another personal pronoun, called the reci- procal pronoun; which is common to both numbers, and to the three genders. It has only the two objective cases; as, 1st Obj. se*, himself, herself, itself, themselves. 2(/ Obj. d si, to himself, to herself, to itself, to them- selves. Of the Possessive Pronouns, The possessive pronouns indicate possession or pro- perty. They are: Mio, my, or mine, 1 tuyo, thy, or thine, tfor the singular. suyo, his, its. J Nuestro^ our, or ours, 1 vuestro, your, or yours, wor the pluraL siiyo, their or theirs. J They are declined thus: Singular. Plural. Nom. 3Iio, my. Nom. MioSy my. Obj. Mio, my. Obj, Mios, my. * As this pronoun has various meanings, and presents to per- sons learning the Spanish language, difficulties, which are often found insurmountable, it deserved, we thought, our mature inves- tigation. This having been bestowed upon it, we made some ob- servations which are inserted in the Syntax on personal pronouns. They will, we hope, unravel the intricacies of this difficult part of grammar; and render them perfectly intelligible to the com- prehension of the student. ETYMOLOGY. 79 These pronouns change their final o into «, when they relate to feminine nouns. Of the Relative Pronouns. Relative pronouns are those which relate to some word or phrase going before, which is thence called the antecedent. They are: Singular. Plural, Quien, who, Quienes, who, Cual, } who, which, and Cuales^ 7 who, which and Que, 5 t\mt, Que, 3 that, Cuyo-a* \\\\ose or of which. Cuyos-as,'^ whose or of which. These pronouns are declined thus: Singular. Plural. Nom. Qiiien, who. Nom. Quienes, who. Ohj. a quien, to whom. Obj. d quienes, to whom. Singular. Plural. Nom. Que, which. Nom, Que, which. Ohj. que, which. Obj. que, which. Of the Interrogative Pronouns. When the relative pronouns are used in asking a question, they are called Interrogatives; as, quien e$ vm?. who are you? cual de vosotros? which of you? Of the Demonstrative Pronouns. Demonstrative pronouns are those which express, or point out some person, or tiling. They are: "■ These are contractions for cmo, cuya, cuyos, cwyas. 80 ETYMOLOGY, Singular, Plural, Mas. Fern. Neut. Mas. Fern. Este, esta, esto, this. £stos, estas, these. ese, esa, eso, ^^^^^^^ esos, esas, -^^^^^^ aquel^aquella, aquello, 5 aquellos,aquellas,$ These pronouns are declined thus: Masculine. Singular. Plural, Nom. JSste, this. Nom. Estes, these, Obj. este, this. Obj. estes, these^ Feminine. Singular, Plural, Nom. Esto, this. Nom, Estas, these. Obj. esta, this. Obj. estas, these. Of the Indejinite Pronouns, Indefinite pronouns are those which express indeter- minate or indefinite objects 5 such as these; uno, one. als^uien, ? , , ° ' > some bod J, some one. alguno, J naaie, ^ nobody, no one^ not anybody, not any one, ninguno. j algo, something. cada, every. quinquiera, ^ whoever, whosoever, whichever, whicb- &Lialquiera, S soever. These pronouns are declined thus: Singular, Nom, Nadie, no body. Obj, a nadie, to no body. ETYMOLOGY. SI OF VERBS. A verb denotes the existence, action, or passion of things; that is, being, doing, or suffering; as, el ecsiste, he exists; ella escribe, she writes; el es herido, he is woumled. The verb is divided into three different kinds; active, passive, and neuter. An active verb expresses an action; and it must ne- cessarily have an agent, and an object to which this ac- tion may be transmitted; as, el ama la verdad; he loves truth. El, is the agent; ama, the action of the agent; and verdad, the object to wliich the action was trans- mitted. A passive verb, affirms that its subject has been acted upon, or has suffered, or suffers; as, la casa estd acabada, the house is finished; sii padre estd encarcelado, his fa- ther is imprisoned. A neuter verb expresses the condition, or situation of its subject; a.s,fue, he was; moramos, we dwell; el vive, he lives. Active verbs have been divided into transitive and in- transitive. An active transitive verb, expresses an action, which its subject transmits to another object, called the objec- tive, or object of the verb; as, el virtuoso ama c Dios, a virtuous man loves God; el sillero pinto las sillas, the chair-maker painted the chairs. An active intransitive verb denotes an action by which the agent or subject alone can be effected, as, mis her- manos baildron, my sisters danced; el salto, he jumped. Almost all active transitive verbs may be changed, ia Spanish, into reflective verbs. 82 ETYMOLOGY. A verb is called reflective^ when the agent is the in dividiial to whom the action of the verb is transmitted? as, el capitan se alabo^ the captain praised himself. Active transitive verbs are sometimes changed into transitive, by adding to them the objective case of some noun which is generally formed from them; as, hailar un baile, to dance a dance; vivir una huena vida^ to live «. good life. To verbs belong number, person, tense and mood. Of Number. Verbs, like nouns, require a singular and a plural number; as, el niho llora, the child cries; los ninos llo- ran, the children cry. Of Person, Verbs have three persons in each number. Singular, First person, Yo amo, I love. Second person. Tit amas, thou lovest. Third person, El, or ella ama, he or she loves. Plural, First person, Nosotros-as amamos, we love. Second person, Vosotros-as amais, ye love. Third person, Ellos-as aman, they love. Of Tenses. The being, doing, and suffering, expressed by a verb, may be limited to three tenses or different periods of time: past, or having taken place; present, or taking plsice; future, or being to take place. These three tenses or periods, are subdivided in the folio wino; manner; ETYMOLOGY. 8S Present, imperfect, perfect indefinite, perfect definite, pluperfect, future imperfect, future perfect.^ Of Moods. Mood expresses the . particular manner in which the being, doing, or suffering of verbs, is represented. The verbs have, in the Spanish language, four moods; infi- nitive, indicative, imperative, subjunctive. The infinitive, afl&rms in a general, unlimited and in- definitive manner, without any distinction of number or person; as, venir,to come; ir, to go; conceder, to grant; perdonar, to forgive. The indicative, affirms the execution of the action de- noted bj the verb, in a positive and unconditional man- ner; as, nosotros damos, we give; ellos vienen, they come. The imperative, orders or entreats the execution of the action; as, id vosotros, go ye; concedednos, grant us; perdoname, forgive me. The subjunctive, always speaks of the action as con- tingent; as, sifueremos mahana, if we happen to go to- morrow; si viniera aqui, were he to come here; aunque h conceda, tliough he may grant it. Of the Participle. A participle is a word derived from a verb, and, in its properties, it resembles both verbs and adjectives. A participle (so called from its participating of the nature of the verb from which it is derived) resembles its primitive, because it denotes being, action, or suf- fering; as, he ?>\^o pohre, I have been poor; tic has escri- * All these tenses are fully explained in the Syntax, to which tlie student is referred , 84 ETYMOLOGY. to los nombres, thou hast written the names; se han im- preso varias obras, several works have been printed. And it has also the properties of an adjective, because it qualifies the noun to which it is applied with the va- riations of gender, number, and case; as, los nombres escritos, the written names; en las obras impresas, in the printed works. Spanish verbs have two participles, called the pre- sent and the past participles. The latter, from its be- ing used to form passive verbs, has obtained the name of the passive participle. All verbs have not a present participle, and in many verbs it retains only its adjective property. The pre- sent participle ends in ante for the first, and in iente, for the second or third conjugation. The only present participles which are used in the Spanish language are: obedietite, obedient; habiente, pos- sessing; teniente holding; participante, participating; amante, lover; semejante, alike; tocante, touching; con- cerniente, concerning; and perhaps a few others. Of the Gerund'.' The Spanish gerund is, in all respects, like the Eng- lish present participle. It is therefore a certain form of the verb, which, as it has been already observed, possesses the properties of verbs and adjectives. The gerund, like the English present participle, not having any determined time assigned to it, may refer to the past, nresent, or future; as, le vi perorando, I saw him speaking; practicando la virtud, sera feliz, practising virtue, he will be happy. ETYMOLOGY. OF CONJUGATION. The conjugation of a verb is the regular combination and arrangement of its persons, number, tenses, moods, and voices. In Spanish, all the verbs are limited to three conju- gations, which are distinguished thus: verbs ending in ar, belong to the first conjugation; as, llamar, to call: verbs in er, to the second; as, temer, to fear; and verbs in i?', to the third; as, escribir, to write. Verbs may be regular or irregular^ personal or itn- personal, perfect or defective. Irregular verbs ar» those which deviate from the re- gular form bj which all the others are conjugated. Impersonals are verbs which cannot be conjugated through all the persons. Defectives are such verbs as want some of the tenses. There are some verbs, which, from the nature of their service, have been styled auxiliary or aiding verbs: these are, haber, to have; tener, to have or to hold; ser. to be; estar^ to be. That the student may never be at a loss to know upon what vowel he is to lay the stress; and as it is of the utmost impor- tance that the verbs be accurately pronounced — we have thought proper to accent all the words, in the folloAving conjugations. It is, however, to be observed, that the accent should never be writ- ten but upon those words which are mentioned in orthography, from page 47 to page 49. Conjugation of the auxiliary verb, haber^ to have. INFINITIVE MOOD. Haber, To have. Perfect. Haber habido, To have had. 86 ETYMOLOGY, Gerund. Hahiendo, Having. Compound of the Gerund- Hahiendo hahido, Having had. Participle. Mahido, Had. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present Tense — Singular. 1 Yoke, I have. 2. Til has or Vmd.* ka, Thou hast, or j'ou have- 3. El ha, He has. Plural. 1. Jfosotros hemos, We have. 2. Fosotros habeis, or Vmds . han, Ye have. S. Ellos han, They have. Imperfect. 1. Yo habia, I had. 2. Tu habias, Thou hadst. S, El habza, He had. 1. M)sotros habtamos, We had. 2. Vosotros habiais. Ye had. 3. Ellos habian, They had. '^ The use of Tu and Vosotros, being entirely confined to menial servants, or very intimate friends, recourse is had to the pronouns Usted, or vuesamerced; your worship; and Ustedes, or vuesaraer cedes; your worships. These titles in writing are generally abbreviated, thus: — v.; Vm.; Vmd.; or V. M.; Vtra. Md.; for Usttd. Ustedes is contracted by adding an s to any of these abbreviations; as, Vs. Vms. &c. — Examples; sehor, Vmd. me hace grande honra; Sir, yoii, do me much honour; Senores, Vmds. usan demasiadas ceremonias; gentlemen, you use too many ceremonies. It scarcely seems ne- cessary to observe, that the verbs and pronouns always agree with V. and Vs. in the third person. ETYMOLOGY. -87 Perfect Indefinite, or Preterite. 1. Yo hube, I had. 2. Tii hubiste, Thou hadst. 3. Elhubo, He had. 1. JS'osotros hubtmos, We had. 2. Vosotros hubistds, Ye had. 3 Ellos htibieron, They had. Perfect Definite, 1. Yo he habido, I have had. 2. Tu has habido, Thou hast had. 3. El ha habido, He has had. * 1. J^osotros hemos habido j We have had. 2. Vosotros habels habldoy Ye have had. 3. Ellos han habido, They have had. Pluperfect. i. Yo hube, or habta, habido, 1 had had. 2. Tu hubiste, or habias, habido, Thou hadst had. 3. JSZ /i?/6o, or Aa6ia, habido, He had had. 1. J^osotr OS hub linos, or hub lamos, We had had. habido, 2. Vosotros hxibisteis, or habXais Ye had had. habido, 3. £//os rmUeron, or habian, ha- They had had Futurer Imperfect. i. Fo habre, I shall or will have. 2. Tu habrds, Thou shalt or wilt have 3. El habrd, He shall or Avill have. 1. Js'^osotros habremos, W^e shall or will have. 2. Vosotros habreisj Ye shall or will have. 3. Ellos babran, They shall or will have 1. Yo habre habido, 2. Tii habrds habido, 2^ El habrd habido, Future Perfect. I sh&ll or will have had. Thou shalt or wilt have had. He shall have had. Si^ ETYMOLOGY. 1. Jfosotros habremos habit loj We shall have had. 2. Vosotros habreis habido, Ye shall have had. 3. Ellos habrdn habido, They shall have had SUBJUNCTIVE. Present. i Yo hdya, I may have. 2. Tu hdyas, Thou mayest have. 3. El hdya, He may have. 1. J^'osotros haydmos, We may have. 3 Vosotros haydis. Ye may have. 3 Ellos hdyan, They may have. Imperfect. 1 . Yo hubiera, habna, hubiese, I should, would, might have. 'i. Tu hubieras, habrias, hubieses, Thou shouldst, wouldst, mightsi have. 3. El hubiera, habria, hubiese, He should, would, might have, 1. J^osotros hiMeramos, habriamos, We should, would, might have. hubiesemos, 2. Vosotros hubierais, habriais, hu- Ye should, would, might have. bieseis, 3. Ellos hubieran. habrian, /lu&i- They should, would, might have esen, Perfect, 1. Yo hdya habido, I may have had. 2. Tu hdyas habido, Thou mayst have had. 3. El hdya habido, He may have had. 1. J^osotros haydmos habido, We may have had. 2. Vosotros haydis habido. Ye may have had. 3. Ellos hdyan habido, They may have had. Pluperfect. 1. Yo hubiera, habria, hubiese ha- I should, would, might have had, btdo, 2. Tu hubieras, habrias, hubieses Thou shouldst, wouldst, mightsi habido, have had. S. El hubiera, habria, hubiese ha- He should, would, might have bido, had. ETYMOLOGY. 89 1. J^Tosofros hubieramos, hahria- mos, hvbiesfiinos habidoy 2, VosGlron aichierais, hubriais. hiihieseh kabido, We should, would, might have had. Ye should, would, might have had. Ellos hubieiun, habrlan, hubi- They should, would, might have esen habido, had. 1 . Si yo hubiere, 2. Si tu huhieres, 3. -Si el hubiere, ■1. Si nosotros hubieremos. 2. Si vosotros hv^iereis, .3. Si ellos hubieren, Future Imperfect. If I should have. If thou shouldst have., If he should have. If we should have. If ye should have. If they should have. 1. Si yo hubiere habido, 2. Si tu huhieres habido, 3. jSi el hubiere habido, 1 . Si nosotros hub'ieremos habido, 2. Si vosotros hubiereis habido, 3. Si ellos hxibieren habido, Future Perfect. If I should have had. If thou shouldst haive had. If he should have had. If we should have had. If ye should have had. If they should have had. Conjugation of the auxiliaiy verb, tener, to have or to hold. Tener, Teniendo, INFINITIVE MOOD. To have* Perfect. To have had. Gerund. Having. * To luive, used as an active verb, is translated tener,- and as au auxiliary, haber,- as, to have books, tener libros; to have written, haber escriio; we Aof/ spoken, habiaraos hablado, 8* 90 ETYMOLOGY. Compound of the Gerund. Habiendo temdo, Having had. Participle. Tenidoy Had. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. 1. Yo tengo, I have. 2. Tu tienes, or Vmd. tiene. Thou hast, or you have 3. El tiene, He has. 1. Jfosolros tenemos, We have. 2. VosoirosteneiSjOr VmdsJienen,Ye have. 3. £ZZos tienen, They have Imperfect. 1. Yo tema^ I had. .2. Tu temasy Thou had St. 3. El tenia, He had. 1. Msotros tentamos^ We had. 2. Vosotros temaiSf Ye had. 3. Ellos teniariy They had. Perfect Indefinite^ or Preteri 1. Yo tUVCy I had. 2. Tu tuviste, Thou hadst. 3. El tUVOy He had. 3. Jfosotros hivimoSy We had. 2. Vosotros tuvtsteis, Ye had. 3. Ellos tuvieron, They had. Perfect Definite, L Yo he temdo, I have had. 2. Tu has temdo. Thou hast had. 3. El ha temdo. He has had. 1. Jfosotros hemos tentdo. We have had. 2. Vosotros habeis temdo. Ye have had. 3, Ellos han tenido. They have had. ETYMOLOGY. 9i Pluperfect. 1. Yo hiibe, or hahi a tenido, I had had. 2. Tu hubiste, or habias tenido, Thou hadst had- 3. El hiibo, or hahia tenido, He had had. 1. J^osotros hubimos, or habiamos We had had. tenido, 2. Vosotros hubisteis, or habiais te-Ye had had- nido, 3. Ellos hubieron^OT habian tenido, They had had. Future Imperfect. 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. Fo tendre, Til tendrds, El tendrd, Msotros tendremos, Vosotros tendreis, Ellos tendrdn. I shall or will have. Thou shalt or wilt have> He shall or will have. We shall or will have. Ye shall or will have. They shall or will have. Future Fefect. 1. 2. 3. 2. 3. Yo habre tenido, I shall or will have had. Tfi habrds tenido, Thou shalt or wilt have had El habrd temdc, He shall have had. J^osotros habremos tenido, We shall have had. Vosotros habreis tenido. Ye shall have had. Ellos habrdn tenido, They shall have had. Imperative. 1. 2. 1. Ten tu, Tenga el, Tened vosotros, Tengan ellos, Have thou. Let him have. Have ye. Let them have. SUBJUNCTIVE. Present. { 3 Yo tenga, Til tengas, El Tenga, I may have. Thou mayest have. He may have. 92 ETYMOLOGY. 1. J^osotros tengdmos, We may have. 2. Vusotros tengdis, Ye may have. 3. EUos Tengan, They may have. Imperfect. 1. Yo tuviera, tendna, tuviese, I should, would, might have. 2. Tu tuvieras, tendrias, tuvieses, Thou shouldst, wouldst, mightst have. 3. El tuviera, tendrta, tuviese, He should, would, might have. 1. JSTosotros tuvieramos, fendr2:a- We should, would, might have. nios^ tuviesernos, 2. Fosotros tuvierais, tendriais Ye should, would, might have. tuvl^^eis, S, Eiics tuvicranj tendrian, tuvi- They should, would, might have. esen, Perfect. 1. Yo hdya temdo, I may have had. 2. Til hd'ias tenido, Thou mavst have had. 3. El haun. temdo, He may hdve bad. 1. Jsro$6tr->s haydmos temdo, We may have had. 2. Vosotros haydis temdo. Ye may have had. 3. EUos hdyan temdo, They may have had. Pluperfect. 1. Yo huhiera, habria, ^w&iese I should, would, might have had. temdo, 2. Tu huUeras, habrias, hubieses Thou shouldst, wouldst, mightst temdo, have had. 3. El huhiera, huhrla, hubiese te- He should, would, might have nido, had. 1. J^osotros hubieramos, habria- We should, would, might have nws, hxKhissfinos temdo, had. 2. Vosotros hubierais, hubriais, Ye should, would, might have hubiestis temdo, had. 3. EUos hubieran, habrian, hubir They should, would, might have esen tenidOt had. ETYMOLOGY. 93 Future Imperfect, 1. iSi yo tuviere, If I should have. 2. Si tu tuvieres, If thou shouldst have. 3. Si el tuviere, If he should have. i . Si nosotros tuvieremos, If we should have. 2. Si vosotros tuviereis. If ye should have. 3. Si ellos tuvieren, If they should have. Future Perfect. 1. Siyo hubiere tenido, If I should have had. 2. Si tu hubieres tenido, If thou shouldst have had. 3. Si el hubiere tenido, If he should have had. 1. Si nosotros hubieremos tenido, If we should have had. 2. Si vosotros hubiereis tenido. If ye should have had. 3. Si ellos hubieren tenido, If they should have had. Conjugation of the auxiliary verb ser, to be, INFINITIVE MOOD. Ser,* To be. Perfect, Haber sido, To have been. Gerund. Siendo, Being. Compoutid of the Gerund. Habiendo sido, Having been. Participle. Sido, Been. * As a perfect acquaintance with the application of the verbs ser and estar, to be, is a matter of great diflSculty, but of absolute necessity, we have given a long dissertation upon them, which we thought proper to place in the Syntax. 94 ETYMOLOGY. IXDICATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. 1. Yo sot, 2. Th eres, o Vmd. es, 3. El es, 1. J^osotros somas, 2. Vosotros sois, Vmds. son, 3. EUos son, I am. Thou art, or you are. He is. We are. Ye are. They are. Imperfect. Yo era, Tn eras, El era, M)sotros eramos, Vosotros erais, EUos eran. 1 was. Thon wast. He was. We were. Ye were. They were. Perfect Indefinite, or Preterite. Yo fm, Tufuiste, Elfue, J^osotros fuimos, Vosotros fmsteis, Bllos fueron, I was. Thou wast. He was. We were. Ye were. They were. Perfect Definite. I have been. Thou hast been. He has been. We have been. Ye have been. They have been. Pluperfect. 1. Yo hube, or habia sido, I had been. 2. Tu hubiste, or hubtas sido, Thou hadst been> 3. El huho, or habia sido, He had been. 1. Yo he sido, 2. Tm has sido, 3. El ha sido, 1. J^osotros hemos sido, 2. Vosotros habeis sido, 3. EUos han sido, ETYMOLOGY. 95 1. Msotros huMmos^ or habminos We had been. 2. Vosotros hiibisteis, or habmis Ye had been. sido, 3. Elios hubieron, or habtanstdo, They had been. Future Imperfect. 1. Foscre, I shall or will be. 2. Tw sams, Thou shalt or wilt be 3. El sera, He shall or will be. 1 . vYosofros seremos, We shall or will be. 2. Vosotros sereis, Ye shall or will be. 3. Ellcsserdn, They shall or will be. Future Perfect. 1 . Yo habre sido, '2. Tu habrds stdo, S. El habrd sido, 1. ^'osotros habremos stdo, 2. Vosotros habreis sulo, 3. Ellos habrdn sido. I shall or will have been. Thou shalt or wilt have been He shall or will have been. W^e shall or will have been. Ye shall or will have been. They shall or will have been. 1 . Se lu, 2. Sea el, 1 . Sed vosotros, ■2. Sean ellos, Imperative. Be thou. Let him be. Be ye. Let them be. 1 . Yo sea, 2. Tu seas, 3. El sea, 1 . J^''os6tros sedmos, 2. Vosotros sedis, 3. Ellos sean. SUBJUNCTIVE. Present. I may be. Thou mayst be. He may be. We may be. Ye may be. They niay be. 96 ETYMOLOGY. Imperfect. 1. Yofuera, sena^fnese, I should, would, might be. -2. Tujv^ras, serias,fueses, Thou shouldst, wouldst, mightst be, 3. Elfuera^ seria,fuese, He should, would, might be. 1. Jsfosotros fueramas, senamos, We should, would, might be. fwsemos, 2. Vosotrosfuerais, serials, fiieseis, Ye should, would, might be, S. Ellosfneran,senan,fuesen. They should^ would, might be. Perfect. 1. Yo hdya sido, I may have been. 2. TH hdyas sido, Thou mayst have been. 3. El hdya sido, He may have been. 1 . M'osotros haydmos sido, We may have been. 2. Vosotros haydis sido, Ye may have been. 3. Ellos hayan sido, They may have been. Pluperfect. 1 . Yo hubiera,habria,hubiese sido, I should, Avould, might have been. 2. Tu hubierais, habrias, hubieses Thou shouldst, wouidst, mightst sido, have been. 3. Elhubiera,hubria,hubiesesido, He should, would, might have been. 1, M)sotroshubieramos,habriamos, We should, would, might have hubiesemos sido, been. 2. Vosotros hubierais, habriais,hu- Ye should, would, might have bieseis sido, been. -3. Ellos hubieran, habrian, hubi- They should, would, might have esen sido, been. Future Imperfect. 1. Si yofuere, If I should be. 2. Si tufueres, If thou shouldst be. 3. Si elfuere. If he should be. 1. Si nosotros fueremos. If we should be. 2. Si vosotros fuereis, If ye should be. 3. Si ellos fueren. If they should be. ETYMOLOGY. 97 Future Perfect. 1. Si yo hubiere sido, 2. Si tii hubieres sido, 3. Si el hubiere sido, 1 . Si nosotros hubieremos sido, 2. Si vosotros hubiereis sido, 3. Si ellos hubieren sido, If I should have been. If thou shouldst have been. If he should have been. If we should have been. If ye should have been. If they should have been. Conjugation of the auxiliary verb, estar, to be. Estdr, INFINITIVE MOOD. To be. Perfect. Haber estddo, To have been. Gerund. Estdndo, • Being. Compound of the Gerund. Habiendo estado, Having been. Participle. Estddo, Been. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. 1. Yo estoi, 2. Tu estds, 3. El estd, 1 . J^'osotros estdmos, 2. Vosotros estdis, 3. Ellos estdn, 1. Yoestdba, 2. Tu estdbas, 3. El estdba, 1. Jfosotros estdbamos, 2. Vosotros estdbais, 3. Ellos estdban, 9 1 am. Thou art, or you are He is. We are. Ye are. They are. Imperfect. I was. Thou wast. He was. We were. Ye were. They were. 98 ETYMOLOGY. Perfect Indefinife. or Preterite Yo titilVt^ 1 was. Til tstuti&te, Thou wast. El tstuto, He was. J^o^rdros estummos, We were. Vosotros tUutUttiSt Ye were. ElLos e&ttitieron, They were. Perfect Definite. Yo he esUldo, I have been. Til has tstruhy Thou ha«i been. El ha eitdflo, He has been. J^osolros liemo^ t$,lMo , We have been. Vosotros habeis estddo Ye have been. Elioh han e&tado, Tliey have been. Pluperfect, 1. Yo hubft, or hahia cstfjdo^ I had been. 2. Til htihute, or kafnas estado^ Thou hadst been. 3. El huho, or hubia edddo, He had been. 1. J^o&otros hubimoi, or hahiamos We had been. 2. Vo&otroi hubUteiSy or htihiaii es- Ye had been. tadOf 3. Eltos hvibieron^ OThabiantildclOy They had been. Future Imperfect. Yo tilare, T't'i t&tardSj El t&tard, JWosotros thlaremoSy VouAroi eslareis, . Elloi t&taran. Yo hahre csUido, Tii habras e&tddo, El habrd eatddo^ I shall or will be. Thou shall or wilt be. He shall or will be. We shall or wilJ be. Ye shall or will he. They shall o» will be. Future Perfect. I shall or will have been. Thou r»halt or wilt have been. He .shaJJ or will have been. ETYMOLOGY. 99 ^Vosotrcs habremos estddo, Vosotrfii hahrsis estddo, Ellos hahrun esiddo. We shall or will have been. Ye shall r/r will have been, Thev shall or will have been. Imperative, Esid tu, Be thou. .. Esteet, Let bka be. 1. Esiad voioiros. Be ye. 2 E^t^n'^n,.^ Let them be SUBJUNCTIVE. Present. L Yo este, I may be. 2. Tu estes, Thou mayst be 5. El este, He may be. 1. w\ O5ofros titemos^ We may be. 2. Vosotros esteis, \> may be. •3. EUo% iit^n, They may be. Imperfect. Yo estutiera, estarta, estutiese^ I should, would, might be. Tu estutieras, estartas, estuti- Thou shouldst, wouldst, mightsT e5M, be. El estuviera, estaria, esiui-iese, He should, would, might be. J^'osotroa, estutieramos, estaria- We should, would, might be. moSj estuvie semes, VoiiOiros (.rtutierais, estariais, Ye should, wo'ild. might be. Ell:' estutieran, e^arian estu- They shouid, would, might be. Perfect. i. i'o hriyi e.'.iddo, 2. Tu hay as tatddo, 3. El hdya estdda, 1 . ^"os6tro$ haydmos estddo, 2. Voiotroa haydis estddo, 3. Ello^ hduan estddo. I may have been. Thou mayst have been He may have beea. We may have been. Ye may have been. They may have been. 100 ETYMOLOGY. Pluperfect, . Yo hubiera, habrla, hubiese estddo, . Tu hubieraSj hahrias. hubieses estddo, . El hubiera, hdbrta, habiese es- tddo, , Xosotros huhiSramos, habria- mos, hubiesemos estddo, . Vosotros hubierais, hahnaiSf hubieseis estddo, Ellas hubieran, habrian, hubi' esen estddo, I shouldjWould.might have beeia. Thou shouldst, wouldst, might have been. He should, would, might have been. We should, would, might have been. Ya should, would, might h&ve been. They should, would, might have been. Future . Imperfect. 1. Si yo estuviere, If I should be. 2, Si tu estuvieres, If thou shouldst be. 3. Si el estuviere, If he should be. 1. Si nosotros estuvieremos, If we should be. 2. Si vosotros estuviereis, If ye should be.. 3. Si ellos estuvieren, - If they should be. Future Perfect. 1. Si yo kxibiere estddo, If I should have been. 2. Si tu hubieres estddo, If thou shouldst have been. 3. Si el hubiere estddo, If he should have been. 1. Si nosotros Imhisremos estddo, If we should have been. '2. Si vosotros hubiereis estddo. If ye should have been. 3. Si ellos hubieren estddo, If they should have been. OF REGULAR VERBS. Tlie Spanish verbs, as it has been said before, are divided into three conjugations^ the first ends in ar, the second in er, and the third in ir. The letters of which the verb is composed, not in- cluding the termination, are called radical letters, be- cause they never change; for instance, in am-f/r, to love; the radical letters are am; and the termination is ar. ETYMOLOGY. 101 First conjugation in ar; as, hablar, to speak. The tenses of the verbs of the first conjugation, are formed from the infinitive, by changing the termina- tion a?', into the following letters, to form the INDICATIVE MOOD. Present Tense, 0, ■ habl-o, I speak. as, habl-as, Thou speakest . a, >as • habl-a, He speaks. dmos, habl-a/nos, We speak. ais, habl-ai5, Ye speak. an, J .hsihl-an, They speak. Imperfect, aba, 1 " habl-afta, I did speak. abas, habl-a&as, Thou didst speak. aba, > a*! We should, would, might speak. i-dsemos, J Ye should, would, might speak. They should, would, might speak. ETYMOLOGY. Future, are, ■ habl-are, I should speak. ares, habl-ares. Thou shouldst speak. are, habl-are, He should speak. dremos, >as - ha.hl-dremos, We should speak. areis, habl-areis, Ye should speak. aren, . habl-aren, They should speak. 103 Second conjugation in er; as, beber, to drink. The tenses of the verbs of the second conjugation, are formed from the infinitve, by changing the termi- nation er, into the following letters, to form the INDICATIVE MOOD. cs, e, €7nos, eis, en, tamos, iais, tan. 10, imos, zsteis^ ieron^ Present Tense, ■ beb-o, I drink. beb-es, Thou drinkest. beb-e, He drinks. beb-mos, We drink. beb-eis, Ye drink. . beb-e7i, They drink. Imperfect. ' beb-Ca, I did drink. beb-MS, Thou didst drink beb-ea, • He did drink. heb-tamos, We did drink. heh-lais, Ye did drink. .beb-Tan, They did drink. Preterite. 'beb-?, I drank. beb-isie, Thou drankest. beb-io, He drank. beb-mos, We drank. beb-Mteis, Ye drank. »beb-ieron. They drank. 104 ETYMOLOGY, Future. ere, " beb-ere, I shall or will drink. eras, heh-erds, Thou shalt or wilt drink era, >as ■ beb-em, He shall or will drink. eremos, heb-eremos, We shall or will drink. ereis, beb-cms, Ye shall or will drink. erdn, L beb-emn, They shall or will drink. IMPERATIVE MOOD. ed, -) (beb-e, I J beb-a, r^jbeb-erf, J \^ beb-cn, Drink thou. Let him drink. Drink ye. Let them drink. tern, tria, iese, ieras, ertas, ieses, zera, erta, ufe, SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present Tense. beb-a, beb- as, beb-a, beb-amo5, beb-ais, . beb-an, I may drink. Thou mayest drink, He may drink. We may drink. Ye may drink. They may drink. beb-iera, beb-ena, beb-iese, beb-ieras, as \ beb-erfas, beb-ieses, beb-iera, beb-erfo, beb-iese, Imperfect, might, could, would or should drink. f^Thou mightst, couldst, wouldst or C shouldst drink. } He might, could, would or should drink. i^ramos. eriamoSi iesemos, ierais, eriais, ieseis, ieran, erian, iesen. n ETYMOLOGY. heh'i^ramos. 105 heh-eriamos. heb-iesemos, heb-ierais, heh-eriais, beb-ieseis, heh-ieran, beb-cn«n, ^beb-ilien, e might, could, would or should drink. Ye might, could, would or should drink. 7 They might, could, would or C should drink, Future. isre, ' beb-ilrc, I should drink. teres, beb-iere5, Thou shouldst drink iere, ■ as « beb-wre, He should drink. ieremos, hobAeremos, We should drinks iereis, beb-wrew, Ye should drink. ureiXf . beb-imn, They should drink. Third conjugation in irj as, Subir, to walk up. The tenses of the verbs of the third conjugation, are formed from the infinitive, bj changing the termina- nation ir, into the following letters, to form the INDICATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. 0> tmos, •as ^ '■ sub-o, sub-e5, stib-e, sub-mps, sub-«s, . sub-en. I walk up. Thou walkest up Kc walks up. We walk up. Ye walk up. They walk up 106 ETYMOLOGY. Imperfect. ?c, -sub-ra, I walked up. las, sub-fas, Thou walkedst up. U, .s. sub-fa, He walked up. zamos, sub-famos, We walked up. ?ais, sub-fais, Ye walked up. Un, J Lsub-fan, They walked up. Preterite. i, -^ fsvib-i, I did walk up. zste, sub-fsfe, Thou didst walk up. id. sub-io, He did walk up. imos. sub-mos, We did walk up. isteis, sub-Mfeis, Ye did walk up. ieron, ,J Lsub-ieron, They did walk up. Future Indefinite. ire, •^ ^sub-ire, I shall or will walk up. irds, sub-iras, Thou Shalt or wilt walk up ird, ^as< sub-ire, He shall or will walk up. iremos, sub-ire??ios, We shall or will walk up. ireis, subireis. Ye shall or will walk up. irdn, - ,sub-iran, They shall or will walk up. IMPERATIVE. 6, -N /'Sub-c, >asas< sub-a, He may walk up. ; 6mos, sub-a/rtos, We may walk up. ais, sub-ais, Ye may walk up. an, J ^sub-aw, They may walk up.' lera, iria, iese, ieras, Uses, iera, • iria, "tese, ieramos, iriamos, iesemos, lerais, iriais, ieseis, ieran, irtan, iesen. ETYMOLOGY. Imperfect. 107 )>as.^ "sub-iera, sub-irCa, sub-iese, suh-ieras, suh-irias, sub-iesfs, sub-iera, sub-ma, sub-iese, sub-ier amos, sub-tnamo.s, sub-iesemoi, suh-lerais. sub-irmis. sub- ieseis, sub-/e>*aTi, 9ub-irTan, ,^sub-iese?i, } I should, would, might walk up. ^Thou shouldst, wouldst, mightst C walk up. He should, would, might walk up. We shouldjwould, might walk up- } } :, > Ye should, would, might walk up. ^They should, would, might walk 3 up. Future. iere, ieres, iere, ieremos, ierds, i^ren, Tsub-iere, sub-ieres, s< j sub- iere, sub-i'ere7nos, j sub-iJreis, \^SUb-i€7'€?l, I should walk up. Thou shouldst walk up. He should walk up. We should walk up. Ye shoulu valk up. They should walk up. FORMATION OF THE PARTICIPLE AND GERUND. The passive participle is formed from the infinitive, by changing its terminatian into ado, for the first conjug-ation, as. From am-ar, to love, is formed amadc, loved. From habl-«r, to speak, is formed hahlado, spoken, &c. The gcrwn^i of the first conjugaiioo is formed from the infini- tive also, by changing its termiriatioD into av/h; as, From am-ar, to love, is formed amand^\ loving. From habl-or, to speak, is formed hablando, speaking. 108 ETYMOLOGY. The passive participle of the second and tlw'd conjugations, is formed from their infinitive, by changing its termination into ido; as, From beb-cr, to drink, bebido, drunk. From sub-ir, to walk up, subido, walked up. The gerund of the second and third conjugations, is also formed from their infinitive, by changing its termination into iendo; as, From beb-er, to drink, bebiendo, drinking. From sub-ir, to walk up, subiendo, vv^alking up. Observation, When the termination, in both numbers, of the third person ol the perfect indefinite, in the second or third conjugation, is pre- ceded by, a, f , or ii, the i is changed into y; as, caer, cayo, cayeron^ leer, leyo, leyeron; arguir, arguyo, arguyeron. The same change takes place in all the persons of the first and third imperfects of the subjunctive, in the future of the same mood, and in the ge- rund; as, cayere, cayeres, 8fC. cayese, cayeses, 8fC. cayendo. When the last of the radical letters is a u, and the i of the termination belongs to the same syllable, the i is retained; as, seguir^ sigxdo, siguiesen, 8fC, Some verbs require a change in their radical letters, in order j^hat the final consonant may retain in all the tenses, the harsh or soft pronunciation which it has before the infinitive: this altera- tion cannot occur, unless the radicals end in c, in g, in gu, or in qu, and the changes, which then take place, are as follows: — Examples. c into qu before e in I. buscar, busquemos. c z a or 0, II. in. veneer, venza, zurcir, zurzo. g gu e I. lllegar, leguen. g j a or 0, 11. HI. coger, cojan, Jingir, finjo. gu g a or o, in. segutr, sigo, sigan. qu c a or 0, III. delinquir, delinco, delincamos. The first column shows in what manner the radicals must end, to require the alteration; the second, the letters substituted; the third, what letters must begin the termination to admit the change; and the fourth, the conjugations wherein these several deviations are found. ETYMOLOGY. 109 CONJUGATION OF REGULAR VERBS. ACTIVE. First Conjugation — Amar, to tove. INFINITIVE MOOD. Present Tense, dinar, To love. Perfect. Haber amddo, To have loved. Gerund. Jmdndo, Loving. Compound of the Ge^'und. Habiendo amddo, Havina: loved. Ainddo, Participle. Loved. *iino,* Amas, Ama, dmdis, Aman, Aindba^ Amdbas, Amdba, Jiniabamos, Amdbais, xlmaban, INDICATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. I love or do love. Thou lovest or dost love. He loves or does love. We love or do love. Ye or you love or do love. They love or do love. Imperfect. I did love. Thou didst love. He did love. We did love. Ye or you did love. They did love. * As in almost all cases the verbs are used without the personal pronouns, we have thought proper to omit them in the foliowiug con- jugations. See Syntax. 10 HO ETYMOLOGY. Jlnmstej AmdsteiSi Amdron. He amddoj Has amddo, Ha amddo J Hemos aniddo, Habeis a7nddo, Han mnddo, Perfect. I loved. Thou lovedaft He loved. We loved. Ye or you loved They loved. Perfect Definite. I have loved. Thou hast loved, lie has loved. We have loved. Ye or you have loved They have loved, Huhe or habia amddoj Huhiste or hctbias amddo, Huho or hahta amddo, Hubimos or habiaraos amddo ^ Hubt.teis or habiais amddo, Hubieron or habian amddo, Pluperfect, I had loved. Thou hadst loved. He had loved. We had loved. Ye or you had loved They had loved. iMmare, Amards^ Amard, zimaremos- Amareis, Amardn, Habre atnddo^ Hah'ds amddo., Habrd amddo, Habremos amddo, Habreis amddo, Habrdrb amddo, Future Imperfect, I shall or will love. Thou shalt or wilt love. He shall or will love. We shall or will love. Ye or you shall or will love They shall or will love. Future Perfect. I shall or will have loved. Thou shalt or wilt have loved He shall or will have loved. We shall or will have loved. Ye or you shall or will have loved. They shall or will have loved. ETYMOLOGY. Ill IMPERATIVE MOOD. Ame el, Amdd vosotro <.fnien ellos, -. hne^ Ames, Ame, Amemos, Ame is, Amen, Love thou or do thou love. Let him love. Love ye or you, or do you love. Let them love. SUBJUNCTIVE MOODc Pi-csent. I may love. Thou mayst love. He may love. We may love. Ye or you may lov They may love. Imperfect. Amdra, amaria^ a»idse, Amarus, amarias, amdses, Amdra, amarla, amdse, Aindramos, amarlamos, anidsemos, Amdims amariais, amdseis. Amdran, mnarian, amdsen, I should, would, might love. Thou shouldst, wouldst, mights - love. He should, would, might love. We should, v%'ould, might love. Ye or you should, would, might love. They should, would, might love Perfect, Hdya amddo, Hdyas amddo, Hdya amddo. Hdyamos amddo, FIdyak amddo, Hdyan amddo, I may have loved. Thou mayst have loved He may have loved. We may have loved. Ye or you may have loved- They may have loved. Pluperfect. Hubiera, habr'ia, hubiese, araddo, I sliould, Avould, might have loved. Hi(bieras,habrias, hubiases, amddo, Thou shouldst, wouldst, mightst have loved. HMera, habrla. kuMese. c.mddo.. He should, would, might have loved. 112 Hubieramos, habriamoSj mos, amddo, Huhierais, habriais^ hubieseis, amddo, Huhierarif habnan, hubiesen, aniddo, ETYMOLOGY. , hubiese- We should, would, might have loved. Ye or you should, would, might have loved. They should, would, might have loved. Future Imperfect, Si amdre, Si amdres, Si amdre. Si amdremds. Si amdreiSi Si amdren, Si htibiere amddo, Si hxibieres amddo, Si hubiere amddo, Si hubieremos amddo ^ Si hubiereis amddo, Si hubieren amddo^ If I should love. If thou shouldst love. If he should love. If we should love. If ye or you should love If they should love. Future Perfect. If I should have loved. If thou shouldst have loved, If he should have loved. If we should have loved. If ye or you should have loved If they should have loved. Second Conjugation^-Yender, to sell INFINITIVE MOOD. Present Tense. Vender, To selL Perfect. Haber vendido, To have sold Gerund, Vendiendo, Selling. ETYMOLOGY. lis INDICATIVE MOOD. Present, fendoy I sell or do sell. Vendes, Thou sellest or dost sell. Vende, He sells or does sell. Vendemos, We sell or do sell. Vendeis, Ye or you sell or do sell. Venden, They sell or do sell. Imperfect. Vendia, I did sell. VendiaSf Thou didst sell. Vendia, He did sell. Vendtamos, We did sell. Vendiah^, Ye or you did sell. Vendian . They did seU. Perfect Indefinite, or Preterite. Vendi, I sold. Vendiste, Thou soldst. Vendio, He sold. Vendtmos, We sold. Vendisteis. Ye or you sold Vendieron, They sold. Puture Imperfect. Vendere, I shall or will sell. Venderas, Thou shall or wilt sell. Venderd, He shall or will sell. Venderemos. We shall or wiU sell. Vendereis, Ye or you shall or will sell Vinderan, They shall or will sell. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Ve^ide t>2, Sell thou or do thou sell. Venda el, Let him sell. Vended vosoti os Sell ye or you or do ye sell. Vendan ellos, Let them sell. i * We have thought proper to omit those tenses which are called compound. They are always formed by the several tenses of haber. to have, and the past participle of the verb which is to be conjugated: 10* 114 ETYMOLOGY. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present, Vendu. Vendas. Venda, Venddmos. Vendan, I may sell. Thou mayst sell. He may sell. We may sell. Ye or you may sell. They may sell. Imperfect. Vendiera, venderta, vendiese, I should, would, might sell. Vendieras, venderias, vendieses^ Thou shouldst, wouldst, mightst sell. Vendiara, venderia, vendiese, He should, would, might sell. Vendieramos, venderiamos, vendi- We should, would, might sell. esemos, Vendierais, venderiais, vendieseis, Ye or you should, would, might sell. Vendieran, venderzan, vendiesen, They should, would, might sell. Future Imperfect. Si vendiere, If I should selL .Si vendieres, If thou shouldst sell. Si vendiere, If he should sell. Si vendieremos, If we should sell. Si vendiereis, If ye or you should sell. Si vendleren, If they should sell. Third Conjugation — Unir, to unite. INFINITIVE MOOD. f/nir, {fakir unidc, Present Tense. To unite. Perfect. To have united. ETYMOLOGY. iU Uniendo. Gerund. Uniting. INDICATIVE MOOD- Present. Uno, lines, Une, Unimo Urns, Unen, Unta, UmaSf Unia, Uniamos, Umais, Ionian, Uni, Uniste, Unio, Unhnos, Unisteis, UniSron, Vnire, Unirds, Unird, Uniremos, Unireis, Unirdn, I unite 01' do unite. Thou unitest or dost unite. He unites m- does unite. We unite or do unite. Ye or you unite or do unite. They unite or do unite. Imperfect. I did unite. Thou didst unite. He did unite. We did unite. Ye or you did unite. They did unite. Perfect Indefinite^ or Preterite, I united. Thou unitedst. He united. We united. Ye or you united They united. Future Imperfect. I shall or will unite. Thou shalt or wilt unite- He shall or will unite. We shall or will unite. Ye or you shall or will unite. They shall or will unite. 116 ETYMOLOGY. Une tu, Una el, Unid vosotros, Unan ellos, IMPERATIVE MOOD. Unite thou or do thou unite. Let him unite. Unite ye w you or do ye unite Let them unite. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Una, Unas, Una, Undmos, Undis, Unan, Present. I may unite. Thou mayst unite. He may unite. We may unite. Ye or you may unite. They may unite. Imperfect. Uniera, uniHa, uniese, Unieras, untrms, unieses, I should, would, might unite. Thou shouldst, wouldst, mightst unite, Uniera, uniria, uniese, He should, Tvould, might unite. Unieramos, unirlamos, uniesemos, We should, would, might unite. Unierais, uniriais, unieseis, Ye or you should, would, might unite. Unieran, unirian, uniesen, They should, would,might unite. Future Imperfect. Si uniere, Si unieres, Si uniere, Si unieremos, Si uniereis, Si unieren, If I should unite. If thou shouldst unite. If he should unite. If we should unite. If ye or you should unite. If they should unite. ETYMOLOGY. (CONJUGATION OF A PASSIVE VERB. vSer herido, to he wounded, INFINITIVE MOOD. Present Tense. Ser herido, To be wounded. Pe)fect. Haber sido kendo, To have been wounded. Gerund, Siendo herido, Being wounded. Compound of the Gerund. MaMendo sido herido, Having been wounded. Participle. Herido, Been wounded. 117 rNDICATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. Soi herido, Eres hei'ido, Es herido, Somos heridos Sois heridos, Son heridos, Era herido. Eras herido, Era herido, Eramos heridos, JErais heridos, Eran heridos, I am wounded. Thou art wounded. He is wounded. We are wounded. Ye or you are wounded. They are wounded. Imperfect. I was wounded. Thou wast wounded. He was wounded. We were wounded. Ye or you were wounded. T hey were wounded. 118 ETYMOLOGY. Perfect Indefinite^ or Preterite, Fui herido, I was wounded. F-mste herido, Thou wast wounded. Fus herido, He Avas wounded. F'uimos heridos, We were wounded. Fiusteis heridos, Ye or you were wounded. Fueron heridos, They were wounded. Sere herido, "Serds herido, Sera herido, Seremos heridos Sereis heridos, Serdn heridos, Se tu herido, Sea el herido, Sed vowtros heridos^ Sean ellos heridos, Future Imperfect. ■ I shall or will be wounded. Thou shalt or wilt be wounded. He shall or will be wounded. We shall or will be wounded. Ye or you shall or will be woun- ded. They shall or will be wounded. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Be thou wounded. Let him be wounded. Be ye oj* you wounded. Let them be wounded. Sea herido, Seas herido. Sea herido, Sedmos heridos, Sedis heridos, Sean heridos. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present Tense. I may be wounded. Thou mayst be wounded. He may be wounded. We may be wounded. Ye or you may be wounded. They may be wounded. Imperfect. I should, would, might be woun- ded. Thou shouldst, wouldst, mightst, be wounded. Fuera, seria.fuese, herido, He should, would, might be wounded. Fuera, seria, fuese, herido, Fueras^ serias, fusses, herido, ETYMOLOGY. 119 Fiieramos, sertamos,fu=semos, he- We should, would, might he rirfcs, wounded. FuSro-is, ser7ai',fiieseisy heridos, Ye or you should, would, might he wounded. Fueran, senan, fussen, heridos, They should, would, might he wounded. Future Imperfect. Sifiiere herido, If J should he wounded. Sifusres herido, If thou shouldst he wounded. Sifuere herido, If he should he wounded. Si fiieremcs heridos, If we houJd he wounded. Sifusreis heridos, If ye or you should be wounded ^ifueren heridos. If they should be wounded. CONJUGATION OF A REFLECTIVE VERB. Alabdrse, to praise one^s self. INFINITIVE MOOD. Present Tense, llabarse, To praise one's self. Perfect. Hah.h'se alabddo. To have praised one's sell Gerund. dlbandose, Praising one's self. Compound of the Gerund. Habisndose alabado, Having praised one's self. Participle. dlabddc, Yo me aldbo, Tu te alUbaff El se alaba^ Praised one's self. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. I praise myself. Thou praisest thyself. He praises himself. 120 J^ofiotros nos alabdmos, Vosotros OS fdabdis, Ellos se aldbdn, Me nlaMba, Te ahibdbas, Se a'abdha, JS/hf atabdbamos, Os alfthdbais, Se alabdban, ETYMOLOGY. We praise ourselves. Ye or you praise yourselves. They praise themselves. hnperfect. I did praise myself. Thou didst praise thyself. He did praise himself. We did praise ourselves. Ye or you did praise yourselves.. They did praise themselves. Perfect Indefinite, or Preterite. Me alabe, Te alabdste, Se alabo, J\'os alabdmos, Os alabdnlels, Se alabdron. I praised myself. Thou praisedst thyself. He praised himself. We praised ourselves. Ye or you praised yourselves. They praised themselves. Me alabare, Te alabards, Se alabard, JSTos alabaremos, Os alabareis, Se alabardn, Future Imperfect. I shall*praise myself. Thou shalt praise thyself. He shall praise himself. We shall praise ourselves. Ye or you shall praise yov)rselveg. They shall praise themselves. imp:erative mood. Aldbese el, Mabdos vosotros. Mdbense ellos.^ Praise thyself, or do thou praise thyself. Let him praise himself. Praise ye or you or do ye praifr yourselves. Let them praise themselves ETYMOLOGY. 121 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. Me alabe, Te aldbes, Se aldbe, J^os alabemos, Os alabeis, Se aldben, I may praise myself. Thou mayst praise thyself. He may praise himself. We may praise ourselves. Ye or you may praise yourselves. They may praise themselves. Imperfect Me alabdra, alabaria, alabds€f I should, would, might praise myself. Te alabdras, alabarias, alabdseSt Thou shouldst, wouldst, mightst praise thyself. .Se alabdra, alabaria, alahdse, He should, would, might praise himself. vYos alabdramos, alabariamos, ala- We should, would, might praise bdfiemos, ourselves. Os alabdrais, alabariais, alabdseis, Ye or you should, would, might praise yourselves. Se alabdran, alabarian, alabdsen. They should,would,might praise themselves. Future Imperfect. Si me alabdre, If I should praise myself. Si te alabdres, If thou shouldst praise thyself. Si se alabdre, If he should praise himself. Si nos alabdremos, If we should praise ourselves. ' Si OS alabdreis, If je ar you should praise your- selves. Si se alahdren. If they should praise themselves. 11 122 ETYMOLOGY. The following are some of the most useful regular verbs, which will serve as examples for the student to exercise himself. 1st CONJUGATION. Llorar, to weep. EstudiaVy to study. Soplar^ to blow. Silbar, to whistle. Escuchar, to listen. Mirar, to look. Pellizcar, to pinch. iSrroparse, to cover one's self. Desnudarse, to undress. Descansar, to repose. Retrogradar, to retrograde. Estornudar^ to sneeze. ^Syunar, to fast. Jlhnorzar, to breakfast. Espavlla7', to snufF. Ridicularizar^ to ridicule. Gritar, to shout. Olvidarse, to forget. Saludar, to salute, Lisongear, to flatter. Perdonar, to pardon. Miviar, to alleviate. Bajar, to descend. Entrar, to enter. JEnviar, to send. Mejorar, to improve, aATaueg-ar, to navigate. Trabajar, to work. Estrechavj to render narrower. Dibujar, to draw. Danzar, to dance. Suplicar, to supplicate. Endi-rezar, to straighten. t^gugerear, to make holes. Ser accusado, to be accused. Ser h&llado, to be found. 2d CONJUGATION. Recoger, to gather. Barrer, to sweep. Romper, to break. Coger, to catch. Deber, to owe. Someterse, to submit one's self. Jiprender, to learn. Leer, to read. Responder, to answer. Comer, to eat. Einprender, to undertake* Toser, to cough. Jltreverse, to dare. Creer, to believe. Ceder, to yield. Aniemr, to foresee. Correr, to run. Sorber, to swallow. Socorrer, to succour. Prometer, to promise. Egercer, to exercise. Temer, to fear. 3d CONJUGATION. Escnbir, to write. Fmr, to live. Persistir, to persist. Desistir, to desist. Pulir, to polish. Incurrir, to incur. Infundir, to infuse Insistir, to insist. Disuadir, to dissuade, Parfir, to depart. Descubrir, to discover, Citrfirse, to be tanned. ETYMOLOGY. 123 OF IRREGULAR VERBS. Irregular verbs are those v/hich deviate from the general rules of conjugation, given from page 101 to page 108. As the Spanish language abounds in this kind of Terbs, they claimed, we thought, a considerable portion of our attention. It is for this reason that we have spared no trouble or study in col- lecting all the irregular verbs which could possibly be found. We are happy to say, that our researches have not been unsuccessful. For, independently of the many verbs v/hich we have gathered from an attentive perusal of the latest edition of the Dictionary of the Spanish academy; others, not to be found in it, have been added to our number. We are, therefore, enabled to present to the public, all, or very nearly all, the anomalous verbs which the Spanish language now contains. On the arrangement of these verbs, wo also bestowed much of our attention. And we hope, that the advantages resulting from that which we have adopted, will prove it to be judicious. The Spanish language contains thirty-one different irregular verbs;* but, like these, many others are conjugated. We thought, that the best plan Ave could adopt, would be, to arrange systema- tically these thirty-one, presenting to the view their full conjuga' tion; and exhibiting, by italick characters, their irregular persons or tenses — then to place in alphabetic columns all the irregular verbs which we have collected, including the thirty-one; with re- ferences to the model after which they are to be conjugated. By this means, should a person find a verb and be doubtful whether it be regular or irregular, he possesses immediately, and without trouble, all that is necessary. For, should this verb not be found among the irregular, he must immediately take it for granted that it is regular, and accordingly conjugated after the regulations given from page 101 to page i08. The irregular verbs, most undoubtedly, constitute one of the greatest difficulties of the Spanish language; and when the mem- bers of the Spanish Academy said: "JVttesiraf lengua abunda en * Without including the auxiliary, which are also irregular. + Gramatica de la lengua Castellana, preface, page xvi. 124 ETYMOLOGY. verbos irregulares, que, aunque la hacen mas agradahle y armoniosa por la vanedad que permiten, tambien la hacen mas dificil, por lo que se apartan de los comunes en la conjugacion;* they were perfectly convinced of it. If, therefore, as we anxiously anticipate, our labours and re- searches in collecting and arranging the irregular verbs of the Spanish language, in the manner we have done, tend to render this part of grammar easy and intelligible, we shall consider all our toils fully successful and amply repaid. * Our language abounds in irregular verbs, which, by their variety, render it more agreeable and harmonious. Bat the great difference existing between them and the regular verbs, renders its acquisition TOuch more difficult. ETYMOLOGY. 125 > Pi o w ffl o •-s ;z; o «*-< ~* a; 55€ rt O CD O H O o "I qs q; ^ 21 1^ rQ r-Q 1-^ goocssoooo a \ci \ei a d >> ^ _5 S fsH •- ^ .ir ^ O Ph p — I .5 'S o o c O O 5 a a : >; -T3 TJ -a GO »: s- =- '- a i^ fH ^i 1 dj \ss a \as V: F^ T3 IT3 r-3 q Jh I- ^H t- ! o o o o < o a o o < C3 rt C3 CS ( ? ro T3 r^ -3 SOOOssOOOO ec3rtc3«Brtrtrics S o o O S o o « e c3 rt rt s o o o o S o o o u e d rt rt cj fcp3 5^ Oh »^ «H j ^ cT •C $e -^ ^ 53 e &0 cc §s g g <4i ^ laj «.«.». c ^ rt S O Ph flea B § C £5 .2» CD' OJ Ci .JS .S 0) 03 eS Qj©®Q;«a5iU©©© SIS s c c s: a . --5- r-, o I s a £JD fcJ3 faj: bp en O C O O iilii 53 ^ G i^O ^ ^iD ^ 6 .^ TJ S^ £ o (^ _S _3 _3 _3 _;S _§ _3 _3 _3 ^3^ ! 3 3 3 ,S S.: S 3 3 3 E, «« ?5 rt ea t? br, oj: bc fco ^ ^ 130 ETYMOLOGY. o H o Q O o ^ ^xJ IT I :§ <4i ^ (4:) (X) O O CLj tH « © 5 ^ £ ^11 c^ 2 fl C ri a a a a . - 5 ri cj © a> li:slii.2'SJ.§ oo"oo««ooc;o ^ © ^ _© » 2 S i^ Si^ iJ oj © "S "S "t 3 •" © © © a,pwa<&i ; rt c3 rt rt- ! »3 tn M tn tn *S 'iS "^ '«^ 'S '3 © xl;; \rt oi ooooo«oooo _« _© © _« i ^ S^^^i^ "S ■© "S 4) "a i "S 03 © la p^&,ci.a,CLa,CL,p.o,Q, rtcSrioSaeirSriricj 05 ssss s c« i c. s s s s § S 2^§ = cj a St: rt cS © © © \». \M <» 0000 « "0 ■© "o 4) OJ © w _o © © _2 © "ep © ~ © © © © a, Oh Ci- Q, a.o-p.OHQ, C3 TO C3 •«5 & 5cS 2 Q ft. s ETYMOLOGY. ISl 44 ^ a a 2 s g s =■ s ."- s « ^ « '§ ,S ^2 ^t >§ § ?^ •^ o c> "< ^ J^t^ ^ O Ph ri ' g-| ir'« ^"^^ ^J ^ -SS rC iii -Si -I s Is •S o.^ s ° 132 ETYMOLOGY. P ^ •? ^ C *0 ^ o Q^ d ^ c • c a s a . • o ^ . • a ci o a g c S '?s g si !- -r ao S <5^ s r ^ '" ' gsssisssss .2 w 'S 'ra 'S '3 "i i ,5 S o '1 }^ S :i M — -0'73'CT2-Ct3'C-OT3 t.MM»^^^^^!M;^ ooooocoooo SSSS2SSSSS ^ g o O o o XO05C! , ^SfiSS illl illll -o ^ -5 -p rpy-p'-^'-p i. I- — « i^ :.. -^ u U C i c o o o c c o S g S 2 2 s s sa e.5 fe.«.2 1—1 ^ be I soooggooco S222g§Sa2S ;OCCS§COOO ;S22gg2SSS S o o o § 2 2 2 Illl ETYMOLOGY. 5 ^ p5 a • c G c a • O ,5 . . rt c3 © <» 4 S Sh ^nJ c» si ti ■ - (« iL, .^ a; 03 aj .g .« © Qj (1) fO 11 11 'O 'X3 -C "O u -— h S-i a to o o o o o o § s s s a O rt CJ QJ © re ^ -O -5 'S O QJ O © (D p^ a, CI, e^ p^ "^ ^- c g ^ -§ ^ '^ ^ "« 5^ 5v 5x ^ Oi a, Q, Q, ^ O P^ \'i^ rt rt (U QJ .2^ 03 © G3 .?J .^ (U 2 o ^ e.l i.2.2 ,?J O a 03 ,^ .^ 03 OJ O O E- S 12 134 ETYMOLOGY. -I -^ -73 «.^ c . c e s5 a ^ ^ 03 c3 03 cj cS ': O U U O O ' ■ill I 2 o 2 2 § s a s s g cS c3 © © S V4^ C ^O >© "B ^ «r^ g cT IS- .2 o ^"^ ?>5 ^ ^ ^ J o o O ^ o o3 T3 6 •t^ fl *o 4^=1 c !t © ^ rt 15 ►^ O Ph II 2 >. © .=« ■f >■ © ?>-i >1 ri d C3* ri rt ci © © « « w © « o © So\ »» 2 -^ >S 2 H •Sf' S? 2 ^ ^ o©o©oS©©«© .fci:.2 V-, © .^X5 ^ g § rt rf rf § rt rf « © © © I o © © © © 51 ETYMOLOGY. 135 t^ c s C g- g i s i i « : o S o o 1 i 1 i i 1 ^W y<- ^ o B ^ ■xs o -TJ o G 0) c a *3 "cti "rt c -tj C c: c 5 o o o o bJD o p J 1 ^ Cb 4j ^ -i^ •^ -^ <5 -S « S s OOO 1 1^ 'S^ =1 I. !„ i^ « t" i' q5 .2 ,2 i; (U 2 ^ •'^ <" ^ <^^rO a,-Q-0 ST-'S^ *§,■£, iS6 ETYMOLOGY. s ^ 6^ 'rt 3 3 © ■oS) ^ c !3 CO o "o o 4 ^ c g 4 •^ ^ ^ c:) Q ■=^ fis ^ i^^i.^ii TS "T! -^ •^ £ 2 ^ '^ r„ 2 O O 2 o i s s I S 5~ ,^ .§5 ,*- a )^ C :^ ^'g -^3 -^ ITS -a -e o § o s S &, ?;, Ct* Si, ?!, 13 -^ i "^ ^ -S T3 E ^ ns ^ ;g f> ETYMOLOGY. 1ST UJL "Bh 'o O a a o 3^ ^ o ^ g cT 1^ '^ 5J g ^ CS o S a, ft^ fis i III I § i§ § ^ S4, ft, ?;, a, 5i, {;, 54, S;, a, M 8.! s S .2.2 Qi ^^ 1^ '>^ Q^ (T*.^^ f^ ^^ \Q* o 2 CO 2 s o o § i i s s ^12^ ■« :^ :^ s, ?;,»,«, a. 3. I O PL, "" <^ s"' 2 'g * ^ ^o *>c-« "^ .2^ -S lllfi i §1 11 Si, a. a, S5, a, a, a. a, a, a, .s -I logs S S S ; s5,o- a, a, I a, a a ; S « « § 12* 138 ETYMOLOGY. '5 ^ '% 0) bJD ^ n o "S 03 ^ •^ ^ o 5. .■^ ^ It it ^ .Sr fl 'o °2 3 '-Hj o 1 .2 /r. 'p I i .1 -g 2 ;§ N « fD ''? I> •<" ? « &. g S ; -2 •£ •: ©So! Sv$2 Si ' rt \S ^g \S iS s ? s ^ li g » I; t^ <» C C?i 0< O^ Cr> ^ C g I:- I; I; -g t •? i .g 0^1 3 Is 3 .2^ 3 t 3 ".2 O^ O^ &i &< Oh Oi Os ^ ^ Q» •11 J e .1:2 I: .sis ETYMOLOGY. 13^ ^^ eo ^' ^ C ? si . . ? c3 I 2 .2 ';§ 'S s g _t -r 2 s ■5 ^-1 |, |,"|-§ "I"'!' ; -o 5 g,-5 ■! |,|-p s-l- Qj •(» •?* "Ci "C) <5 53 s3 s* S^ CiQ Oq ^ fH ^H -C O Pn g-ris rr UQ ETYMOLOGY. . j^ P ,§ S g S 5 ; I I I i III I i .2 "1 ;§ -i 'i 8 e « g !3 53 o § I S 5- _J2 J. 5. ^ S 53 ^ ^ ^ hS o P4 1*^ eg glsrl '^^ I •§ 'I I r •^'' ^ I ^ ^ i3 5~ *; "rilp |i"lsi>l III I ETYMOLOGY. 141 111 a; J2 CD o "(D a; B ^ ^ ^ cT ?^. _ > > » 2 § o o § S I S S S c^ '?; o a> s \t ;;g r'£ \a3 3 VO g B 8 S T £ S ^ ^ 2 ^-^^;= 12 — ^ 5S > S> ?* S> !»■ ^ lOrt, 5: I eel:©© ^r:= 1= :2 ^:=: :2 ^ — ^. « ^ I 2S « § (^^^s: (^ ^ f*; '14^ ETYMOLOGY. O 0) Co O P^ s2 "^ ES > > CD _© o -^ ETYMOLOGY. 14a •^ bc _: ^ o o o x: S o -4-^ « o 1: ^ c§ s •a Si ^ 1 1 c3 > g 3 6 j3 O = ^ _> ^ ]H^ :5Tfl ."t^ p ".S .2 2 "^ o rt 5 O P^ sg SB i.2>^.; I i§ , o o o o o ~ i c c G c a , o o o o o : u o o o u ttJ O W3 5 o S o c '3 '3 ^3 "3 5? ''^ .il ''Xf ^^ 5£ ii c i^ 2 o a O 5 S Si'S Srv'^ 5^ nrs ?^'~ : •=---£=: : c G = g . ; o c c s ; I c o C^" « I I .S e S.i S o o o « o d o 3 1^' § 5\z § ?s I 144 ETYMOLOGY. .ii ^ o CJ c-a o- rt 3 2 ^-^ .r^ I3| a a s ^^ rS Ou In t!i ^ fs^ 5 ^ s .« % ^ ■" r-j [^ s^ ,> -^ CI. ^ O Ph i S 3 3 3 =S 2 O O O § i s a s N '3 'S 'o 'O S 3i 3 3^ 3 3 3 3 S S ; & In 4 ^ ^ §S cT 5^ •S^ ^ i ^ Sv ^ ^ i § ,t ^ I i t 'S I Is -lllilillll ooooog§o§;s S 5 S'2 «5 S S fi g I :| .^ :| :| i 11 il "e -^ -a -^ -s ^ ^ q O Ph : S S i ) c3 "! V VJ JJ fc* « C ^ *- ^ QJ 'ililiillll Soocs;sS03S I s s s «S ^ Lh Si ;3 o o o £? ^ s; 148 ETYMOLOGY. S fi ^ a a. g .2 \|; .« s s ^ .^ 2 « .2 a ^ .'^ :2 -p ^E '.S <2 v's o 2 O O a S £ 1 '^ Qi o S ••^ "^ l> =3 § ^ :s ® :h ^ :s :^ :s ^ :3 3 Si,&,&,p^| Si,Si,OHS5,S: S' "I ETYMOLOGY. 149 S s - i|:|^g. fell J.I § > g § ^ g 'g ^ -g -g •3 ^= ,g -§ "^ SjI^j -s )2^ :^ 9? o s ^ s si s^^ ' c c -I "I s § g (D O ^ o a< f; « =? £ ss fi S g J §• f GO .^ 5 .s s ^ ^ c» > 'cS cS S ^ boj -^ .§ .1 fj § s> 'g 'g ili .^-■s •=1 f^-gie ^ e; 4> 5 13=- 1-50 ETYMOLOGY. N ^^ fe-^ . «« .-^ ^ ^ ^ j3 . C c C S •2 's -,3 .s "i v2 'i *§ ■^ 's ';^ •» '^ ^Jo-^ -^ -J -^ C3c3rtrtc3ec3e3c3c3 en o 05 ^ I O C O H cti £: ^ O o o o > — • Cl, ^ c2 j e< » •- ^^ -^ ® hf,-« -^ ■; C3csrtc3c3ecic3c ^ O O* ^2 ETYMOLOGY. 151 &^f 'S 'S "^ f M t: 'S 'p \e B e s .g §2 w .^ o ■°'^ ^ ^-C 6r bn i- feu iuD 2 '^ tS .2 '^ .'^ S 'H "" ?^ ''^ "c ^S 'c^ ^S '5 'e >v >E '2 vS <^ «^ .2~.S ® ^-'■j '^ 5 i!C bo « .?^ rQrCrOrf5,Or«i^-©rC 2 S o § III i i ,0 ,0 r^ .« .^ ! o 3 « g § I: -o 2 b . © be © .i; br be O bjD bo ^^ ,o^^ , : I = I I 5 ,0 rO ^ -« O P-i '-•3 i ^ be fcri O) be bo ^ ,J» -O -O ,«5 ETYMOLOGY. 153 —' a ci ^.| '^.^ .^'^.^ ^.^ ^ ^ cc O ty^ 5 C J- O S B 5 B ]t ^o ^o 'o 'o O O'O 1^ 2 -S \nJ > 'o 'o ..^ ^.^ ^ I. o o O o « I o o O < f 1 i- I'll 154 ETYMOLOGY. -S ;5 ;^ 2 ^-^'^ 2 :^ ;S ^ "( e^ .2 '§ 3 i Ij.^i; -i .^^ .'S g a g 3 s f .''S -fe }^ .^s »^ »^ 1*2 ^'S JS ^?^ Sq Cq C » <:4^.i: ^ h5 O Ph 165 ETYMOLOGY. AN ALPHABETICAL LIST Of all the irregular verbs, in the Spanish language, with refe- rences to the example after which they are to be Conjugated. IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE FIRST CONUGATION. Page. ^Hcordar, to agree, 125 Acrecenlar, to increase, 126 Acertar, to guess, ib. Acordarse, to remember, 125 Acostarse, to lie down, ib. ,.idestrar, to make dexter- ous, 126 Agorar, to divine, 125 Mentar, to encourage, 126 ..4Z?-/iorzar, to breakfast, 125 tMmolar, to whet, ib. Jlndar, to walk, 127 Jl'pacentar, to feed cattle, 126 Aporcar, to cover with earth, 125 Aportur, to arrive at a point, ib. ^3joo,sfar, to lay wages, ib. Aprobar, to approve, ib. Apretar^ to tighten, 126 Arrendar^ to hire, ib. Asentar, to set down, ib. Aserrar, to saw, ib. Asestar, to take aim, ib. JJsoldar, to keep troops in pay, 125 Jlsolar, to raze, ib. Jlsonar,io make sounds agree, ib. Mentar, to attempt, 126 Page. 126 ib. ib. 125 126 Aterrar, to terrify, Atestar, to cram,* Atravesar, to cross, JItronar, to thunder, Ave7itar, to fan, Avers onzarse, to be ashamed, 125 Bregar, to contend, 126 Calentar, to warm, ib. Cegar, to blind, ib. Cerrar, to shut, ib. Cimentar, to lay foundations, ib. Colar, to strain, ib. Colgm\ to hang up, ib. Comenzar, to commence, ib. Comprobar, to corroborate, 125 Concertar, to agree, ib. Concordar, to agree, ib. Confesar, to confess, 129 Consolar, to give consolation, 125 Consonar^ to agree in tone, ib. Contar, to relate, . ib. Costar, to cost, ib. Dur, to give, 128 Dtceniar,to make the first cut, ib. Ded'imp.tar,'<( the reverse of cimentar, 126 Degollar, to behead, 125 * Wlicp. it signifies to attest it is regular. t When tlie ver'f co.l^isi- of two radical e, the additional i is placed before the secoud: ys, deciiwento, decimz'enlas, &e. ETYMOLOGY. 157 Demostrar, to demonstrate, Denegar, to diffuse, Denostar, to revile, Den-engar, to break the back. Desacertar, to mistake, Desacordnr, to be discordant. Desalentar, to discourage, Desapretar, to loosen, Desaprobar, to disapprove, Desasosegar, to disturb, Desatentnr, to perplex, Descolgar, the reverse of Descollar, to be a neck taller, Desconcertar, to disarrange, Desconsolar, to afflict, Descontar, to discount, Desempedrar, to unpave, Desancerrar, to let loose, Desengrosar, to diminish in thickness, Desenteyrar, to take up a corpse, De^flocar, to ravel out, Desfogarse, to give vent to passion, Deshelar, to thaw, Desherrar, to unshoe horses, Desmembmr, to dismember, Desolar, to desolate, Desollar, to flay, Desovar, to spawn, Despedrar, to unpave, Desj)er7iar, to take off legs, Despertar, to awake, Desplegai'y to unfold, 125 Despoblar, to depopulate, 125 126 Desterrar, to exile. 126 125 Destrocar, to return things 126 bartered, 125 ib. Desvergonzarse, to grow im- 125 pudent, ib. 126 Dezmar, to tithe. 126 ib. Emendar, to amend, ib. 125 Empedrar, to pave, ib. 126 Empezar, to begin, ib. ib. Emporcar, to soil, 125 Enceimir, to lease, 126 125 Encerrar, to shut up. ib. ib. Encomendar, to recommend ib. 126 Encontrar, to find. 125 125 Encordar, to string musical ib. instruments, ib. 126 Enmibertar, to cover Avith ib. cloth, 126 Eng-rosaj-, to engross. 125 125 Enrodar, to break on the wheel. ib. 126 Ensangi-entar, to stain with 125 blood, 126 Enterrar, to bury. ib. ib. E?Tar,* to err. ib. 126 Escalentar, to preserve the ib. heat, ib. ib. Escarmentar, to learn by ex- 126 perience, ib. ib. Esforzarse, to make efforts, 125 ib. Espresar, to express. 126 126 jE5Y* to place puesto pu/ttr predecir to predict predicho prender to seize preso^' prendido preponer to place fii*st prepuesto Infinitive. prescribir presuponer prever proponer proscribir proveer recluir rehacer reponer resolver rever revolver romper satisfacer sobreponer soltar suponer suprimir trasponer ver volver ETYMOLOGY. Meaning. Irreg. Particip. to prescribe Frescrito'^ to presuppose joreswpi^es^o to foresee previsto ^ to propose propuesto to proscribe proscrito to provide provisto* to shut up recluso to do over again rehecho to replace repuesto to resolve to review to revolve to break to satisfy resuelto revisto revuelto roto^ safisfecho to place over sobrepuesto to let go suelto to suppose supuesto to suppress supreso* to transpose traspuesto to see visto to return vuelto 173 Reg. Particip. prescribido proveido recluido rompido soltado suprimido Observation on the foregoing Verbs which have two Participles, The irregular participles, except those which are marked thus,* are used like adjectives, and never to form the compound tenses of verbs; as, el esta despierto, sin que le hayan despertado, he is awaked, without any person having aicaked him; el suelo estd enjuto por que el sol le ha enjugado, the floor is dry because the sun has dried it. Preso, prescrito, provisto, and roto, are oftener used to form the compound tenses of prender, prescribi, proveer, and. roTrt- per, than their own regular participles. 15* 174 ETYMOLOGY. Properties of some Participles^ The following participles have an active significatio% and are used also as verbal adjectives: ^gradecido, thanked, and thankful. Atrevido^ dared, and bold. Callado, unmentioned, and reserved. Cansado, tired, and tiresome. Coinedido, mused, and gentle. Desesperado, despaired, and despairing. Disimulado^ dissembled, and crafty. * Entendido^ understood, and intelligent. Esforzado, encouraged, and resolute. Fingido, feigned, and hypocritical. Leido, read, and learned. Medido^ measured, and unassuming. Mirado, looked at, and circumspect. Moderado, moderated, and moderate. Ocasionado, caused, and provoking. Osarfo, dared, and bold. Parado, stopped, and idle. PartidOf divided, and munificent. Pausado, paused, and quiet. Porjfiado, contented, and pertinacious. Preciado, valued, and precious. Presumido^ presumed, and arrogant* Pecatado, concealed, and cautious* Sabido^ known, and clever. Sentido, felt, and sensible. Sufrido, suffered, and patient. Transcendido^ transcended, and acute. Y^ido, availed, and mighty, and confident- ETYMOLOGY, fr& Tffe participles of cenar, comer, and hablar, when preceded by the adverb bien or mal, belong to this kind; as, un hombre bien hablado, a well-spoken man; un muchacomal cenadOf a boy that has not supped well. Examples. HI estd cansado de trabajar, he is tired of workings el vio claramente que yo estaba cansado de oirle, pero 8in embargo el cajisado prosiguio., he clearly saw, that I was tired of hearing him, but still the tiresome went on; nosotros le hemos callado el secreto, porque sabemos que no es hombre callado, we have concealed the secret from him, because we know that he is not a reserved man. ON THE ANCIENT AND MODERN TERMINATIONS OF VERBS. The terminations of Spanish verbs, have, like the language itself, undergone various changes, and im- provements. These were not effected until the works of the greatest authors, had already made their appear- ance. The difference between the ancient and modern terminations is not, however, so great, as to render the meaning of them, in all instances, obscure to the stu- dent; for this may, very often, be gathered from the context of the sentence. Nor can it be said, that it presents to him no difficulties. For, he being accus- tomed to read and say amabais, to denote, ye loved; and finding amabades^ although he may guess at its meaning, he, very often, conscious of his deficiency, will not trust to his own judgment. And as the object of his doubt cannot be found in any book of reference, he is left in a state of uncertainty. The new editions of the greatest authors, have also been printed accord- ing to their original; and, therefore, a knowledge of 176 ETYMOLOGY. the various modifications and additions in the tenses of verbs, is rendered necessary to the learner. The modern terminations of verbs, are, according to our opinion, far superior to the ancient. In the Spanish language, the sound of the combination of two or three vowels, in which the i is included, is always melodious and sonorous 5 and this is the case in the newly adopted terminations. As it has been the object of the author to make this grammar as useful as study and research would enable him, he has endeavoured to present to the view of the learner, the ancient and modern terminations of those tenses of verbs, which have undergone any variation, in a manner, he indulges the hope, attainable, in a glance, by any common capacity. VARIATION OF THE REGULAR VERBS. It is only the second person plural of all the tenses, of regular verbs, which have undergone any variation. This will be seen in the following columns. FIRST CONJUGATION. Ancient terminations. Modern terminations Amades^ ye love, Amais, Amdbades, ye did love Amabais. Amdsfedes ye loved. Amdsteis. Amaredes, ye will love. Amarew. Amides, ye may love, Ameis. Amaredes, ye should love. Amdrais, Amariades, ye would love, Amariais, Amdsedes, ye might love. Amaseis, Amdredes, ye should love, Amdreis. ETYMOLOGY. SECOND CONGUGATION. Yendedes^ ye sell, Vendees. Vendiades, ye did sell, Vendz«f5. Vendistedes, ye sold. YerAisteis. Yenderedes, ye will sell, YendereiSi Yendades, ye may sell, Yendais. Yendierades, ye should sell. Yendierais. Yenderiades, ye would sell. Yendenais. Yendiesedes, ye might sell. Yendieseis. YGiidieredes, ye should sell. Yendiereis. THIRD CONGUGATION. \Jmde§, ye unite, Unis. IJniades, ye did unite, Vniais, XJnistedes, ye united. Vniesteis. VnMde9, ye will unite, \Jnireis» XJnades, ye may unite, Vnais, VnieradeSf ye should unite. Vnierais. XJniriades, ye would unite. XJniriais. Uniesedes, ye might unite, Vniesis. Vnieredes, ye should unite. IJniereis* 177 VARIATION OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. The irregular verbs follow, in their variations, the regular; as. Ancient use. Modern use. Bodes, ye are, Sois. Hahedes, ye have, Kaheis, Aceviades^ ye heat the mark, Acertais^ &c. Exceptions, Those verbs, the first person of the indicative of which, terminated formerly i» o, at present, terminates. in oii as. 178 ETYMOLOGY. So, I am, Soi. Do, I give, Doi, Vo, I go, You Some of the persons of those irregular verbs, which, at present, terminate in igo, and iga, formerly termi- nated in yo, ya$ and those in go and ga, in o and a; as. Ca?/o, I fall, Cadgo. Cai/«, I may fall^ C&iga, Oyo, I hear, Oi^o. Trayo, I bring. Traigo. Tvaya, I may bring, Traiga. Valo, I am worth. Val^o. Val«, I may be worth, Yalga. Those which before had an o, in their radical letter»%. have at present a u^ as. Cobrio, he covered. Cwbrio, Copo, he was contained. Ct^po. Ovo, he had, Hi^bo.* Morio, he died, Mwrio. Dormio, he slept, Dt^rmio. Poso, he placed. Pt^so. Sopo, he knew, Swpo, OF V^RBS, U SED INTERROGATIVELY OR NEGAT In asking questions, the verb is always placed before its nominative or subject j as, (i Amo yo9 Do\ I love? ^Amas^^w.^ Dost ikow love? * The verb, haher, to have, is now written with an h. t When the English auxiliary verb, to do, is used to ask a ques'^' tion, or to express a negation, it is never translated in Spanish. ETYMOLOGY- 179 ^ Amo €t? Did he love? ^ Amareis vosotros? Shall you love? 2 Vendra mi padre? Will mj father come? A Seran ellos felices?^ Will they he happy? When the verb is negatively used, the negative ad- verb no, not, must always precede the verbj as, Ellos no saldrdn, They will not go out. Su- abuelo no estaba alii. Her grand-father was not there. No era vmd el que me in- Was it 7iof you, who invited vito? me? No ayunan ellas hoi? Do they not fast to-day? OF ADVERBS. Adverbs serve to modify the signification of verbs; as, lee Men, he reads well: es tarde, it is late. Adverbs are divided into simple and compound; com- pound adverbs are those which are compounded of ad- jectives, or other adverbs, by the addition of a word or syllable; as, felizmente happily, from feliz, happy; fa- cihnente, easily, from facil, easy; and simple adverbs are those from which the compounds are formed; as, cerca, near; dentro, within. The adverbs are divided into nine classes; viz — ad- verbs of place, time, manner, quantity, comparison, or- der, affirmation, negation, and doubt. . * Sometimes, to render the expression more elegant, the verb is placed before the nominative, in sentences where a question is not asked; as, Vivla enlonces su padre, his father was then aliye; Vino ely sits secuaces, he and his followers came. 180 ETYMOLOGY. Donde, where. Monde? whither? £qui, here. Mil, there. t^Ua, yonder. For aqui, this way. Hasta aqui^ hitherto. Fuera^ abroad. Lejos^ far. Cerca, near. Aparte, aside. Arriba^ above. Sohre, over. Encima, upon. Bajo^ underneath. Cuando? when? Entonces. then. Of Of Hoi, to ^ay. •%er, yesterday. Cada dia, every day. Ayer manana, yesterday morning. £yer tarde, yesterday ev- ening. Mnoche, last night. Manana^ to-morrow. Despues de manana, after to-morrow. Manana a la noche, to- morrow night. Place. Ahajo, under. De bajo, from below. De adelqnte, from before. De atras, from behind. Cerca, night. Fn alguna parte, some- where. Enninguna jo«r^e, no where En cualquiera parte, any where. En alguna otra parte, some- where else. En otra parte, elsewhere. En ninguna otra parte, no where else. Time. El atro dia, the other day. La semana pasader, last week. Ultimamente, lately. Za, already. «^wn, still. Lu^go, presently. Prontamente, quickly. Brevemente., shortly. Tarde, late. Temprano, early. Presto, soon. Con tiempo, betimes. Antiguamente, formerly. En tiempo atras, heretofore. En lo sucesivo, hereafter. Jihora,rio\v. Siempre, ever, always JVunca, never. Pocas veces, seldom. ^menudo, often. ETYMOLOGY. 181 Writes, before. Despites, after. JDesde, since. Mucho tiempo ha, long ago. Hasta, until. Mgunas veces, sometimes. Contimiamente, continual De cuando en cuando, now Ij. and then. Bien, well. Mai, badlj. Jisif thus. Despacio, slowly. Mo, loudly. Eecio, strongly. Mucho, much. Demasiado, too much. itf«5, more. Poco, little. Of Manner t Apriesa, hastily. Bajo, lowly. Presto, quickly. Fuertemente, strongly^ and all those ending in mente. Of Quantity. Cuasi, almost. Bastante, enough, Harto, sufficiently. Totalmente, wholly. Of Comparison. Mas que, more than. Antes mas, rather more. Menos, less. Peor, worse. Mejor, better. Mui, very. JDelmismomodo, likewise. Con mucho, by far. Of Order. Primero, first. Sobre todo, above all. En primer Jugar, in the first place. En segundo lugar, in the second place. 16 De spues, after. A montones, in heaps. Confiisamente, confusedly. Sin distincion, indiscrimin- ately. 182 ETYMOLOGY. Of Affirmation. Si, yes. Ciertamente, surely. ^^un, even. De todos modos, by all Sin duda, without doubt. means. Of Negation. No, no. De ningim modo, by no Ni, nor. means. Tampoco, neither. Be ninguna suerte, in no wise* Of Doubt. Acaso, perhaps. Frobablemente, probably. £penas, scarce. Es dudoso, His doubtful. A COLLECTION OF ADVERBS, Requiring de before the nouns which come after them. Acerca de; as, acerca de lo que me dijo, concerning what he told me. A cuhierto de; as, d cubierfo de la lluvia, under shelter of the rain. Ademas de; as, ademas de lo que oi, besides what I heard. M lado de; as, ponga vmd. esto al lado de ella, place this along side of her. Antes de; as, antes del sermon, before the sermon. A pesar de; as, d pesar de el, in spite of him. Cerca de; as, cerca de casa, near home. Debajo de; as, debajo de la silla, under the chair. Delante de; as, delante del rei, before the king. Dentro de; as, dentro de la iglesia, within,, or inside of the church. ETYMOLOGY. 183 Despues de; as, despues de comer, after dinner. Detras de; as, defras de la pared, behind the wall. Encima de; as, enchna del drbol, above the tree. Enf rente de; as, enfrente del capitolio, opposite the capitol. Fiiera de; sls, fuera del puerto, outside of, or without the harbour. Lejos de; asj lejos de ml pais, far from m j country. Mas am de; as, mas acd de la bolsa, on this side of the exchange. Mas alia de; as, mas alia del parque, beyond the park. Adverbs requiring a after them: — Conforme a; as, conforme d las leyes de los Estados Unidos, according to the laws of the United States. Junto d; as, junto a la iglesia, close to the church. Tocante d; as, tocante d las reglas se observard, ^c. concerning the rules, it will be observed.* Adverbial Phrases. A lo hondo, to the bottom. A tiro de bala, at one's breast. A cuestas, on one's back. Mndar d gatas, to go on all fours. — d la coz CO git a, on one foot. d mas no poder, with all speed. d la sordina, slily. d escondidas, by stealth. de puntillas, on tiptoe. * There are, no doubt, more words of this kmd. It is hoped, however, that this collection will be found sufficient for learners, as they are those which are mostly used, and by means of which, the rest may be easily acquired. 184 ETYMOLOGY. »5 scdtos y corcovos, by fits and starts. r.^ Gjos cerradosy headlong. .5 tientas, groping along. .5 tuerto y derecho. ~) , r ^ , J, ... > at random. »^ oulto y sin tino, ) ^^ solas^ in private (conversation.) Caer nieve a grandes copos, to snow in great flaked. De tropel, pellmell. De un golpe, at one stroke. De repente, suddenly. De rodillas, on one's knees. De lance, second hand. De imptroviso, unexpectedly. En derechura, strait. En el ultimo apuro, at bay. En iropel, in a crowd. En un abrir y serrar de ojos, in a twinkling of ail eye. Llover a cantaros, to rain as fast as it can pour. a chorros, in streams. OF PREPOSITIONS. Prepositions show the relation that one word has with another^ as, el fue de Bcdtimore, a Boston, he went from Baltimore to Boston. The following are the prepositions, which the Spanish Academy has deemed such:- — .^5 to. ^«ci«, towards. t6inte, before. Hasta, till. Con, with. Para, for. Contra, against. For, by or for. De, of or from. Segiin, according to* Desde, from. Sin^ without. £!n, in. Sobre, upon. Entre, between. Tras., behind. ETYMOLOGY. 185 ^^ntes de, and despues de, when they are used before a verb in the infinitive, retain the de, but when they are to precede any other mood, then the de, is changed into que; antes de almorzar, before breakfast; antes que almorcemos, before we breakfast. English prepositions^ with their correspondent ones in Spanish. Jihout^ for within, is rendered en; as, he is ahout the church, estd en la iglesia. Jlhout^ for through, por; as, he went dancing ahout town^ el iba bailando por la ciudad. About, for on, sobre; as, a treatise about the Spanish idioms, tratado sobre los idiotismos Espanoles. After, despues de; as, after three o'clock, despues de las tres. After, for according to, a, or segunj as, after the American fashion, a la moda Americana; after his manner of writing, segun su modo de escribir. At, d; at the window, a la ventana; seated at the threshold of the door, sentado al umhral de la puerta; at nine o'clock, a las nueve. At, for in, en; at home, en casa; at Paris j en Paris. Before, as opposite to after, antes de; as, he shall arrive before next week, llegard kutes de la setnana que viene. Before, as opposite to behind, de lante de; as, he worked all the time before his father, el trabaj6 todo el tiempo delante de su padre. By, for in, de; as, by day, de dia; by night, de noche. By, for close to, junto a; as, the Baltimore bank is by my house, el banco de Baltimore estd junto a rrri casa. 16^ 186 ETYMOLOGY. . ■*" For^ para; as, this flower is for her, esta flor es para ella; I bought yesterday, cloth for my son, ayer campre pano para 7ni hijo; it cannot be denied that for a man like him, such an expression was unbe» coming, no se puede 7iegar, que para un hombre como e/, semejante espresion no le estaba Men. Tor^ meaning, for the sake of, por^ as, he died for hi-s country, murio por sii patria. For, in behalf of, por^ as he betted for his brother, et , aposto por su hermano. For, on account of, por; as, he died for our sins, rnurio por nuestros pecados. For, during, por; as, I shall stay here for three weeks? estarS aqui por tres seinayias. For, in the room of, por; as, he came for his father, vino el por su padre. For, in exchange for, por; as, I'll give you my book for your watch, le dare mi libro por su muestra; I shall sell my furniture for twenty dollars, vendere mis muebles por veinte pesos. For, meaning to fetch, por; as, he goes for bread, and I went for wine, el va por pan, y yofui por vina. From, de; as, I come from France, vengo de Francia. From, speaking of distances, is translated by desde; as, there are thirty-six miles/rom Baltimore to Wash- ington, hai treinta y seis millas desde Baltimore a Washington. .fn, after superlatives, is rendered by de; as, the sun is the brightest planet in the universe, es el sol el planeta mas brillante del universo. In, or into, en or por; as, in the Spring, en la prima^ vera; in the evening, por la tarde; put your paper^ into the drawer, pon tus papeles en el cajon* ETYMOLOGY. 187 Into, followed by a verb of motion, to enter excepted, is rendered by a; as, go into the hall, and as you come, enter into the dining room to see whether dinner is on the table, ve a la sala, y cuando viiel- vas entra en el comedor, a ver si la comida estd en la mesa. On, or upon^ sohre; as, on, or upon the table, sohre la 7nesa. On, after the verbs to live, to subsist, ^'c. is rendered by fZe; as, he feeds on bread, se alimenta de pan. On, when found before the days of the week, or of the month, is never translated in Spanish^ as, he ar- rived there on the twelfth of January, and he will come back on Tuesday, the twenty-eighth, el llego alii el doce de Enero, y volverd el martes veinte y ocho. Over, encima de; as, over the door, encima de lapuerta. Through, por; as, I passed through Market-street, pase por la calle del Mercado. Through, denoting the reason why an action was per- formed, is rendered by de; as, they surrendered through hungci, se entregaron de hambre. Till, or until, hasta; he will not set off* for New-York, till nest week, no quiere salir para Nueva-York hasta la semana que viene. To, d; as, I delivered the letter to my father, entregue la carta a mi padre. To, is rendered en, when preceded by from, in phrases like the following: — from door to door, de puerta en puerta; from house to house, de casa en casa. Towards, hdcia; as, towards Madrid, hacia Madrid. Under, debajo de, or bajo; as, under the chair, debajo de la sillaj under the table, bajo la mesa. 188 ETYMOLOGT. Withi con; as, with the knife, con el cuckillo; with mildness, con dulzura. Within^ dentro de; as, he is within the well, el estd dentro delpozo, Without, sin; as, he was walking through the streets without Sihait, se paseabapor las calks sin sombrero. PRthoutf when meaning opposite to within, is translated\ hjfuera de; as, at ten o'clock in the morning, we were without the harbour, a las diez de la mahana estdbamos fuera del puerto. OF CONJUNCTIONS. A Conjunction connects words and sentences together^ as, thou and he are happy because jou are good, tu y pi soisfelices porque sois buenos. The Spanish conjunctions are divided into eight kinds, viz: — conjunctive, disjunctive, conditional, causal, con* tinuative, comparative, adversative, and objective. r2/,*and5 ^ Conjunctive, <. ni, nor^ >-as, yovi d el, j d ella, \ saw r2/,*and5 ^ live, <. ni, nor^ >-as, (. que, that; J him and her; ni reir ni llorar puedo, I can neither laugh nor weep; los hombres dicen que no apetecen, riquezas, men say that they do not long for riches. Disjunctive, 6 1 or, either; as, vendrd el padre 6 el hijo, either the father or the son will come. * When the word following this conjunction y, begins with an i, ®r /li, the conjunction y is changed into e; Escocia e Jrlanda, Scot- land and Ireland; padre e hijo, father and son. t This is changed into, w, when the word that follows it, begins with an o/ as, skU u ocAo, seven or eight. ETYMOLOGY. 189 r si, if; I Conditional < como, as; > si aspiras d C con ted que provided that; J ser docto, estudia, if thou dost aspire to be learned, study. (Smml, ^P"' ?«^' ''««"^«! I as, no fui alU porque Lpues, pues qiie^ %\nct',^ estaba enfermo, I did not go there, because I was sick; pues me lo mandas, lo hare, since thou biddest me, I shall do it. Continuative, ^i^^^*' ^^^^' ^ as, (Zt>o pues ot^e Lpuesto que, since; 3 salio de aquel peligro, I say then that he came out of that danger; puesto que te favorecen, muestrate agradecido, since they faVour you, show yourself thankful. rcomOf as; "j Comparative, < asi, so; Vas,/no coma elyelo, as Last como, as; J cold as ice; asi como lo digo asi lo aprendi, as I say it so I learned it Adversative, \ ^^^*' ■^*^^' ^, ' > as, quisiera ir, mas mi C aunque, ihoM^h; j enfermedad no me lo permite, I should like to go, hut my sickness does not allow me. Dhjective, j^«^'« ^^^^' ^^^^^ «^ ^^ ^^^^^ ^^^^t'? as, se ^o C djin de que, to the end that; 3 escribo, para que lo publique en las gacetas, I write it to you, that you may publish it in the gazettes. Of Simple and^Compound Conjunctions. Simple Conjunctions are those which consist of one word; as, coino^pero; and Compound Conjunctions are 190 ETYMOLOGY. those which are formed of more than one word^ diSjpara que, that^ d Jin de que, to the end that. OF INTERJECTIONS. An interjection is a part of speech, which expresses the passions or emotions of the mind of the person who speaks; as, O hombre! caan mudable eresJ man! how changeable thou art! The words which are to be considered in the Spanish language as interjections, are the following: — ah, ai, ce, ehito, chiton, ca, ete,fu, ha, he, ho, hola, a, pu, ta, tate, ah, 6; expressing grief, joy, indignation, and admiration, thej may be said to correspond with the English hey ! ^h! Oh! ho! hah! Ce, ete, ha, he, hola, are used to call the attention, and consequently correspond with hem, lo, hip, holla, in English: hola, is also used to express wonder, and he, to demand a repetition of something that has been said to us, and which we did not exactly understand; he, sometimes is expressed in English, by the word what! chito, chiton, are similar to hush, mum; ea, serves to encourage; fu, is the same as pshaw! pu, as, foh! ta and tate, are employed to stop; as, halt, hold! PART III. SYNTAX. Syntax, is the proper arrangement of the parts of speech, in order to form correct sentences. A sentence is an assemblage of words, forming a com- plete sense. Syntax consists of two parts. Concord and Govern- ment. Concord is the agreement which one w^ord has with another, in gender, number, case, or person. In Spanish, there are four kinds of concords, viz:— 1st, between the article and noun 5 as, el monte, the mount; las montanas^ the mountains: 2d, between the noun and the adjective; as, soldado valeroso, a valiant soldier; tropas valerosas, valiant troops: 3d, between the antecedent and the relative; as, la carta que yo le escribz, y la cual vmd, no qiiiso recibir, the letter I wrote to you, and which you did not wish to receive: 4th, be- tween the subject and the verb; as, yo escribo, I write; ellos saltan, they leap. Government is that power which one word has over another, in directing its mood, tense, or case; as, te- amare, I shall love thee. Here, amwre is an active transitive verb, governing the pronoun in the objective case. 192 ETYMOLOGY.' The different kinds of words of whicli the Spanish language is composed, being shown and defined, as many rules, notes, and ob- ser ations, as are required to produce a correct agreement, and right arrangement in a sentence, will now be laid down. But as theory alone cannot perfect us in any art or science whatever, it would be impossible that rules alone could enable us to form a correct sentence. Persuad d of this truth, the author has not only illustrated the rules, notes, and observations by a great many examples, but he has also placed under every one of them, a course of practical exercise, which, together with the rules, will, it is hoped, teach at once, both how to speak and write the Spanish language with accuracy and precision. ^n explanation of some marks used in the course of the exercises. This horizontal line, which is to be found un- der some English words, implies that they are spelled in the same manner in Spanish, with this exception, that a soft t, must be changed into c, and that the s is never to be doubled. When a parenthesis ( ) encloses two or more words, the words above or below, are equivalent to the whole enclosure. Words having this mark t underneath, are not to be translated in Spanish. • These figures, 1, 2, 3, &c. which are to be found at the end of English words, show in what order they must be placed in Spanishr SYNTAX. 193 AGREEMENT OF THE ARTICLE * RULE I. The article must agree with the noun in gender^ number and case^ as, "El libro de la iglesia contiene las vidas de todos los santos,^^ the book of the church contains the lives of all the saints. JVbie 1. Of the and to the, when applied to the nouns which in Spanish are masculine singular, are always translated del and al, ivhich are contractions of de el and a el. See page 68. J^ote 2. Feminine nouns beginning with a, or ha, accentedf on the first syllable, take the masculine article when they are in the singular, but never when they are in the plural number; as, "El aguila es la reina de las aves," the eagle is the king of birds. EXERCISES. . The sun is brilliant. The ox ploughed the land. sol es brillante. buei ard tierra.i The sailors§ bent the sails. The bee stung the marinero amarraron vela aheja pico girl. The • nightingale sings delightfully. muchacha, ruisenor cania delidosamente. The writing master made an excellent pen. (maestro de escribir) hizo una escelente pluma. The zephyrs were delightful. The clouds covered the cejiros eran deliciosos. nwnbe ciibriati * See the Etymology of the article in pages 67, 68. t By accented it is here meant, when a stress is laid over the a or ha, whether it bears the orthographical accent or not. I For a perfect knowledge of the gender of nouns, the student is referred to pages 68, 59, &c. particularly to page 59, rule 2. § For the formation of the plural of nouns, we refer the student to pages 64, and 65. 17 194 SYNTAX. the sun, aiid the (lay was enveloped in the darkness ©f sol y dia estaba envuelto obscuridad night. She stood motionless admiring the beau- noche. ella estaba (sin movimiento) admirando henno- ties of the fields. The Spanish language is called the sura campo. Espahola Ungua se llama language of the Gods. He sent the culprit to the king. Dios. el embio reo rei. His virtue raised' him^ to the high station which he now Su virtud levanto le alia situacion que el ahora occupies. (Thej lifted up) their eyes to the heavenly' ocupa. levantdron los ojos celestiales regions. ^ The eagle flew through the liquid air. The region. dguila void por liquido aire. bird sang on the tree. The mistress reprimanded the ave canto en drbol. ama reprehendio servant. The hunger of the besieged made* them^ sur- criado hambre sitiados Mzo les ren- render. dir. USE OF THE ARTICLE. RULE II. Nouns taken in a general sense, or used in their most unlimited acceptation, are always preceded by the ar- ticle^* as, "Z« industria de los Americanos esmuclia^'' *We have, in the course of our instruction, perceived that some persons have been led into great mistakes for the want of a proper knowledge of this rule. To obviate this as much as pos- sible, we shall make the following observations, which, we trust, will render it perfectly intelligible. When we speak of '■'■noun'' Utktn in a general sense,^^ or, "vsed in their most unlimited acceptation,'''' we mean that we speak of the SYNTAX. 195 the industry of the Americans is gi-eat. *'Z« virtud debe ser amada, y el vicio aborrecido^^^ virtue ought to be loved, and vice hated. EXERCISES. Justice is the mistress and queen of virtue. The justicia es senora reina virtud, corruption of the heart is often the corruption corrupcion corazon es amenudo ivhole of an object, or a class of objects, without reference to any of its parts. Thus, for instance, if we say, "the earth is round," we have relation to no particular part of this object; we only say, that as a whole it is round. Did we not refer to the whole planet, it would be impossible to say it was round; for, some parts are square, others angular, &c. Again, if we say, "men are bad," we mean, that men, taken as a body, are bad, because the aggre- gate of their goodness is more than counterbalanced by that of their wickedness. Speaking of the sun as a whole, we say, "the sun is bright;" in the same manner, "the north wind is cold;" "vice is hateful;" "knowledge and wisdom are the support of liberty;" "cloth is used for men's garments;" "wheat in America is abundant;" "it came from heaven," &c. It is necessary to observe, that a whole, is, sometimes, divided into parts, and any one of these parts, may be taken as a whole. We observed, for instance, that in saying, "men are bad," men constituted a whole. Now, we also say, that this ichole^ or any other whole, may be divided into many classes, each constituting a whole. For example, if we say, "good men are rare, but bad men abundant," we divide men into two classes, each of which constitutes a whole. After the same manner, we say, "learned men;" "wise men;" "shrewd men;" "bad land;" "good land," &c. In all these instances, therefore, it is plain, that, according to the above rule, the article must be employed in Spanish. On the other hand, many of the preceding sentences might have been taken in a limited sense. Had we said, "we shall not have sun to-day," we should have had no relation to the whole body of ♦.il 196 SYNTAX. of the mind. Printers make use of moveable = alma impresor se sirven movibles characters.^ Death is a single moment between caracter muerte es un solo momento entre time and eternity. Pride and vanity are often iiempo eternidad orgullo vanidad son amenudo the cause of the misfortunes incident to human^ life. * causa desgracia incidentes humana vida Interest, glory and ambition, are commonly the motives interes gloria son comunmente motivos of the actions of men. The death of the Saviour of hombre muerte Salvador the human* race^ was announced to the world by the humano generofuS anunciada mundo por darkness which covered the face of the earth. obscuridad que cubria faz tierra. the sun, but to that part turned towards us only; and, therefore, the article in Spanish would not hare been employed. In one of the above exercises, we say, "printers make use of moveable characters." The word printers, in this sentence, is taken in a general sense; because all printers are here supposed to constitute a body, and we have reference to the whole of this body; taking, at the same time, for granted, that some of them may use other characters than those which are moveable; in the same manner as when speaking of the earth, we said that some parts of it were angular, &c. But the noun characters is, in this sentence, taken jn a limited sense, and it cannot be used in any other. For, the meaning is, and must be, that printers make use of some of those characters, which constitute the whole. It being obvious, that the whole of the moveable characters in existence are not, nor Ihey cannot, be used at once; and we must, therefore, necessarily have reference to that part of the whole which printers use. SYNTAX. 197 RULE IIL The article is prefixed to names of empires, king- doms, countries, provinces, mountains, rivers, winds, and seasons; but if the empires, kingdoms, countries, or provinces, be preceded bj a preposition, or bear the name of their capitals, the article is not used; for exam- ple, '' La Alemania, j la Inglaterra tienen gran corner- do con Estados Unidos;" Germany and England have great commerce with the United States. ^'El clima de Francia aprueba a muchos;^^ the climate of France agrees with many. J^ote 1. China, Brazil, Japan, Ferrol, Havana, and Coruna: — all those nations considered very remote:— and all personified places, take always the article, whether they be preceded or not by a preposition ; or whether the capitals bear or not the name of the kingdoms, provinces, &,c. as, "Ei vino de la China;" he came from China. 'Los naturales de la Persia son hei-mosos;''^ the natives of Persia are beautiful. ^'Los ojos de la Europa estan sobre mi, dijo Bonaparte a Escniquiz;'''' the eyes of Europe are upon me, said Bonaparte to Escoiquiz. EXERCISES. France and Italy abound in vineyards. The United Francia Italia abundan vina Estados States are as populous as Spain. The world is Unidos son tan populosos como Espaha mundo (estd divided into four* parts; viz: Europe, Asia, Africa, dividido) en parte (a saber) Europa = and America. Tagus, Duero, Ebro, and Guadalquivir, Tajo are the four largest^ rivers* that water Spain. North son may ores rio que riegan Norte *For the cardinal or ordinal numbers, see pages 12, ^Sj &c, 17* 198 SYNTAX. South, East and West are the four principaP points^ of Sud Este Oeste son cardinales punto tlie compass. The trade* winds ^ always blow from agiija generales viento siempre soplan de East to West. America (is bounded on the North by) conjina por el Norte con the Frozen* Ocean % on the West, by the Pacific, on Holado Oceano por con Pacijico por the South, by the Southern, and on the East, by the con meridional por con Atlantic. Winter, Spring Summer, and Autumn Atlantwo Invierno Primavera Verano Otono are the four seasons of the year. The king of Portugal son estacion cmo rei — (set off) for Brazil in the Fall of eighteen hundred* salio para en Otono and seven, and left Rio Janeiro for Europe, in the dejo — para Spring of eighteen hundred and twenty-one. Parnas- primavera de Parna- sus, Pindus, and Helicon, are the favourite* mountains^ so Pindo son predilectos monte of the poets. Dot you* intend* to stay long in poeta t vmd. intentar (estar mucho tiempo) Prussia? England defended Spain against the attacks Prusia Inglaterra defendio contra ataque *In Spanish, we must express the thousand, when the quantity mentioned, exceeds it; as, mil y ciento, eleven hundred; mil seis dentos, sixteen hundred. The number above should, therefore, be translated by mil ocho dentos y siete. t The verb to do, when used to ask a question, or to express d BegatioHj is never translated in Spanish. SYNTAX, 1§9 of France. The eyes of the United^ States^ watched the Francia ojo unidos estados observaban movements of England. The Emperor of Austria movimienfo Inglaterra emperador — - (setoff) from Russia in the spring, and spent the partio de primavera summer in Turkey. Naples is a delightfuP country. ^ verano Turquia Napoles es tin delicioso pais Havana is a very^ unhealthy^ town ^ for foreigners. — es un mux {mal sano) pais para estrangero A great quantity of rum formerly ^ came^ from t gran caniidad ron ayitiguamente venia de Brazil to Baltimore, but now this article (is supplied) pe7'0 ahora este articulo se suple by New England. The best and the handsomest por neuva mejores t (mas hermosos) , silk pocket handkerchiefs (are imported) from (panuelos de faltriquera de seda) se importan de China. RULE IV. The definitive article, or the preposition por, is to be placed before nouns of measure, weight, bulk, and number, when they are preceded by the price; as, ^'Compro la historia de Roma a tres pesos el tomo, or por tomo," he bought the history of Rome at three dol- lars a volume. ^'El azafran se ven.de a diez y seis pesos la libra, or por libra," saffron sells at sixteen dollars a pound. EXERCISES. Good' Madeira^ wine' sells at five dollars a gallon, bueno Madera [vino de){se vended) peso galon 9M - SYNTAX. wheat at (a dollar and fifty cents) a bushel, and ilour t7igo a peso y medio fanega harina at seven dollars a barrel. Superfine' cloth ^ can be barril super jino pano (sepuede bought in Baltimore, at ten dollars a yard, and the comprar) « vai^a best Canton* crape' at fifteen dollars and (thirty- mejor (corespon de) a seven and a half cents*) a piece. He took lessons (on tres reales pieza t tomo leccion de dancing) (at the rate) of ten dollars a week. (Cut me) danza a razon semana corteme three yards of cloth at twenty-five cents a yard, and vara pano vava y * In New Spain, the money is counted by ^iesos, reales^ and medio reales; thus: a peso, dollar, is divided into cuatro pesetas megic anas, four quarters of a dollar; every /jescia into dos reales, two rials; and every rial into dos mcdios, two halves. Copper coin, or lower than a medio, is not known there. The South American coin, is precisely equivalent to the North American, counting in this manner: six and a quarter cents, unmedio; twelve and a half cents, un real; twenty-five cents, una peseta, or dos reales, (the latter is much more used than the former;) fifty cents, or half a dollar, either cuatro reales, or medio peso; fifty-six and a quarter cents, cuatro reales y medio, 8fC In old Spain, although almost every province divides the effective coins into different imaginary ones, yet, in keeping accounts, or in writings, the money which they generally use, is the foil.' wing real coins: pesos, or duros, reales vellon and maravedis, dividing fhena thus: — a duro, dollar, is divided into twenty reu'e^ rcllon, and a 7-eal vellon into thirt\-four maravedis. In conversation, they sometimes, divide the money in the above manner; and some others, into duros, pesetas, cuarins, and orhavos, thus: dwo, dollar, is divided int<» five pe'ictns, five Twenty centH pieces: every peseta, into thirty-four cmrtos, and every cuarto, into two ocfiavoS' SYNTAX. 201 three at fifty. He paid his journeymen sixty dollars t joagd a sus trabajador a month. They have imported seals, and selP them^ ones t han importado sello venden los at thirty dollars a pair. par, RULE V. The article is generally repeated in Spanish before nouns that follow each other in quick succession^ as, •'La fe^ la esparanza y la caridad.^^ faith, hope, and charity. J^ote 1. When todo-a-os-as, all, follows the noun enumerated, and makes an aggregate of them all, the article is generally omitted; as, ^* Franceses, Portugueses, Ingleses, y Africanos, todos son hombres,^^ French, Portuguese, English, and Africans, are all men. EXERCISES. Temperance, modesty, and prudence, are virtues templanza modestia prudencia son virtud essential to the character of an accomplished youth. esencial car deter (joven bien edueado.) Thus fell the Roman* empire', and involved in its asi cayo JRomano imperio envohio sus ruins, the arts and sciences. (No body) (is ignorant of) ruiiia arte ciencia. nadie ignora the prudence, wisdom, and valour of Washington. prudencia, sahiduria valor Women, children, (old men) flocks, huts, houses, miiger nine anciano rebaho cabana casa palaces, (all were swallowed up) by the waves of palacio todo fue smnergido per ola the sea. .^OS SYNTAX. The article is placed before the days of the week, and before numerals, denoting either the day of the month, or the hour of the day; as, ^'El martes^^^ Tues- day. *'El domingo,^^ Sunday. '''•El cvatro de Julio, a las once de la manana,^^ the fourth of July, at eleven o'clock in the morning. '''•Son las dos menos cuarto^'^ it is a quarter before two. '''Son las ciiatro y diez minutos,^^ it is ten minutes after four. J^ote 1. The article is never placed before the dates; and instead of ordinal, we use cardinal numbers, except in the first day of the month; as, ^^M'ahon, 23 de Enero, de 1822," Mahon, 23d January, 1822. ^^Baltimore, !« de Julio de 1824;" Baltimore, -Tuly 1st, 1824. EXERCISES. On the twenty-third of March, (at thirty minutes t Marzo a las tres after three o'clock) in the afternoon, (it will be sold) 2/* treinta minutos de tarde se venderd at auction. On the twenty -eighth of February, the en almoneda. Febrero sun rises in Baltimore, at thirty-four^ minutes^ before* sol sale ' — — menos seven % and (it sets) at thirty -four ^ minutes' after five. * se pone y They entered happily into Barcelona, at about t entrdron felizmente en {d cosa de) half^ after* three ^ in the afternoon. Sunday is a day media y de tarde domingo es un dia * Literally, at the three and thirty minutes. All other sentences of this kind, must be translated in the same manner. SYNTAX. 203 which we (ought to) consecrate to our Lord. He went que t debemos consagrar a nuestro Senor t fue thither on Saturday, and he (will return) on Thursday, alli t Sdbado t volverd t jueves or Friday. Should you come this way next^ viernes. si vmd.pasarepor aqui {que viene) Monday^ or Tuesday^ (call in) to (see me) Dantzic. Tunes mdrtes entre a verme Dandque first September, one thousand, seven hundred and Seiiembre twenty-one. New- York, seventh of December, eighteen Nueva Diciembre hundred and sixteen. (It is with great pleasure that con mucho gusto I reply) to your favours of the first and tenth of contesto a sus apreciada March. Marzo. RULE VII. The article is placed before Senor-a-ito4ta, and be- fore their plurals, when they are used in the third per- son, but never in the second 5 as, ^^El Senor Montejo,^^ Mr. Montejo. ''La Sehora Gimenez dijo;^^ Mrs. Gime- nez said. It is to be observed, that Senor-a-ito-ita^ may be fol- lowed by Don or Dona^ when the baptismal name of the person spoken of, is mentioned j as, "^/ Senor Don Juan Soler,'^ Mr. John Soler. JVbfe 1. Don and Dona, are never preceded by the article; they have no plural; and cannot be used but before baptismal names; asj ''Don Jmn,'' Mr. John. *'Dona Teresa,'^ Mrs. Theresa. "Lte 1. Adjectives which admit to be prefixed to them, those ivho are, take the plural of the indefioite article, agreeing with the noun understood; as, ^^Los ricos,'''' the rich, that is, those who are rich. "Los potentes y los grandes, pocas veces piensan, que su potestad y pod^r, puede perecer^'''' the powerful and the p-eat, seldom think, that their power and greatness, can perish. EXERCISES. Youth has* not^ foresight of the future, experience juventud tiene prevision futuro esperiencia of the past, nor moderation to conduct itself in the pasado ni para conducirse t * See Etymology, pages 61 and 70. J 214 SYNTAX. present. She dearly loved (to talk) of the presente. (le gustaba muchisimo) hahlar marvellous. In some parts of the country, also, maravilloso. algunos parages pais tambien the dead (are carried) to the grave with the singing muerto se llevan a sepidtura con canto of psalms and hymns. The just, and the virtuous salmo e^ himno, jitsto virtuoso (will be rewarded. ) As the idle are useless to se recompensardn. {asi coma) perezoso son inutil society, so the unbelieving are pernicious to men. sociedad {asi tambien) incredido sons perniciosos The dead (shall rise again) on the (day of judgment.) muerto resucitaran t dia deljuicio. What is strong and good, (ought to be) preferred to fuerte bueno se debe preferir what is handsome and bad An upright* mind* hermoso malo un recto entendimiento (will never be at a loss) to discern what is just and nunca dejard de t discemir justo irue. verdadero. OF THE INDEFINITE ENGLISH ARTICLE A S^n equivalent to the Spanish adjective uno-a-os-as. The indefinite article is suppressed in Spanish, in the following instances : Note 1. When a verb is placed between two nouns, one of which denotes the country, dignity, profession, employment, &c. of the other 5 as, "I am a Spaniard," soi Espahol. "The duke is a colonel," el duque es coronel * See the two notes at the bottom of page 188 SYNTAX. ns 2. When nouns are used in apposition; as, "Balti- more, a city of the United States," Baltimore ciudad de los Esfados Unidos. 3. When this article means some, and precedes a singular noun; as, "I had an inclination," i. e. "some inclination of seeing him," tenia gana de verle. "She has a memory," ella tiene memoria, 4. In the title page of a book; as, "A new grammar," grama fica nueva. "A selection of speeches," seleccion de razonamientos. 5. Before the words cie7i or ciento, a hundred; ?m7, a thousand; but never before mil/on, million; as, "Cien cabaUos los emhistieron^^^ they were attacked by a hun- dred horses. "Mil soldados fueron los que tomaron el castillo,^^ it ivas a thousand soldiers that took the castle. ^'Mucho mal, y Men pueden hacer un miiloii de hom- bres,^^ much harm and much good may be done by a million of men. 6. Half, medio-a, is never preceded, nor followed by the article in Spanish; as, "Three dozen and a half," tres docenas y media. "Half a dollar," medio peso, 7. The article is generally omitted in Spanish, before the integer which precedes the half, if it contain but one unit; as, ^'A pound and a half," libra y media. 3. The indefinite is never translated in ejaculations, nor when placed between the substantive and adjective; as, "What a pity!" ;que Idstima! "So fine a day," tan hermoso dia. 9. The phrases, to have, or to make a beginning, to put, or to have an end, to have a care, and the like, lose the indefinite, when they are to be rendered in Spanish; as, "We put an end to the supper before he came." d^'mos fin a la cejia, antes que veniese^ 216 SYNTAX* 10. In all other cases in which the article is used in English, it is also used in Spanish. EXERCISES. [Note 1 .) West, a native of America, was a great natural era gran painter. Vieira, a Spanish^ orator,^ was entirely pint or. — espanol orador era enteramente master of the affections of his audience. Benjamin dueho afectos sus oyentes Franklin, a native of the United^ States,^ was a natural Unidos Estados era consummate^ philosopher,^ and an ardent* lover* of consumado JiUsofo ardiente amante his country. su jmtria, {Note 2. ) Before you is the Po, a river broader [delante de) vosotros esta — rio {mas ancho) and more rapid than the Rhone. Behold Rome, a mas rapido que Rodano. ved Roma city in which the greatest liberty, (as well as) the dudad [en la cual) mayor libertad como tambien greatest tyranny has existed. France, a beautiful mayor tirania ha ecsistido Francia harmoso country in Europe, abounds in (every thing.) pais de Europa abunda en todo, [Note S») All poets have taken an opportunity to {todos los poetas) han tornado ocasion de give long' descriptions^ of the night. I had a mind to dar largas — noche. t tenia gana de ask her if she had an idea of (going out.) He had pedir le si t t^nia — de salir t tenia SYNTAX, 217 at first an objection to say the truth, but at alprincipio reparo en decir venladpero (por last he owned- it. ^ ultimo) t confeso la. {^Note 4.) An introduction to the Greek^ language. ^ ^ griegci lengua. A treatise on Arithmetic. A sketch of the manners tratado de aritmetica. hosquejo costumbres of all nations. A dictionary of the (Spanish and todas diccionario lenguas English languages.) espanola e inglesa. [Note 3. ) Baltimore has near a hundred thousand tlene {cercade) inhabitants. A hundred altars in her temple smoke. habitanfe. cien sit templo huinemt. Four times twenty -five make a hundred. (They say) veces liacen ciento, that a thousand* men ^ perished^ in that que perecieron aquella possesses more than a million of dollars. posee mas de millon [Note 6.) His wife is very short; she su esposa es mui baja t (solamente tiene) three feet and a half high. We travelled eight days pie medio {dealto.) t viajdmos dia and a half. {Note 7.) It is a year and a half since his mother hace ana que su madre died, and left^ him^ a million and a half a year. He murio dejo le cihOf t se dice battle. He batalla. t is only 19 218 -SYNTAX. purchased half a dozen of copies. Do '^^ not sell more compro docena egemplar. t vendamas than half a pound. de libra. {Note ^.) What a day of affliction for that unhap- que aflkcion por aquel desgra- pv father! What a blessing from heaven! W^hat a ciado que bendicion de cielo que man you are ! A famous idea ! What a fine supper hombre vmd. es fariosa que escelente cena I had (last night) on bread and cheese. We never saw t ture a noche de jjan queso. t nunca vimos so brave a captain, such a destructive infantry, or tan valiente capitan tal destructiva infanteria 6 so complete a defeat. At last after having tan completa derrota. (por ultimo) (despues de haberse) beaten each other, they put an end to the quarrel. apaleado) (elunoalotro) i pusieronjin a riha. {Note 9.) (All things) have had a beginning, and todo ha tenido principio they (will have) an end. (And why) do you^ make^ a todo tendrd Jin y porque vmd. hace noise .^ ruido (Note 10.) Calypso saw a rudder and a mast, the vio timon mastil remnants of a vessel (which had just been wrecked.) restos navio que acababa de naufragar A good^ man' never can be miserable, nor a bueno nunca (puede ser) desdichado ni * The verb to do, is never translated in Spanish, when it is used to ask a question, or to express a negation. See the second note at the bottom of page 178. SYNTAX. 219 wicked* man' happj. malo dichoso. his soldiers. sus soldado. A good general is beloved bj buen es amado de USE OF THE NOUN.* RULE XIII. The Spanish language has not the possessive case^ therefore, a king's palace, must be rendered by, el palacio de un rei, the palace of a king; man's nature, by, la naturcdeza del hombre, the nature of man; and in the same manner, must all other sentences of this kind, be translated. JVofe 1. When two nouns come together in English, the first serving as an adjective for the second; their order is reversed in Spanish, and between them, the preposition de, [of,] is placed; as, "El camino de Londres es hermoso;''^ the London road (i. e.) the road of London) is beautiful. '^Las obras de agua de Filadelfia son magnificas;^'' the icater xoorks of Philadelphia are magnificent. vYote 2. The phrases, **A book of my brother's," "A soldier of the king's," &c. are always translated thus: One of the books of my brother, uno de los libros de mi hermano. One of the soldiers of the king, uno de los soldados del rei, &c. M)te 3. In English, sonietimes, by means of the sign, ('s) the words house, palace, store, &c. are understood. In Spanish, they must always be expressed; as, "He went to the physician's;" that is, he went to the house of the physician; fue a casa del medico. "He comes from his sister's;" that is, his sister's residence; viene de la residencia de su hermana. EXERCISES. I have seen the king's apartments, and the queen'r t he visto rei cuarto * See Etymology, page 36. .320 SYNTAX. picture. The chancellor's son's wife, is the prime'' retrato, chanciller hJjo esposa es primer minister's eldest^ sister.^ (There are) many silk- ministro mayor hermana. . hai rauchos seda worms in Italy. Diana's anger was the cause of giiscmos Italia.- colera fue causa Acteon's death, and Helen's beauty, of Troy's — — muerte Helena hermosura Troya destruction. Battles were more bloody before the — - — - Batalla eran mas sangrientas antes de invention of fire arms. Man's sensuaP pleasures^ f'^^go arma. sensuales placer are enemies to* reason and to virtue. In Market son eneinigo de razon virtud. tnercado street, (there is) a sign v/hich says ''Door to Wealth." calle hai tablilla que dice piierfa riqueza. 1 am a friend to diligent^ scholars^ ^ and an enemy to , soi ainigo diligenies discipulos enemigo (those who are idle. ) Sesostris was seated on an ivory las holgazanes. — — — estaba sentado en marjil throne with a golden sceptre in his hand. The second trono oro cetro la mano. chapter treats of the frights he ■ had on the road t© capitulo trata sustos quetitbo en camino de Penafiori and the ninth, of the journey of Scipio to ■ — — viage Sipion Madrid, and his return to Segovia. A soldier of the »__ — — su vuelta soldado king's was shot (for having committed) rei (fue pasado par las annas) por haber hecho * This preposition, when used as above to denote possession, is always translated in Spanish by de. SYNTAX. 221 treason. We walked in the queen's garden, and then traicion, t nospaseamos reina jardin despues went to see a garden of the emperor's. Go to the fztimos a ver etnperador. ve surgeon's. He went into the first notary's. (Going cirujano t fue en primer notario. al out) of the (pastry cook's) I met Fabricius. salir pastelero {me encontre con) Fahricio.. "^He took refuge; at the governor's. se refugio en gobernador. OF THE ADJECTIVE. Adjectives, in the Spanish language, are divided into two classes; the first, is called adjectives of one termination; and the second, adjectives of two terminations. Adjectives of one ter- mination, are those which only change from singular to plural, without any regard to gender. Adjectives of two terminations, are those which change from singular to plural, and from mascu- line to feminine. Adjectives of two terminations are only those derived from nations in general; and those ending in cm, on, o. These alone, therefore, receive some addition, or undergo some change, when ihey relate to a feminine noun. All the rest are adjectives of one termination. Those adjectives which terminate in an, or on, or which are derived from nations in general, take an a to form tlieir feminine gender; as, aragan, a lazy man; aragana, a lazy woman:- -sopZon, a male informer; soplona, a female informer: — f ranees, French, f masculine;) francesa, French (Jeminine.) Adjectives which terminate in o, change this o into a; as, hueno, good (masculine,; biiena, good (feminine;) harmonioso, harmoniosa, harmonious; Americano, Americana, American. It should also be observed, that when articles of commerce are to be qualified by the adjective derived from the nation in which the articles were manufactured or raised — instead of this adjec- tive, the nation itself, with the preposition rfe, [of,] is used. Thus, 19- ^:22 SYNTAX. for instance; instead of saying, "English cloth," in Spanish it is said, Cloth of England, ^-Paho de Inglaterra.'''' Spanish wine. '■'■Vino de Espaho. When the employment of a person is to be qualified by the same kind of adjectives, it may be expressed either as above, or with the adjective, and it may therefore be said, either, ^^ Consul Ruso,''^ or '■^Consul de Rusia,^'' Russian Consul. ^'■Capitan Espanol,'' or, "■Capitan de Espaha,'''' Spanish Captain. It seems that the word rei, king, would form an exception to this rule; for it always is qualified by the preposition de, and the name of the country, but never by the adjective. We may say, "£Z rei de Inglaterra.'''' but never, "eZ rei Ingles,-'' the English king. AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES. Adjectives agree in gender, number, and case, with the substantives to which they belong; as, ^'Uste es el sigh de invenciones estupendas," this is the age of wonderful inventions. ''^Los efectos de los grandes descubrimientos de Colon son incalculabies," the ef- fects of the great discoveries of Columbus, are incalcu- lable. ''•Lihro malo^'' bad book. ^^Obra buena^^^ good work. '^Bien escrito,^^ well written. J^ote 1. Two or more nouns in the singular, require an adjec- tive in the plural. If the nouns vary in gender, the adjective must be in the masculine; as, "Mercurio y Jupiter son planetas magnijicos,'''' Mercury and Jupiter are magnificent planets. ^^La p^'udencia y eljuicio, son necesarios, a todo hombre^^'' prudence and judgment, are necessary to every man. J^'ote 2. An adjective prefixed to two or more singular nouns, agrees with that which immediately follows it. An adjective preceding or following two or more plural nouns, agrees with the one nearest to it; as, "£Z estupendo valor y prudencia de Wash- ington, hicieron mucho hacia la gloriosa emancipacion de los Estados f7mrfcs,"lhe loonderful prudence and judgment of W^ashington, tend- SYNTAX. 223 ed much to the glorious emancipation of the United States. "£/ posee efectos y tierras preciosas," or "E^ posee preciosos cfectos y tierras," he possesses precious effects and lands. J^i^ote 3. An adjective never agrees with a title, but with the person who bears it; as, "Su ulteza estd indispuesto,'''' if applied to a man, and ^HmUspiiesta,^'' if to a woman, his or her highness is in- disposed. ^'■Estd vmd. bueno," are you well, sir, "Estd vmd. bue- na," are you well, madam. J\'ote 4. J^ada, nothing, although^eminine, always requires its adjective in the masculine; as, "Nada es bueno para (to be) consistent with the rules of morality. sean conforme d regla moralidad. [Note 3.) Bad men are as dangerous as hateful* son peligroso aborrecihle Every seed is capable of producing as many fruits cada simiente es capaz prodiicir as the plant by which it (was yielded.) de que t ncicio. (Note 4.) He leaps as a sprightly* kid. ^ salta despejado cabrito. OF SUPERLATIVES. RULE XIX. Superlatives, which in English are made with very, or most^ are formed in Spanish by prefixing mid, to the adjective, or by aftixing to it the termination isimo; as, very clever, mui hdbil, or habilisimo; very easy, mui fdcil, or facilisimo. J^ote 1. If the adjective end in a vowel, it is suppressed, as, corto, short; cortisimo very short; alegre, cheerful; alegrzsimo, very cheerful; triste, sad; tristmmo, very sad; famoso, famous; fame-' nsimo, very famous. SYNTAX. 241 Adjectives which change their final termination before they admit the termination tsimo: CO into qu, as, rico riquisimo. go gUf largo larguisimo. ble bit, afable afabilisirao. z c, feliz feJicisimo. Superlatives in isimo, irregularly formed: bonisimo, Jortishno, novisimo. very good, from very strong, very new. sapienttsimo, very wise, sacratlsimo, very sacred, fidelisimo, very faithful. Irregular superlatives: From bueno, malo, grande, bueno, fuerte, nuevo, sabio, sacro, pequeno, alto, bajo, optimo, pesimo, mdcsimo, mminio, supremo, znfimo, strong. new. wise. sacred. faithful. best. worst. greatest. least. highest. lowest. All these form a superlative in Isimo, according to the rules already given; as, mallsimo, poquisimo, bagisimo, &c. A'ofe 2. The above positives admit also a regular superlative with mui; as, mui grande, very great; mui pequeho, very small. The superlative of mucho, is always muchtsimo. EXERCISES. The Mississippi is a very* large^ river^' it ranks es mui grande t (puede among the most magnificent in the world. The competir con) mas m^agm'fico de soil of the United States is extremely fertile, terreno es estremadamenfe fertil and very suitable for every kind of cultivation. apropiado para toda especie Manadnock, and Ossipee, are very high mountains. son montana 21 '3,i9, SYNTAX. The climate of Maryland, is very agreeable, and its dima — — es agradable su commerce very considerable. Men's passions are very comercio — kombre son strong. America, although young, possesses very^ fuerte - — — ■ — aunque joven posee magnificent^ institutions, ^ Bodily exercise, is very magmjico — — — (el egercicio de cuerpo) es necessary to those who are constantly occupied in d los que estan constantemente ocupado mental pursuits. Reading loud, strengthens the hit electual t area {el leer) alto esfuerza lungs very much, pulmones RULE XX. English superlatives ending in est, or formed by mos^j* are rendered, in Spanish, by prefixing the defi- nite article to the comparative, as, ''''El mas sabio,^' the wisest. "Za mas ingrata^^^ the most ungrateful. JVote 1. Most, when followed by a singular noun, is translated, la mayor parte. If the noun be in the plural, most, may also be translated mas, with the corresponding article; as, most of the navy, la mayor parte de la marina; most of the soldiers, la mayor parte, or los mas, de los soldados; most causes, la mayor parte, or, las mas de las causae. JsTote 2. The preposition in, after the English superlative, is translated de in Spanish; as, the best house mi the street, la mejor casa, de la calk. * It must be observed that this is only effected when the super- lative is used to compare; as, "Of all vices, lying is the worst,'''' de todos los vicios, el peor, or, mas malo es mentir. "Rome was the most splendid city in the world," Roma fue la ciudad mas hermosa del munde. For in saying most excellent sir, it should be translated, escelentisimo senor. He is a most amiable man, es un hombre mui fimaUe, SYNTAX. 24S J^ote S. Substantives, adjectively used, admit the degrees of comparison; as, mas caballero que vuid., he is more of a gentleman ihan you. EXERCISES. Wisdom is the most precious of all gifts. Of all sahiduria es predoso todo don ibe passions, avarice is the most difficult to overcome, — avariciaes dificil de veneer because we find no remedy against it. The reign porque hallamos reniedio contra ella reinado of Louis the Fourteenth, king of France, was the Luzs rei Francia era longest, and one of the most glwious of the French glorioso Frances monarchy. The opinions of the most* enlightened^ monarquia ilustrado understandings,^^ are sometimes errors, and the most entendimiento son prudent actions, pass sometimes for faults. Most of prudenie — pasan d veces yerro the Americans are endowed with bright talents. ^lost son dot ado de briUante talento of AVashington's men, when hostilities began in sol dados cimndo hostilidad empezdron America, were destitute of all (the necessaries) to estahan falto de todo Jo necesario (para irupport the severities of winter, and notwithstanding, aguantar) ris^or invierno sin embargo how nobly (did they fight,) and how patiently man noblemenfe pehdron pacientementc * whenever tiierc is a comparative before the adjective, the iub'tantive n"a1ifipd mu<:t necessarily precede. 244 SYNTAX. (did they bear) every privation. The most popuioub sufriSron todo privacion popidosa city in America, is New-York. Rome produced some produjo of the wisest men in the world. (There are' some men sabio mundo hai alguno who are more childish than children themselves. que son niho mismo OF ADJECTIVES WHICH REqUIRE SOME PREPOSITION. RULE XXI. When an adjective is placed between two substan- tives, and expresses the quality of the second, it is generally followed by de^ [of,] in cases like the follow- ing: ^'Uii muchacho duro de entendimiento,^^ a boy duU of comprehension. '^'Un homhre bajo de cuerpo,'''^ a man loiv in stature, &c. Js^oU 1. Adjectives are also followed by de, [of,] when they ex- press the quality produced by the substantive which they qualify; as, "£fta estd palida de miedo.'''' she is -pale with fear. "£^ estd abochornado de la pregunta,''^ he is hurt at the question. Should the quality be produced by an infinitive, the adjective would also be folloAved by de, [of;] as, '■'Estaban cansados de escribir,^'' they were tired of writing. EXERCISES. If men v/ere humble and meek of heart, (there fuesen ynanso humilde corazon ha- would be) more peace in society. His coat ami, hria pciz sociedad sti casaca vest made^ him* appear long in the body, and short chcdeco hacian le parecer largo cuerpo corto SYNTAX. £45 ill the legs. Nothing less than the patience of Job, pierna nada menos paciencia (is requisite) to teach those who are hard of iinder- es necesario para ensehar a los que son duro enten- standing. Men remain astonished at the wisdom of dimiento (se quedan) admirado sabidurfa others, Avhen they might (possess it. ) If (any person) otro cuando podrian poseerla nadie abuses* you^ with unbecoming words, (do not fall into ahusa le indecente palabra no se encolarice a passion,) but (show yourself) hurt at the expres- vmd. pero muestrese resentido espres- sions. (Few people) are satisfied with theii* condition sion pocos estan satisfecho de su — Men act, not only as if they were afraid of ohran no solamente como t fuesen temeroso being virtuous, but ashamed of (appearing so. ) ser virtuso mas avergonzado parecerlo RULE XXII. Adjectives expressive of number, require the prepo- sition de, [of,] when they precede a noun of dimension. In this case the English verb to be, is translated by tener; as, "*S\< casa tiene, cincuenta pies de alto, 3/ cien- to y viente de largo,^^ his house h fifty feet high, and a hundred and twenty long. J^ote 1. By, is translated rfe, in Spanish, when it is used to ex- press the difference in the measure; as, "Jtfi casa es mas alta que la tuya de doce pies,^'' my house is higher than yours by twelve feet. "«Soi mas alto que tu de seis pulgadas,^^ I am taller than you by sis inches. 21* 9A6 SYNTAX. EXERCISES, London " bridge, is nine hundred feet in length, t'ort\ Londres puente tiene pie de largo in height, and seventy -three in width. Noah built an alto anc/w. Noe hizo un ark of three hundred cubits in length, fifty in breadth. area codo ancho and thirty in height. The famous mine of Potosi, is alto famoso niina tiene more thant five hundred feet in depth. The walls pie profimdidad murulla of Babylon, were two hundred feet high, and fifty Babilonia tenian alto broad. Maryland is longer than Vermont by forty-six ancho — es largo miles, and wider by forty. The son is taller than the milla ancho hijo es alto father by more than six inches. padre pulgada RULE XXIII. Adjectives denoting proximity are followed by c, and those denoting distance by de; as "-Cercano a lamu- er^e," approaching death. ''Distante de su patria,^^ - far /rom his country.:]: * See rule xiii. note 1, page 219. t See rule xvii. note 2, page 236. I There are undoubtedly, many other adjectives preceded by certain prepositions, but as they are generally alike in both lan- guages, the author considers it useless to say anything concerning them. SYNTAX. 247 Mte 1. Adjectives denoting fitness or unfitness, are immediately followed by para; as, "£Z es apto para eZ empleo,^'' he is fit /or the employment. '■^Las mmizanas, por San Juan, empiezan a ser buenas para comer,'''' apples begin to be fit to be eaten by St. John's day. EXERCISES. He feared tliat a monarchy so contiguous to that of temio que monarquia vecina a la Asturias, (would be) a source of many wars. Some- seria manantial times w^e become slaves, wishing to avoid the evils {nos hacemos) esclavo deseando t evitar mal annexed to war. He thought, as he was so far anejo guerra. penso {que como estaba) lejos from Madrid, and close to Bayonne, (he might just as junto Bayona tanto le valdria well) continue his journey to this place. He que prosiguiese el viage hasta esta plaza aquel is fit for a captain, who is fit for a soldier. One es propio t capitan que es t soldado t hundred good men are not enough to repair the son suficiente remediar evil committed by ten bad. The protection of the dano ocasionado por arts and sciences, is indispensable to the prosperity of es . prosperidad a kingdom. The ox is not so adequate as the horse rei7io buei es apto caballo to carry burdens, Uevar carga 2A^ S-YNTAX. OF PRONOUNS. The pronouns in the Spanish language constitute the most dil- ficult, but the most useful and essential part of its grammar. A person well versed in the pronouns and in the verbs, may be said to have acquired two thirds of this language. Convinced of the utility of the pronouns; and of the necessity that they should be intelligibly and systematically arranged; the author has devoted to this object, much of his time and study. And he will ooiisider himself happy, if the advantages resulting from his labours, evince, that they have not been unsuccessful. At the same time that the author will candidly and freely ac- knowledge, that in the composition of this w^ork, he has, in some places, availed himself of the labours of the Spanish Academy, Huerta, Fernandez, Del Pino, McHenry, Josse, and Murray, he has always considered it improper, unjust, and ungrateful, to speak against the writings and systems of others. He is per. fectly convinced that he who has done all he could, is entitled to our applause. And it belongs to the wise critic, and to the pub- lic in general, to expose his errors or his deficiencies, that he may improve by their advice — but not to his rival, who must always speak with some degree of partiality. Without making any reference, therefore, to the plan which other grammarians have followed in the pronouns, the author has endeavoured to form that which, he thought, would be more in- telligible, and more conducive to aid the student in acquiring a theoretical, as well as practical knowledge of the Spanish lan- guage. His guides in the formation of this plan, hare been regularity and perspicuity; and he has, therefore, interspersed many observa- tions between the rules, to illustrate in a clear manner, what must have, otherwise, been obscure. The exercises are, it is presumed, such as will serve, not only to inculcate strongly the rules to which they belong, but even to render them more intel- ligible to the student. In fact the whole has been laid down in a manner, which, the author hopes, will merit the approbation of the public. SYNTAX. M^ OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS. The personal pronouns are:* Fo, I; Tii^ thou; El, he; Ella, she; Ello, it, for the singular: Nosotros-as, we; Vosotros-as, je or you; Ellos-as, they, for the plural. OBSERVATION. The pronoun nosotros, is sometimes expressed by nos. This only happens when a whole body of persons make any declara- tion, or issue any document whatever, in which cases they de- clare who they are; as, -^We, the representatives of the United States," nos, los representayites de los Estados Unidos. " We, the de- legates appointed by the Senate," nos, los delegados noinbrados por el Senado. Vos, was formerly used instead of vosotros. At present, this pronoun is only employed in speaking of the Divinity, and all heavenly beings; and when speaking of persons Avho are placed in very elevated situations; as, ";0 Dios! vos que liichteis los cielos ylatierra, ayudadtne ;''"' O God! you who made the heavens and the earth, help me. "Vos senor sois un buen rei," you, sire, are a good king. ^^Por cuanto vos Don Juan Gimenez habeis egecutado,^^ for as much as you, Don John Gimenez, have executed. Vmd>^ is a pi'onoun of very frequent use in the Spanish lan- guage, and it should, therefore, be well understood. In a note at the bottom of page 86, the nature of this part of speech has been explained. We shall, however, observe, in addition to what has been said, concerning this word; that, like all other personal pronouns, it possesses two objective cases; and it might be de- clined thus: Singular. Plural, Nom. vind., your worship.! vmds., your worships. 1st Obj. le, your worship. les, los, your worships. 2d Obj. d vmd., to your worship, d vmds., to jour worships. The use of these two objective cases, is precisely the same, and applied in the same manner, as the two objective cases of any other pronoun. When any observations will, therefore, be made concerning the first or second objective cases of the pro- nouns, those of vmd. shall also be included. * See pages 76, 77, and 78. t Vmd. or vnuh. is commonly translated by yoi^. '250 SYNTAX. POSITION OF THE NOMINATIVE. RULE XXIV. The subject, or nominative case, precedes the verb,* except in imperative, and interrogative sentences, and when quotations are made; as, ^'Tiino ims," thou shalt not go. *'E1 ha llegado,''^ he has arrived. " Venga ella," let her come. ''S^ct comido vmd. ya?^^ have you dined already.^ ^'I^studia hijo mio, me decia el d mt,^^ study my son, said he to me. * It has been said above, that the nominative precedes the verb; but it must, by no means, be considered an unexception- able rule. That the placing of the nominative before the verb, whether it be a pronoun or a noun, is a rule which has been given by all grammarians who have written on the Spanish language, we must confess; but we must also acknowledge, that it is in our power to prove by the most eminent Spanish writers, both in, prose and verse, that the nominative is much more frequently found after, than before, the verb. This, it appears to us, is a peculiarity of the Spanish language; and it adds, Ave must own, not a little to its majesty. Definite rules to guide the student in the placing of the nomi- native before or after the verb, cannot be given. We shall, how- ever, observe, that in the course of our reading, we have per- ceived that those authors fond of a nervous, sound, or laconic style, place, very often, the nominative before the verb, except in the cases mentioned in the rule given above. And that those remarkable for their eloquent, poetical, majestic, or lively com- positions, almost invariably, place the verb before the nominative. From this, it may, therefore, be concluded, that the student can place the verb before the nominative in his elevated and energetic sentences; and after the nominative, in his common, or sound compositions. This observation we think proper to make, that the student may not be surprised, when reading the Spanish Classics, he will find so many examples absolutely opposite to the 24th rule, (i}f this grammar. SYNTAX. 251 AHe 1. As the verbs themselves are, in Spanish, expressive of the pronouns they are never used except in the three following instances: 1st. To distinguish persons; as, "El y ella no se ai;ienen," he and she do not agree. 2d. To render the diction more sonorous; as, Yo soi el sehor hi Dxo.'''' I am the Lord thy God. 3d. When a pronoun is to precede a relative; as, "El que tanto estndiaba, murio de pesar,'''' he that studied so much, died with anguish. EXERCISES. I do not mistake, when I say to you, that with a t (no tne engaho) cumido digo a vind. que little attention, you y^will make) great progress in {'poco de) atencion t hara progreso your studies. Let them appear before my sus estudio t ellos comparezcan {delante de) mi face, and then (I shall declare)^ (to them)' my cara entonces dedarare les mi intention. May you imitate the virtues of your (ojald que vmd. imite) sics ancestors. Thou shouldst love thy neighbour as antepasado debes amar (a tu) procsiino sincerely as thou lovest thyself. If men sinceramente {te araas) [d ti mismo) fulfil the duties annexed to their situation. {cumplen con) obligacion anejo d su estado they certainly (will be) loved by every body. They cieriamente serdn amado de [todo el mundo) think (they shall be heard) (for their much (piensanque) serdn oidos por lo iniucho que speaking.) If we injure others (we must expect) habkm [injuriamos d) otros debemos esperar retaliation. Either thou or I am greatly mistaken, 6 tu 6 estamos mui enganado in our judgment. She, he, and I (will come) nuestro juicio vendremos 25i2 SYNTAX. to-morrow, to (paj you) a visit. (As soon as) manana a hacerle visita luego que (he had said)* (to them)' I am he, they (went dijo les soi t retro- backward,) and fell to the ground. (I am) the king, cedieron cay iron en t tierra soi rei and you must obey my commands. Thou who vmd. debe obedecerniis mundato que hast suffered death for our salvation, thou who has padecido muerte por nuestra que art always waiting for our change of conduct, esfas siempre esperando t nuestra mudanza conducfa (help us) in subduing our passions. Oh! human ayudanos suhyugar nuestras pasion humano life, exclaimed she, how replete art thou with vida esclamo cuan Reno estas de capricious adventures. Do you^ read,i or sing, said caprichoso aventura t vmd, lee canta dijo Caesar, (on noticing) the irregularity of tone in Cesar al oir irregularidad tone de somebody, who read before him. Those affectionate alguno que leia [delante de) el aquellos carihoso, parents (were overwhelmed with joy) at the filial padres estaban Renos de alegria {al ver) sensibility of their two sons. Never, perhaps, (^shall I sensibilidad sus mmea quizd vere see) so terrible a sight. t vista POSITION OF THE OBJECTIVE CASES. OBSERVATION. The student should bear in mind, that the personal pronouns in the Spanish language contain two objective cases; the full declen- SYNTAX. 25S sioM of which, will be found in Etymology, pages 76, 77, and 78. For, if he do not, he will commit numberless, mistakes, Avhich, d, little attention and study, might have easily prevented. The position of the objective cases is not difficult; it only re- quires that the student be very familiar with the declensions. The objective case is placed, either immediately after, or before the verb; and for its true and correct application, easy and deci- sive rules are given in the following pages. POSITION OF THE 1st OBJECTIVE CASE. RULE xxy. The first objective case is placed before the tenses of the verb, except in the infinitive, imperative, and ge- rund; in which cases it is placed after. In the first instance, the pronoun is separated frocn the verbj and in the second, it is joined to it, forming as it were, one word; as, ^'El le escribio,'^'^ he wrote to him. "Me dicen,^^ thej saj to me. ^'Ellos te escribirian si tu quisieras,^^ they would write to thee, if thou wert will- ing.* '^Fengo por verle,^^ I come to see you. ^'Mi- rdndola, se niuriu,^^ looking at her he died. ^'Venzd- molos^^'' let us conquer them. Kole 1. When a verb governs another in the infinitive, the ob- jective case may be placed, either before the first, or after the second, verb; as, "Te pwdteras asenfa?*," or, '■^Pudieras asentartSy^'* thou mightest sit down. '■'■Voi a hablarle,''^ or "Le vol a hablar" I am going to speak to him. * Sometimes, when the sentence begins by a verb, the pronoun is placed after it, in what tense soever the verb may be. This is accomplished to give more strength and energy to the phrase; as, "Pronunciaronle su sentencia,'''' they pronounced his sentence to him. "jDejarasme ■perecerV wilt thou let me perish? The author again observes, that this construction can only take place, when the phrase or sentence begins by a verb* 22 254 SYNTAX. J^ote 2. When the imperative is followed by nos, or os, it loses its final letter; as, ^^Detengdinonos,^^ and not detengamos-noSf let us stop. "iSmfaos," and not sentad-o^, sit ye down. EXERCISES. War is so great an evil, that nothing ean justify es mal nada puede justificar it, but necessity. Nothing can render us so unhappy, sino necesidad puede hacer infeliz as to envy our neighbour's happiness. (Let us conquer envidiar nuestro procsimo felicidad venzamolos them,) said a General to his soldiers, for (they will dijo sus soldado pues se destroy themselves; if they lose us. God is always han de perder si pierden Dios estd showing us marks of the desire he has of our amend- mostrando senal deseo que tiene nuestra emni- ment, but we do not regard them. (No enda (pero nosotros no hacemos cabal de ellos) man) can feel the pleasures emanating from nadie puede per cibir placer {que emcman) virtue, but by practising it. Incontinence, the mother virtud sino con practicar Incontinencia madre of all vices, exposes us to the greatest dangers, renders vicio espone d mayor peligro hace us miserable, and at last hurries us into destruc- ^ [por ultimo) precipita d ■ — tion. Politeness teaches us to compassionate the urhanidad enseha conipadecernos de weakness of some, to bear patiently the caprices Jlaqueza algi.nos a sufrir {con paciencia) capricho and extravagancies of others, and to lead them all estravagancia otros {hacer que se conven- SYNTAX. 255 to reason, by insinuating means. It delights me. za7i de la razon) agradable medio t deleita and pleases me extremely, to see the daily gitsta estremadamente t ver diario advancement which America makes to perfection. adelantamientos que — — hace hdcia The (ambitious man) is a slave (to himself.) Covet- ambicioso es de si mismo ava- ousness solicits him, gluttony incites him, incon- ruia solicit a gula incita incon- tinence agitates him, but he, although reluc- linencia abrasa pero aimque repug- tantly, obeys the (despotic passion which) controls nante obedece la pasion que despotica domina him. {Note 1.) Death alone could (have been able) muerte solarnente podia kaber (to separate) them, so great was their friendship. separado era su amistad I cannot put you at my right hand, (will God say) {no puedo) poner a mi derecho mano dird Bios to those who might have loved him and (did not do it. ) a los que podian haber amado le no lo hicieron (Note 2.) Accustom yourselves to imitate the actions acostumbrad os d iinitar of the virtuous. (Let us address) ourselves to the virtuoso dirigimos nos President and he (will pardon) us. Dress yourselves presidente perdonard vestid os with rapidity, and (let us wash) ourselves without C071 rapidez y lavemos sin r2D6 SYNTAX. delay. (Let us flatter) ourselves that we can diladon lisongeemos nos que podemos do a thing when it is done. hacer cosa ciiando estd hecho. POSITION OF THE 2nd OBJECTIVE CASE. RULE XXVI. The second objective case is always to be placed after a preposition; as, ''El lo hiza para el," he did it for him. "A etlos los matdron,^^ they killed them. ^'Conjio de vmd." I depend on you. JiOte 1. When, in English, two objective cases occur in a sen- tence, one of which is governed by the preposition to, and the other by a verb, the one governed by the preposition, is, in Spa- Tiish, placed first; as, "He said it to thee,^^* el te lo dijo. "We brought him to ye," os le llevmnos. Should the verb goveri) a reflective pronoun, the pronoun would then be placed first; as, "He declared ^imse// grateful to me," el se me decldro reeonocido. "1 presented myself to him," yo me presents a el. EXERCISES. (It is better) to cultivate any talents we vale mas cultivar cualesquiera talentos [que may have, than to complain of them. Who can tengamos) quejarnos quien podrd hide himself from thee, O Lord! If virtuous and esconderse de Sehor virtuoso learned men, are the best companions, why (should erudite son compahero porque no. we not associate) with them.^ nos asociamos * When the preposition to governs the English objective case, the preposition to, and the case itself, are translated by the first objective in Spanish. See the two next rules. SYNTAX. 257 [Note 1.) Thou (hast conducted thyself) honourably, te has conducido con honor and if thou ask thy liberty, they (will grant) it to thee. pides tu libertad concederdn When I demand something reasonable, they always pidio algo razonable give it to me. Her image presented itself (to them) dan su imdgen presentaha se les, without ceasing. He addressed himself (to thee.) sin cesar dirigio te USE OF THE 1st OBJECTIVE CASE. RULE XXVII. 1st AND 2d PERSONS. When, in English, the verb or preposition to, express- ed or understood, governs the objective case of the first or second person, in Spanish, the first objective case is used, and placed according to rule xxvi., page Q56; as, '^jEUos me habldron,^^ they spoke to me. '^Los dos ladrones te robaron,^^ the two thieves robbed thee. ^'En la nihez mi padre me consolaba, y mi madre me acariciaba,^- in my childhood, my father consoled me, and my mother caressed me. '^DigaXo, que no venga,^^ tell him not to come. 3d PERSON. If the objective case of the third person, be governed, in English, by the verb, it is, in Spanish, translated by, le. los, for the masculine, and, la, las, for the feminine gender. If the objective case be governed by the pre- position to, expressed or understood, it is rendered by le, les, for both genders; as, "Los vimos,^^ we saw Mem, (masculine.) *'Las encontrdmos,^'' \NQ.m.Qithem, (femj- 258 SYNTAX. nine.) ^'Ite prendieron,^^ they took him, ^'JjSl edu- cdron mui bien,^^ thej educated her very well. "Le dijo,^^ he said to her, "Le dijo,^"^^ he said to him. **Les hablaron,^^ they spoke to them, (masculine.) *'Les habldron,^^ they spoke to them, (feminine.) EXERCISES. (Every thing) we possess, we have it from God — todo lo que poseemos redhimos lo de Dios this should induce us to love him. We may play esto debe inducir a amar podemos jugar to give us pleasure, but not to give us pain. paradar gusto pero dar pena After the battle, they conducted me to the field, (despiies de) batcdla condugeron a campo (that I might see) the effects of war. The enemy, para que viese ffecto enamige said he, will pursue us, (will overtake) us, dijo (seguird el alcance) alcanzard and (we shall be) their^ victims,* (if we do not seremos (de el) victijna si no hacem,os face) them. Moses with his rod touched caixi le Moises con su vara toco the water of the river and changed it into blood. agiia rio convirtio en sangre How is it possible that a man can pass a day, without como es t posible que puedepasar dia sin thinking on his Creator, without giving him thanks, pensar en su criador sin dar gracia without worshipping him? Generosity unites many sin adorar generosidad une '* By the context of the sentence, it can be easily gathered Avhether the pronoun relates to a masculine or feminine person. SYNTAX. 259 virtues, and gives them a heroical energy. The wicked virtud da heroico energia malo majji some-* times,* receive^ favours ^^ but they often pueden alguna vez recihir pero amenudo are the means by which the Almighty tries son medio s (por los cucdes) Todo poderoso prueba them, convicts them, and punishes them. Those who sentenda castiga los que have committed any bad actions, endeavour to forget han cometido {se esfuerzan) a olvidar them in vainj because their consciences always put en vano por que su conciencia siemprepone them before their minds. Men call nature* (delante de) su alma llaman naturaleza unjust,^ because she has not granted them what they injusto ha concedido lo que desire. desean. USE OF THE 2d OBJECTIVE CASE. RULE XXVIII. After a preposition, the second objective case is uni- versally used;* ''Viene por mi," he comes for me. '' Contra ellos no hai poder,'^^ there is no power against them. '*Sm ti, 7iada seriamos,^^ without thee, we would not be any thing. J^ote 1. The second objective case is also placed after compa- ratives; as, "Le esthnan mas que a ellos," they love him, better than thenu ^'■Jl el le creen mas que a mi," they believe him, better than me. * Except in those cases in which the preposition to governs, in English, the objective case. See rule xxvii., page 257. ^260 SYNTAX. ^^"016 2. When the second objective cases wi?, ti, si, are preceded by the preposition con, Avith; they take go; forming all three par- ticles, a single word; as, ''■Vinieron ellos conmigo," they came unth me. '■'■ Marchdron consigo," they went away i!)Uh him. EXERCISES. If we subdued our passions, instead of (being subyugdsemos nuestras {en lugar de) dejar- carried away) by them, (we would be) happier. Who nos llevar de seriamos feliz qiden can go against the dictates of heaven? who can puede ir contra dictador cielo qidenpuede deride them? As for me, I believe all that [hurlarse de^ . {en cuanto a) creo {todo lo que) tends to make a man good. tiende a hacer el [Note 1.) Although they have more talents than aiinque tmgan talentos we 5 notwithstanding, we (have been) (much more) sin embargo tenemos mejor successful than they. They know not so much as we. ecsito saben He is more learned than she: but she is much more es erudito es polite than he. urbano {Note 2.) Some persons speak to themselves w^hen persona hablan con si they are alone. Let not the wicked keep estcm solo, {no permitas que) malo tengan correspondence with thee, for they always try to trato con H pues procuran t blind us. cegar SYNTAX. £61 OBSERVATION ON THE TWO OBJECTIVE CASES. From the be2:inriing of the rules on the pronouns we have been very careful to inculcate on the student's mind, that, in Spanish, two objective cases exist. The rules which precede this observation, will, we indulge a hope, be found sufficient to prevent his ever being at a loss to know how to place, use, or apply them with precision in a sen- tence. It becomes now our duty to observe, that to render the dic- tion more perspicuous and energetic, both the objective eases are often used in Spanish. The second objective case can never be preceded by the pre- position a, unless it be accompanied by the first. It would, therefore, be very improper to say a ml quieren, they like me; a el aman, they love him; a ti dechnos, we say to thee; and, to ren- der these sentences correct, it would be absolutely necessary to add the first objective case; as, a mi me quieren, they like me; d el LE aman, they love him; a ti te decimos, we say to thee.* As the first objective case is always expressive of the second with the preposition a; it is impossible to use them both, unless the second be preceded by this preposition. Should Ave say el le digeron, it would, not only be ungrammatical, but it could not be understood; and the only reason would be, because the preposi- tion a was not placed before the pronoun el; and say "a el le digey'on,''^ they said to him. It is also to be observed, that one of these two objective cases, cannot be placed, indiscriminately, either before or after the other, but that the second, is always guided by the position of the first. The first objective case, as it has been observed in Syntax, rule XXV, page 253, is always placed before the verb in all its tenses, * It sometimes occurs, that the verb being understood, the first objective case is not used; thus, for instance, "a mi me quieren^ y a.ii 110,''' they like me and not thee. It is very plain that in the second member of this sentence, the words te quieren, after the negative no, are understood. In this sentence, "Le han condena- do a morir, pero lanaturaleza a ellos," they have condemned him to die, but nature them; the Avords les ha condenado after naturaleza. 3 re also understood, 262, SYNTAX. except the infinitive, imperative, and gerund, in which three cases it is universally placed after. When the first objective, is placed before the verb, the second, must be either before the first, or after the verb, in this manner: "A el le asadndron,''^ or, Le asasindron a el, they assassinated him." "A mi me llevdron al canipo,'''' or ^^.Rl campo me llevdron, a pi," they carried me to the country, "A nosotros nos dan bar- haraa leyes,''^ or '^Bdrbaras leyesnos dan a nosotros," they give us bar- barous laws. "A ti te ecsamindron &ien," or ^^Bien te ecsamindron si ti," they examined thee well. "El se ama a si," or "A si se ama e/," he loves himself.* It frequently happens that a sentence begins by the preposition a governing a substantive in the objective case, and then an addi- tional pronoun in the same case, is almost always placed before the verb. Father Isla, speaking of the manner in which king Alphonsus rewarded three French princes, v/ho had seconded him in his military enterprises, says: "M conde de Tolosa le toco Dona Elvi- ra,'''' &c., to the count of Tolosa Donna Elvira was given. The same author, in another place, says: ^'Era Jtlfonso, d quien des- pues se LE did el nombre de bravo, un principe niarcial, intrepido.'''' &c. Alphonsus, to whom loas afterwards given the name of brave, was a martial, intrepid king, &c. Many instances of this kind might easily be produced, from the Spanish classics. When the first objective case is placed after the verb, the second must follow the first, and it cannot be placed in any other part of the sentence; thus, '■'■Mirdndole se cayo,'''' looking at him, he fell down. "Dile a ella, que venga,'''' tell her to come. '■^Decirme a mi esto, es locura,'''' it is folly to say this to me. The student must not suppose, that the additional objective case in the preceding examples, has had any tendency to render them more grammati- cally correct. The only advantage which results from this man- ner of construction, is, as we have before observed, that as the objectives refer, more expressively, to their nominatives, the sen- tence seems to acquire new force and energy. *If the nominative be expressed in Spanish, it always will be better to place the second objective case after the verb; as, "£//« me dice a mi;" is much better than to say, Ella a mi me dice, she tells me. SYNTAX. 263 EXERCISES. Although she did not respect him, as much as he re- Aunque t respetaba res- spected her, they still lived happilj. They said to petaba {sin eTnbargo) vivian felizmente digeron him that a general (had been killed. ) (No body) said she fue miierto nadie dijo to him can deny that Julius Caesar was a great man, puede negar que Jidio Cesar fue that the Romans owed to him much of their glory. que Romano debian mucho su gloria Him we must defend, said a soldier, speaking of his (a el) debemos defender dijo soldado hablando su king. It seems to us that we always have time rei t parece que siempre tetiemos tieinpo enough to become good. Thee, O Lord, (shall bastante para hacernos biieno {a ti) t Sehor I praise.) From^ France they tell* me, ^ that all alabare de Francia dicen que todo remains tranquil. (They robbed') iiis father^ of queda tranquilo robdron [a su padre) t all he had. They give Milton the epithet of (todo lo que) tenia dan d renombre divine. They distinguished Lope de Vega Carpio from divino distinguieron d de the other poets, by calling him the prodigy of nature. demas poeta con llamar prodigio naturaleza OBSERVATION OX Se. The pledge which was made in Etymology, page 73, concern- ing an explanation of the reciprocal pronoun se, will now be re- deemed. A good knowledi^e of this part of speech, is, according to our opinion, so useful and necessary, that a want of it, might 264 ^ SYNTAX. seriously retard the progress of the student. It is for this reason, that we have given to this subject a few separate remarks The reciprocal pronoun se, has, in the Spanish language, three distinct meanings, and it is, therefore, employed, for three dif- ferent purposes. ( 1. ) The first tense in which we find this pronoun used, is, to denote itself, himself, herself, themselves and each other. In this meaning, it is always employed to conjugate the third person sin- gular, and the third person plural, of all the tenses of a reflec- tive verb,* for example: "Se mostro,^'' it showed itself '■'■Por su urbcmidad, se hizo querer de todos sus conocidos,'''' by his politeness, he made himself beloved by all his acquaintances. '■'■Ella se mostro resuelta,''^ she showed herself resolute. '■'■Ellos se entretuvieron, they amused themselves. ^'■Ellasnunca se amardn,''^ they will never love themselves, or each other. ( 2. ) The second use of this pronoun, is in the conjugation of the third person singular, and the third person plural, of all the tenses of a passive verb. Instead,. therefore, of using the auxi- liary to be, and the participle of the verb agreeing with its nomi- native; the pronoun se, and the proper tense itself, are employed for the same purpose It is when this part of speech is used in this tense, that it offers many difficulties, if it be not well understood. The student is apt to translate, on all occasions, because it can be done in a few, se by himself, herself, themselves, or itself. This erroneous impres- sion, which is very common, makes him translate "El castillo se asalto,''^ by, the castle assaulted itself, which is an absolute impos- sibility. And, unless he translate it by the verb to be, and the participle, thus: the castle was assaulted, the true meaning cannot be apparent. This sentence "Se T)i6 a Alfonso el nombre de sabio,''^ ■would perplex any person, accustomed to translate se by the re- flective pronouns; when, the moment he translates "se" by the verb to be, as it should be rendered, he immediately perceives the true meaning, which is: To Alphonsus was given the name of wise. This pronoun, therefore, used in this sense, before the tense of €1 verb corresponds exactly to the same tense conjugated passive- *See Etymology, pages 119, 120, and 1,21. SYNTAX. 265 ly; that is, with the verb to be, and the participle of the verb. Thus for instance, "La citidad se* quemo,'''' the city was burnt; is the same as, la ciudad fue quemada. '^La gramdtica se estudia para aprender un idioma 6ie?i," grammar is learned to acquire a Ian guage well; is the same as, la gramdtica es estudiada, para apren- der nn idioma Men. "Se da [or es dado] castigo dlos delincuentes,'''' punishment is inflicted on the guilty. ^'■Js^'o siempre se observan [or son observadas,] todas las buenas leyes,'''' all 'good laws are not always observed. "No se hubiera esparcido [or, hubiera sido espar- cida,] la noticia, si se hubiesen tornado [or, hubiesen sido tomadas,} buenas medidas,'''' the news itwiild not hare been spread, if opportune measures had been taken. "Se dice; [seldom or ever, es dicho,] que ha llegado,'''' it is said that he has arrived. (3. ) The third and last sense in which we find this pronoun se used, is, to denote to it, to him, to her, to you,j or to them; whenever this preposition and pronoun are preceded by another pronoun in the third person. For example, "Thou boughtst a book, and sentst it to him,'''' conipraste un libro y se le mandaste. "I brought it to ihem,^'' se lo trage. "They said it to her,'''' se lo digeron. "The com- mittee addressed it to you,'''' la junta se lo dirigio. If the pronoun se alone, were not deemed sufficient to express the particular pronoun in the degree of energy and perspicuity desired, recourse would then be had to the use of the two objective cases, thus; "comp'asfe un libro y se le mandaste a el;" "se lo trage 5 ellos;" "se lo digeron a ella;" 'Ha junta se lo dirigio a vmd." N. B. Se,l is a first objective case, and as such, its position in the sentence is according to rule xxv. page 253. Examples: "£Z se encolerizo,-'' he grew angry. ^^LevdntcsE vmd,'''' rise (you.) "La villa se void,'''' the town was blown up. " VuelesE la villa," let the town be blown up. "El se lo dio,''"' he gave it to him. "DandosELO," giving it to him. * This manner of conjugating the third person singular or plu- ral of a passive verb, is much more used than the other. t Meaning, your icorship, or vmd; see page 86, and observation, page 249. I It must be observed that this word is also a part of the verb to be, and to know; for example: "Fo se," I know. "Se tu,^^ be thou. In these cases it is generally accented. 23 ■266 ^YlsTAX, EXERCISES. (1.) Men often injure themselves for the want of amenudo injurian se por falta prudence. Although man can govern himself, he prudencia aunqiie homere puede gohernar se seldom does it. Kings often ruin themselves, bj rara vez hace lo {muchas veces) ruinan se t endeavouring to usurp (too much) power. She loves prociirando t usurpar demasiado poder ama herself better than she (does others.) They can^ never ^ mas t d otros podran nunca like each other, their animosity is too inveterate. querer su animosidades demasiado inveter ado By his own exertions Bonaparte placed himself to the por sus propio esfuerzos levant 6 highest post of a nation. mayor puesto ( 2. ) (Young men) are often mistaken, when they Los jovenes (muchos veces) engahan believe (to be) their friends those who profess it. If creen que son sus amigo los que profesan lo books, were more studied than read, (there would be) I'lbro estudiasen (seleen) habria more knowledge among men. If men were not ''carried conocimiento enfre si llevasen away,) by the impulse of their imagination | many^ por impidso su perplexities, vexations and disappointments would be disgustos vejacion frustracion 'spared.^ Of all modern nations, England has been kept aliorrarian moderno Inglaterra guardado SYNTAX. 267 in a state of tranquility, prosperity and magnificence, estado tranquilidad prosperidad magnificencia the longest. Man* (without any reason^) is dejected: {jpor mas tiempo) sin razon abate without any reason he is elated. (el hombre) eleva ( 3. ) When you were (in need;) the government cuando esiaba menesteroso gobierno granted him a pension, and he immediately transferred concedio imediatamenie transfiric it to you,* could (there be) a greater act of generosity: pudo haber. rasgo generosidad When God demands our heart how can we pide nuestro carazon como podemos refuse it to himr If the privileges (had been) granted negar privilegio fiieron concedidos to you; why did they not also* grant* them to d porque t tambien concedieron them.^t The king gave him the command of his armies. dio mando siis egercito but he gave it to him for a very short time? Reading pero did por poeo tiempo leyendn it to her she shed tears. derramo Idgrima OBSERVATION OX U AXD lo. U will now be observed, that in Etymology, page 7S, lo is the tirst objective case of the neuter pronoun Ello; and in page 7'7, that le is the first objective, of the personal pronoun El. Not- withstanding the wide difference which must necessarily exist *The student should bear in mind .that se is the 1st objective case of vmd, as well as of el. See page 249, parapraph com- mencing by vmd. fThe repetition of a ellos^ independently of the se would be ne- •cessary in tJiis place. See the second paragraph of ( 3. ) page 2Qb. .'268 SYNTAX. between these two pronouns; the greatest part of authors in the Spanish language, have indiscriminately used these two parts of ■speech. The authority, indeed, of a Cervantes, a Granada, an Ma, or an OlavideSy would, most undoubtedly, sanction the pro- miscuous use of le or lo, were it not that the members of the Spanish Academy, are most strenuously opposed to this gram- matical transgression. In their grammar. Etymology, page 64, they observe: Y* respecto de los autores que le han usado, [lo, por le] como Granada, Cervantes y otros, se ha de deeir, 6 que hai falta de correcion en las impresiones de sus obras, o que fueron poco ecsactos en cl nso de estas terminaciones, 6 que por cuidar alguna vez con demasla del nUmero armonioso de la oracion, sacrificdron las reglas de la gramdti- ca, a la delicadeza del oido. This warning, however, has not had the •'effect which the Academy anticipated. For, among the generali- ty of Spanish writers, the number of those who have taken advan- tage of it, is very inconsiderable. The author of this grammar, nevertheless, concurs, in this respect, with their opinion, and he would advise the student to adhere to it. He has, for some time, thought differently, but after a very elaborate research, and ma- nure reflection, he is inclined to believe that the Academicians are perfectly correct. Lo, will, therefore, be used only in reference to a noun to which we cannot ascribe either the masculine or feminine gender; for '^.xample : " Yo he comprado un libro y te le mandare manana.'''' ^^JSTo, ivrometame que tu me le traerds hoi.''' ".Si, te lo prometo,'*'' I have bought a book, and I shall send it to thee to-morrow. No, prb- rnise me that thou wilt bring ii to me to-day. Yes, I promise it fo thee. It will be observed, that in the two first sentences le is ased, because the noun to which this pronoun refers, belongs to 'he masculine gender. But in the last sentence lo is employed, ■ And with regard to those authors who have used it; [meaning ihe pronoun lo, instead of Ze,] such as Granada, Cervantes, and others, it must be observed, that the editions of their works have not been corrected with a sufficient degree of accuracy; or that they wanted precision in the use of these pronouns, or that they sometimes paid too much attention to the harmony of the sen- tence, and thereby sacrificed the rules of grammar to the deli- cacy of the ear. SYNTAX. 269 this pronoun referring not to the book, but to the action of bring- ing it to-day; to which, it is plain, no gender can be ascribed. Again, if I say, "I saw it," meaning an army, or any other mas- culine substantive, it must be translated, Yo le vt. But if in saying "I saw it," it is not my intention to mean this or that par- ticular object, but a whole transaction, or event, &c.-, then it would become necessary to say *'Yo lo ■ui." And thus it must be in all other similar cases. EXERCISES. The armies were, on the twentieth of March, com- ej^an Marzo en- pletely routed: who said it to you?* Nobody, teramente derrotado qiiien dijo nadie P witnessed^ it myself, ^t Nothing can (be compared) with vi mismo. nada puede compararse con the excellent advice of ''love thy enemies;" notwith- escelente consejo de ama a tus enemigo sin em- standing (few men) do it. An envious man (may bargo pocos hacen envidioso puede be persuaded) that another person has merit, but estar persuadido que otro persona tiene merito pero he (will very seldom) (acknowledge) it. Our vanity rara vez confesard nuestra vanidad renders us insupportable 5 and although we know it; hace insuportable aunque sabemos we seldom endeavour (to suppress) it. The Athenians rara vez procuramos suprimir Ateniense understand what is good, but the X«acedemonians entienden lo que es pero Lacedemonio * This to you, is translated by se; see the second and third pa- ragraphs, in page 265. t A reciprocal pronoun is always placed, in Spanish, iramedi- atelj after the nominative. 23* 270 SYNTAX. practise it. He never wept for his troubles, 5e- practican nunca llora sus trahajo cause he considered it beneath him. I saw the army j)orque considera [indigno de) vi preparing itself^ I saw it rushing on the enemy, preparar se vi balancearse hdcia enemigo but after having seen all, I could* scarcely^ (pero despues de haberlo* visto) todo pude apSnas believe^ it. rreer POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.t OBSERVATION. These pronouns are used to show, distinguish, and qualify, the possession, or property, of persons or things. As these parts of grammar participate both of the nature of adjectives and pro- nouns, they have been called by the late English grammarians, possessive adjective pronouns. The author is, by no means, averse to this term; on the contrary, he thinks it the most proper and correct. But he deems it necessary to make this observation, to remove all possible confusion, when these parts of speech will in some cases, be called possessive pronouns, and, in some others-, possessive adjectives. AGREEMENT AND USE OF POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. RULE XXIX. The possessive pronouns agree in gender, numbei*' and case, with the substantive to which they relate; * Whenever all refers to a whole occurrence, or concatenation of circumstances, lo must also be used. i The possessive pronouns are: nm-a, my or mine; tuyo-a, thy or thine; — suyo-a, its, his, hers, their, or theirs; — nuestro-a, our, ouYSx~vv.esfro-a, your, or yourg. See page 78. 8YNTAX. 2ri and, in general, they are placed before it,* as, nuestra casa^ our house, \\\Q?>iYQ jardin, your garden, vuestros padres^ your parents^ sii* madre^ your mother. J^ote 1. Mio, tuyo, suyo, lose, when they precede the noun, their last syllable. For example: ''Mi padre (and not mio^adre,) no llegard hoi,'''' my father will not arrive to-day. "Mis tios (and not mios tios,) han salido,'''' my uncles have gone out. "Tu conduda (and not fwya,} es ;)itra," i% conduct is perfect. "Tus miras son grandes,'''' thy views are great. "Su amor propio le ciega, y sus pasiones le arrastran,^'' his self-love blinds him, and his passions bias him. Mio, [my, or mine,] is, in addresses, always placed after the noun to which it refers; as, ^'0 padre mio," O my father. ^'Her- 7;iano mio sebuen muchacho,'''' my brother, be a good boy. J^ote 2. When the possessive pronouns are equivalent to the possessive case of the English adjective pronouns, mine, thine, his, hers, its, ours, yours, theirs, they are preceded by the definite article,! and agree with the noun which they represent; as, "Tu hermcma y la mia son mid modestas,''^ thy sister and mine are very modest. ";ular to plural, and from masculine to feminine; as, cuyo, cut/ft. :uyos, cuyas. AGREEMENT AND RELATION OF RELA- TIVES. RULE XXX. Quien^^ relates to persons only, and agrees witl ihem. Cual and qiie^ refer to persons and things, and agree ^vith them. Cuyo, relates also to persons and to things; but i< agrees with the noyn which immediately follows it. EXAMPLES. "El papa es quien lo dicey ^ the pope is he who says it. '^El general a quien vmd. teme,^'^ the general whom you fear. '^El soldado que vino y por el cual mande d parte,^^ the soldier who came, and by ivhom I sent the despatch. '^La nacion cuyo gobierno es sabio, e^ feliz^l^ the nation whose government is wise, is happy : **Las calles cuyas casas son hennosas, son agradables,^' the streets, whose, or the houses ofivhich are handsome, are agreeable. EXERCISES. It is he who made man, and v.lio (will reward) him. t es hizo recompensard and we are the sinners whom he calls, and for whom he somos pecador llama por suffered. Self love is the first that exists, and sufrio {amor propio) es primer o que ecsiste *\Vhen quien is governed by a verb, it is always preceded by c; as, "£^ hombre a quien vimos,'''' the man lohom we saw. ^^Los so^^ dados a quienes conquistamos.''' the soldier? whom we conquered. 280 SYNTAX. the last that dies, in the heart of man. The- ultimo que muere corazon man that fears God, and that fears only him, is que teme a Dios que teme solo a truly free. Nero caused the^ christians (to be verdaderamente libre Neron hizo cristiano accused of^j setting Rome on fire^ acusar a {de haber incendiado a) Roma t t which* (he ordered to be done*) himself. ' The God hizo hacer el mismo of armies whose cause we defend, (will protect) us. egercito causa defendemos profegerd Socrates was instructed in eloquence by a woman whose — fue instruido elocuencia por name was Aspasia. The Magi and Chaldeans, the nombre era Mageo Caldeo chief of whom was Zoroaster, t employed their studies cabo era empledron estudio iipon magic and astrology. Minos, whose wisdon? a mdgica astrologia sabiduria and laws had been so much revered, obtained the lei han sido reverenciado obtuvo appellation of the favorite of the gods. renombre favorito USE OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUNS. RULE XXXI. fVIio, having in English its antecedent, is, in Spa- nish, generally translated que; and whom, in almost all * When which does not refer to a certain word, but to a whole •sentence, or circumstance, it is translated in Spanish by lo cual. t When 0/ ivhom, or of tvhich, is used in English in place of whose; that preposition and pronoun cannot, in Spanish, be trans- lated by any other than cayo-a, os-as- SYNTAX. 281 dases a quien; as, "x\ master who teaches well, is be- loved by his students," el maestro que ensena hien es amado de sus discipuJos, "The gentleman to tvhom you introduced me is very polite," el caballero a quien V7nd. me introdujo, es mui urbano. Mote 1. When ichoin, is not preceded by a preposition, it may be translated que; as, "£^ homhre que vimos,''^ the man whom we saw. JS'oie 2. That^ or ii^hlch, is translated que. That which or what; la que; as, "The conversation that we heard," la conversacion que oimos. '■^That ichich,''^ or to/wf "is proper in one, is improper in another," lo que es propio en uno, es impropio en otro. J^ote 3. When lohat^ has reference to no word; but is used as a substantive, meaning ichat thing, it is always translated que; as for instance, "I know not what [what thing] to do," no se que hacer, '■^JVhat, did he doV ;que ftizo?" EXERCISES. The most unfortunate of men, is a king who believes degraciado es cree that his happiness consists in making other s^ consiste en hacer (a otros) miserable. Apollo killed the Cyclops, who had forged ^^polo mats a Ciclope habianforjado^ the (thunder-bolts) of Jupiter. One ought to think and rayo {una debe) t pensar observe (a long time,) (before he) chooses the friend observar muchotiempo antes de elegir amigo to whom he intends to give his confidence. It is a intenta t dar su conjianza t e* difficult,^ but meritorious tiling^ to love those by dificil pero meritorio cosa t amar a aquellos por whom -we have been wronged. It is necessary that hemos sido injuriado t es necesario 24* ::8:i SYNTAX. (we should take care) to whom and of whom we speak, tengamos cuidado hablamos to be circumspect. The king whom we serve is para ser circunspecto. servimos es generous, and he will reward us, if we deserve it. generoso recotipensard merecemos What some like, others dislike. We should (« algunos gusia a otros disgusta) debetnos always do that which our heart tells us is slempre hacer nuestro carazon dice (que right. Wlien a man (looks at) the state of estd bien hecho) cuando observa estado things, he knows not* what (to say.) He who does not'' cosa sabe decir . el que t know what (to do) in his youth, less (will he sabe hacer su juventud menos sabni know) it, in his (old age.) su vegez RULE XXXII. Cual may generally be used after que or qiiieti have been employed; as, *'Za casa que vmd. construyo 1/ la cual yo compre, ha caido»^^ the house which you built, and which I bought, has fallen. ^'Las miugeres a quienes vmd. via, y a las cuales die mi recado, estan aqui^'' the women whom you saw, and to whom you delivered my message, are here now. Cual may, gene- rally, be employed when more than one relative is used in reference to a substantive or sentence 5 and when any preposition except to, precedes the noun. EXERCISES. The God to whom we pray, and whom we worship^ Dios rogamos adoramos * See page 118, of verbs, used interrogatively or negatively. SYNTAX. 283 (will give) us eternal glory. The anxieties, labours, dard eierno gloria ansia trahajo and perplexities which we undergo, and which some- confusion sufrimos algunas times we cannot avoid, teach us the necessity veces {no podemos) evitar (hacen ver) necesidad of virtue and judgment. Cervantes, Lope de Vega, virtud jidcio • — Calderon de la Barca, and Francisco de Quevedo, are S071 authors whom I read incessantly, wliom I cannot alitor leo incesantamcnte (no piiedo) sufficiently admire, and of whom Spain (should be siificientemente admirar Espana dehe vana- proud) The many precipices which are before gloriarse precipicio estdn {delante de) us, and into which we (so frequently) fall, are so en tantas veces son otras many admonitions for our good conduct. The time tanias) conduta w^hich . we take (in forming) plans for our fu- pasamos formando plan para fu- ture conduct^ or which we employ in the sad condiicta empleamos triste recollection of past events, is, generally, time inemoria pasado caso es generalmente tiempo lost. per dido RULE XXXIII. The relative, must, in Spanish, be always expressed^ although, it is, in English, sometimes implied: for ex- ample ; "'La carta que vmd. escri^fo," the letter [tvhicli] you wrote. "Z(?5 eventos que hemes visto en este sigld^ 284 SYNTAX. son increiblcs,^^ the events, [whic/i] we have seen in this age, are incredible. Mte 1. A preposition, is, ia Spanish, always placed before the relative pronoun, which it governs: for instance; if we translated literally "the man I spoke to," it would not be under- stood. It would be necessary to include the relative, and place the pronoun before it; thus, "The man to whom I spoke," el hom- bre a quien yo kahle. Tlie house I live in; "the house in ivhich I live," la casa en que mro. The persons I am with; — "The per- sons with xvhoml am"— /as personas con quienes estoi. EXERCISES. Method and regularity in the things we cDmmit m$todo regidaridad cosa aprendenws to memory, are necessary, (in order to make them take) de memoria son necesario para que tomen more effectual possession of the mind and eficiente — eyitendimiento abide there long. Those lessons we {queden imprimidas en el mucho tiempo) las leccion learn by experience, (although dearly bought,) are aprendemos esperiencia aimque caras son the best. The advice a person asks, is to receive consejo persona pide es para recibir approbation. aprobacion {Note 1.) Moses was the instrument God Moises era instrumento (made use of) to deliver the Israelites. If the wiles se sirvio para librar a Israelita estratagema a general has recourse to, be successful, they = tiene recurso (tienen buen acierto) SYNTAX. 285- (are considered*) mighty efforts of human genius. se consideran grande esfuerzo humano ingenio The temptations we daily fall into, (ought to) tentadon diariamente caemos en deben convince us of the dangers the world we live £onvencer peligro mimdo vivimos in, is surrounded with. estd redeado de RULE XXXIV. When, in English, a personal pronoun in the third person is before the relative li^ho, or that; the personal pronoun, is, in Spanish, rendered by the corresponding article, and the relative by que; thus: He who, El que. She that. La que. They or those who, Los or las que. EXAMPLES. •■^El que es agradable de natural^ tiene unhuen don,'"' he who is agreeable by nature, has a good gift. "La que pasa su tiempo en el estudio, es mas util, que las que le pasan en ninerzas,^^ she ivho spends her time in study, is more useful than those who spend it in trifles. EXERCISES. Those who complain of the pains they suffer, [se quejan) trabajo sufren torget those they have occasioned. They [se olvidan de) los han Dcasionado wlio till the fields, says Olivia, are not the slaves cultivan campo dice son esclavo of us who dwell in the cities, but our parents, since habitamos ciudad sino padre (pues que) ■^Seepage 264, note (2.) r286 SYNTAX. the J support us. He who does not know what (to muntienen t sabea que apply himself to) during his youth, (will not know) aplicarse durante su juventud no sabrd what (to do) in his (old age.) Those who praise us. hacer su vegez cdaban wish our favour; those who correct us, our good. desean favor corrigen Men He who is always occupied, has^ always^ time. esta siempre ocupado tiene tiempo She who has beauty, should also endeavour (to tiene hermosura debe tambien procurar a te- have) knowledge. They that (know themselves,) ner conocimiento se conocen have more knowledge, than two thirds of tienen conocimiento (terceras partes) mankind. (genero hicmano.) INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS.* By interrogative pronouns, it is understood, the rela- tive pronouns, when used to ask a question. RULE XXXV. In questions, ivho, is invariably translated by quien; which, by cual^ — and what, by que. J^ote 1. Cuyo, [whose,] in asking a question, is very frequently rendered by de quien [of whom;] as, "(jDe quien [cuyo] es este fradoV' whose is this lawn? "^-De quien [cnyas] son aquellas iellas manzanasV' whose are those fine apples. J^ote 2. If a preposition govern the interrogative pronoun, the answer must be preceded by the same preposition: as, "dDe que mundV* "de calentura,^^ of what did she die? a fever. "^-Contra quien 'pdearonV' "contra Pedro,'''' against whom did they fight? Peter. * See page 79. »YNTAX. 287 EXERCISES. Who is that man that (would not relieve) the poor es aquel no socorreria pobre (being able to do it. ) Which of the commandments pudiendo mandamiento (have we not sinned) against.* Who is man, but no hemos pecado contra es sino an image of God, placed on this world by him iindgeti Dios puesto este mundo (that he might worship him) and afterwards enjoy para que le ado rase despues gozase the blessings of heaven. felicidad cielo {Note J . ) Whose fault (will it be) if a man (is to culpa sera ha de be deprived of seeing) the face of God in the next estar privado de ver cara otro world .^ If Adam and Eve were the parents of Mam Evafueron padre mankind, whose sons are we? Oh beautiful and [genero himiano) lujo — hermoso charming meadows, whose thousand kinds of encantador prado mil especie vegetables refresh the air, whose silver streams refrescan aire plateado arroyo glide through the vales ! under whose {d paso lento van por medio de) valle bajo protection (are ye?) ' estais {Note 2.) Whom are we continually offending? estamos continuamente ofendiendo * The student must always be careful to place the preposition before the relative which it governs. See page 284; rule xxxiii- note 1. 288 SYNTAX. God. Whom did* the Israelites murmur against? t Israelita murmuraban contra Moses. What was the law written on? two tables. Moises estaba lei escrito en tdbla DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS, t OBSERVATION. Demonstrative pronouns, demonstrate or show some person or thing. In the Spanish language they are, For the masculine: este, this; ese, that; aquel, that. For the feminine: esta^ this; esa^ that; aquella, that. For the plural: masculine, estos; esos; aquellos. feminine, estas; esas;^ aquellas. The demonstrative pronoun, like the article, has the neuter gender. It refers, precisely, to the same kind of words or sen- tences as the neuter pronoun lo — see observation, p. 267, 268, 269. The neuter demonstrative pronouns are: esto, this; eso, that; fiquello, that. AGREEMENT AND USE OF DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. RULE XXXVI. The demonstrative pronouns, like adjectives, agree with the noun which thej demonstrate, show, or point out, in gender, number and ca«e. Este^-aX &c. may be translated by this and ese-a, &c. aquel-la^ &c. by that; as, "Fo admiro muchisimo esta obra^^^ I admire this work very much. "Dame ese libra que esta en la mesa,^^ give me that book, which lies on the table. "Dale aquella cartera,^^ give him that let- ter-case. * See page 179. t See pages 79, 80. I Wken the demonstrative este, and ese, precede the adjective otro, [other] the adjective and pronoun art both joined, and form a single word: as, este, estotro; esta^ estotra; ese, esotro; estos,estotros,kc. 8YNTAX. 289 EXERCISES. This is a most useful* exercise to lead boys into a util egercicio infundir a ninos t complete and thorough knowledge of what they are completo perfecto coyiocimiento estan doing. Are these, thoughts, Telemachus ! worthy haciendo son pensamiento Telemaco digno of the son of Ulysses? (There is) a very great inequality! hijo hai desigualdad among men as to their internal endowments, enfre (en cuant a) interior prenda and their external conditions in this life. Those evils esterior vida mat of which thou complainest, are caused by those pleasures quejas son causado placer to which (tliou didst give thyself up.) That is to what te entregaste I never sliall consent. Tliat is a property which most:|: consentire propiedad men have or which they may attain. That poverty tiene?! pueden obtener pobreza of thine, and those misfortunes of his, proceeded from dasgracia procedieron ihe same cause. inismo causa "^Most, now, is not used to compare; it must, therefore, be translated by mid, or adding the termination isimo, to the adjec- tive 'ltd. See rule xs., and its reference, page 242, reference *. t See note 3, page 223. I See how most is translated in cases like the above, page 242, uote 1. 25 ;.29() SYNTAX. OBSERVATION. As that, cannot be indiscriminately translated by est, or aqueL it is necessary to state, that este, denotes proximity; ese, moderate distance; and agiteZ, remoteness: as, este libra, this book (here): ese libro, that book (there); aquel libra, that book (yonder.) When these pronouns relate to time, este denotes time present; ese time past; and aquel time still further removed from the pre- sent: as, "JSsfe hombre que ves, ese hombre que has vista hoi, y aqueJ hombre que vimos las semana pasada, son paritntes mios,'''' this man whom you see, that man whom you have seen to-day, and the ane whom you saw last week, are relations of mine. RULE XXXYII. AVhen, in English, the personal pronouns he, she, they or those, being in the nominative or objective case, pre- cede a relative pronoun governed bj a verb* or prepo- sition, the personal pronouns are, in Spanish, rendered by the corresponding demonstratives; and the English relative, invariably, by quien; Examples; ''He ivhom we worship, is eternal," aquel a quien adoramos es- eterno. ''They'''' [or those] "of whom we spoke, have arrived," aquellos de quienes habldmos han llegado. "She whom you taught dancing, is her cousin," aquella a quien V7nd. enseho a bailar, es su hermana. ''He im- mediately banished those against whom, any complaint was made;" el al momento desterraba at aquellos con- * Whenever the English relative is governed by a verb, the personal pronoun may also be translated by the corresponding article. When this takes place, que is used instead of quien; as, "iie lohom we worship," may be rendered by "Aquel a quien adoramos,'''' or El que adoramos. "The tyrant punishes those whom he fears," by "£Z tirano castiga a aquellos a quienes teme," or El tirano castiga a las que teme. f The proposition d, must always be placed before the article, or the demonstrative, when the English personal pronoun, for which they have been translated, is governed by a verb. SYNTAX. £91. tra qiiienes se hacia la menor que] a. "1 am endeavour- ing to find out Imn by whom we were robbed," procuro encontrar a aquel por quien fuimos robados. "The tyrant is, at all times, ready to punish those whom he fears," el tircmo en todos tiempos estd pronto para cas~ tigar a aquellos a quienes teme. ""We are only suspi- cious of him in lohoin nobody reposes any confidence;" solo sospechamos a aquel en quien nadie pone confianza. cVofe 1. When the English pronouns, /le, s/ie, f/iey, or t/wse, are In the objective case, governed by a verb or a preposition, and precede a relative pronoun* in the nominative case; they may, m Spanish, be either translated by the corresponding indefinite article, or demonstrative pronoun: for instance: -'We ought to reward him ivho labours for our country," debemos recomjyensar al que [or a aquel que,} trahaja por la patria. "We must love them '.cho hate us," debemos amar a los que [or a aquellos que,] nos abor- recen. "Say to those [feminine] %cho have spread this rumour, that it is false," Ji a las que [or a aquellas que,] han esparcido ete rumor que es falsa. "We inform those who wish to attend the lectures, &c." a los que [or a aquellos que,] desean atender las lecturas se lesf hace seber, <^*c. EXERCISES. He whom (every body) fears, must fear (every body.) todos temen debe temer a todos Those whom adversity has not tested, have seen the adversidad ha probado han visfo world but on one side. Those with whom (no body) mundo solo de un^ lado nadie * In this case, the relative pronoun must always be rendered by que. t For a perfect knowledge of this manner of construction, the student is referred to .observation, page 261, and particularly to the third and fourth paragraphs of page 262. ^29£ SYNTAX. of good character associates, have some deficienc\ cardcter (tiene trato) tiene alguna falta or vice. She whom (every body) admires, must pos- vicio nadie admira debe po- sess something more than exterior excellencies. They seer algo esterior escelenria by whom we have been visited this morning, are very hemos sido visitado manana son accomplished gentlemen. He against whom they had pulido caballero contra tenian so many prejudices, has (proved to be) a man of preocupacion ha tnostrado son integrity: and those on whom they placed unbounded Men en pusieron ilimitada confidence, have been traitors. We like^ better^ conjianza han sido traidor deseamos (mas Men) (to see) those on whom we confer benefits, than those ver a conferhnos favor from whom vv^e receive them. de recibimos (Note 1.) Men like those who like men. quieren quieren a (Suavity of manners) towards those whom we un modo suave hacia consider our inferiors, is the only manner consideramos es unico medio of drawing the distinction. It too frequently hacer distincion [sucede con demasiadu happens that those who wallow in pleasures, frecuencia) (se ensenegan) placer forget them who cannot supply their absolute ■se olvidan de [no pueden) suplir absoluta SYNTAX. 293 necessities. (Should we not call) an enemy to* tlie menester no llamariamos de republic, him who (should violate) the laws? (Should republica violas e lei no we not call) a friend to humanity him who (should llamaricmios amigo hv.manidad se sympathize with) the sufferings of men. and relieve compadeciese de trabajo socorriese their necessities? Politeness, (independently of) miseria urbanidad ademcts de (its pleasing) (every body,) renders him- who practises gustar a todos hace practlcQ it, (pleased with himself J) estar satisfecho en si RULE XXXVIII. The latter is generally translated este, and the former ese, or aquel in the corresponding gender and number: as, "Virtue and vice produce different effects; the for- mer, makes men happy, the latter, makes them misera- ble," la virtud y el vicio, producen efectos dlferentes; esa or aquella, hace felices a los hombres, este los hace desdichados. Jfote 1. When that^ being followed by of or which, refers to a noun already mentioned, it is rendered by the Sparash article in the corresponding number and gender; as, "In his house and in that of the earl," en su casa y en la del conde. "I extracted it from this book, and that which I bought," lo estrone de este libro y del que compre. J^ote 2. That is, when used in the sense of namely, is translated esto es, as, '-He made us alight at an inn, which is at the entrance of the village, that is, a little out of it," hlzoi.os apear enun mesont que esid a la tnirada del lu%ar, eslo es, un pocofuera de el, * See page 220, reference *, £94 SYNTAX. EXERCISES. As was bis life, so was his death, he edified, a?^ como file vida asi fue miierte edijico much in the latter, as he had edified in the former. habia edijicado The Greek and Latin languages are both very elegant. griego latin idioma son elegante but the former surpasses the latter in richness, and jjero sob resale d riqueza copiousness. Sophocles and ^^schylus were great copiosidad Sofodes EsquUes eran grandes tragic poets, the latter was distinguished by a rich trdgico poeta era distinguido rico fancy, and the former by a profound judgment. fantasia pro/undo juicio {iVote 1.) The object of elegance is to please; that oh get elegancia es t agradar of eloquence is to persuade. This palace, and that etociiencia es t persuadir palacio which I showed you,* are the king's. t ensene son {Note 2. ) The first thing which I did was to leave hice fue t dejav the mule at discretion, that is, (to go) at the pace fiiida d quefuese d paso she liked. Man always ought to have in view {que quisiera.) debe t iener en mira *See vmd., page 249. t See how the possessive case is translated in Spanish: rule xiii., page 219, SYNTAX. 295 he is an accountable being, that is, he must die and es responsable ser debe morir answer for his actions in the day of judgment. (respond er por) t dia del juicio INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. The indefinite pronouns are: imoi-os; alguien; al- guno^-os; ncidie; ninguno\-os; rtmcho\-os; algo', nada; todoi-os; ambos;! entrambos;^ varios;\ cada; tal-es; otro\-os; qidnquiera; ciudquiera; ciicdesqidera. The manner in which the above pronouns are con- strued in English, will be shown in the following rules: (1.) One^ is rendered by uno; as, "One does not know what to think," no sabe uno que pensar. (2. ) Somebody^ some one, any body, any one, are ren- dered by alginen or by alguno, in the singular^ as, •'Has any body said it.^ ^lo ha dicho alguien.'^ ''Some one may have said it," sd^uno picede haberle dicho, J^ote 1. When any body or any one means any body whatever, we translate it in the same manner as xihoever. J^ote 2. Some one or any one being followed by of, must never De translated alguien, but alguno; as, "Alguno de ellos,^^ some one of them. (3.) Nobody, no man, no one, not any body, not any one, is construed nadie, or ningimo in the singular; as, "He fears nobody, ^^ a nadie feme. "I see no one,^^ a ninguno veo. (4.) Something, any thing, is algo; as, "Hast thou any thing to say to me?" ^tienes algo que decirmeP "I had something to tell thee," tenia algo que contarte, t When these pronouns refer to a feminine noun, they change, like adjectives, their terminations into a, or as. In the arrangement of the indefinite pronouns, we have follow- ed Mr. McHenry. 296 SYNTAX. Kote 1. In their plural, they must be literally translated; aS; "^^ algunas eosas que me digustdron,''^ I saw some things which dis- gusted me. (5.) Nothing, 7iot any thing, is translated na-tte' rite tenses. As, however, their distinction is, in some instances, so nice, that it even perplexes persons well versed in the gram- matical construction of various languages, we have considered it necessary to make the following observations; which, we hope, Aviil render these two tenses no longer a matter of difficulty. The Imperfect, denotes an action which was progressively going on at a certain period, of which the present time makes a part; leaving the mind in doubt, whether the action is still going on, or whether it was finally completed before the present time. For example; if we say, "he had no prospect to enter into the world;" we leave the mind at a loss to know whether he afterwards had, or had not prospect; or if he did, or did not enter into the world. This sentence should, therefore, be rendered by the Imperfect, thus: ' 'ningun prospecto tema. el de entrar en el mundo.''^ Ag^in, if we say, "he entertained his friends in a manner suitable to his situ- ation," we only convey the idea, that he lo as in the Aaiif of enter- taining his friends, &c. at a certain time, of which the present makes a part, without saying whether he continued this conduct or whether he put an end to it; and should, therefore, be trans- lated by the imperfect; as, "hospedaba, a sus aminos de un modo que sue sUuacionpedia. 31-52 SYNTAX. The Perfect Indefinite or Preterite, on the other hand, denotes an action which was begun and comph;tely finished, before the present moment; therefore, this present moment, makes no part of the time in which the action was commeuced, continued, or finished. If we, then say, *'//ie Romans vanquished,'''' the meaning which we convey in these expressions, is, that the act of van- quishing was begun, and it remained entirely finished, at some period before the present time; it must, thtrefore, be rendered in Spanish by the Preterite, thus: '■Hos Romanos conquistaron." In this same mauner, the following examples; "After this he lifted up his head;" ''At this time the sound of music proclaimed the hour of repast;" "The old man went away sufficiently discontent- ed;" should be translated by the Preterite. For, the '■'■lifted up,''* ^'procl aimed,'''' and "■went away,'''' express actions performed, with- out leaving the mind in any state of doubt, whether they were, or were not, continued; since they have been completely finished at a certain period before the present time. It is necessary to observe, that, in many instances, the render- ing of a sentence by the Imperfect, or Preterite, depends entirely on the meaning we wish to convey; thus, for instance, if one said, "The valley supplied its inhabitants;" meaning that the val- ley was, at a certain period, continually supplying its inhabitants, and that, for aught we know, it still continues to supply them; thus leaving the mind in a state of uncertainty, whether the sup- ply was continued or discontinued, or whether it is now termi- nated or not, he ought to translate it by the Imperfect; as, '■'■El valle suplia a sus hahitantes''^ But if in saying "The valley supplied its inhabitants," is meant to convey the idea, that the valley sup- plied them at one time, but now on account of the occurrence of some 'circumstances, it does not supply them any longer, the sen- tence must necessarily be rendered by the Preterite; as, "£i valle suplio a sus habitantes.''^ In this latter case, however, the sentence seems to be imperfect, and very often the expression, "6Mt now it is not so,^^ or any other equivalent, is supplied In this same manner the sentences, "He loved her;" "The sides of the mountains were covered with trees;" "The banks of the brooks , Avere diversified with floAvers;" "Every h]ast shook spices from the rocks; and every month dropped fruits upon the ground," can be translated by the Imperfect or Preterite. But we may always SYNTAX. 3 IS take for granted, that if no other words follow mis kind of sen- tences, expressing, in a positive manner, that the circumstances expressed in them, no longer exist, they must be rendered by the Imperfect. The Imperfect is, sometimes, very strongly marked m English. This is, Avhen the action is expressed by the verb to he and the present participle; thus, "He was going to Rome;" "He was form- ing a conspiracy against his country." In which cases, it is abun- dantly plain, that whether the action oi going or cons'piring is con- tinued, or was terminated, is totally unknown. It is, therefore', an unexceptionable rule, that when in English the action is ex- pressed in the above manner, it must always be translated in Spanish, by the Imperfect. When an action takes place whilst another was going on, the Preterite must also be used, for this reason, that this subsequent action is commenced, and concluded at once; for example, "Fo escrihia cuando llego,'''' I was writing when he arrived. It is clear that as soon as he arrived the action of arriving was ended. EXERCISES. Whilst the authors of all these evils were mimtras que alitor todo inal esta (gazing on) this menacing meteor which blackened mirando amenazante iiieteoro obscurecer all their horizon, it suddenl}^ burst, and horizonie {de repente) reveniar (poured down) (the whole of; its contents upon t!ie echar todo contenido en plains of the Carnatic. That great orator whom* ilanuras Carndtico orador you so muclit admired, preached yesterday the most admirar predicar ayer pathetic semionj I ever heard. The woods, says patetico — ^— jamas oir decir * See rule xxxi. page 280. t See note 1. page 236. \ See page 243, note * 2r 514 SYNTAX, Galatea, were before my companions. What wat ser antes companera ser it but the desire of glory that induced Csesar to pass t sino deseo gloria inducir Cesar apasar the Rubicon^ When we ' arrived at that place, we cuando llegar en lugar thought (we had been transported to) a terrestrial creer habiamos sido transportados a terrenal paradise. We were surrounded on all sides by paraiso estar circundado (de todos lados) por lofty mountains. Our attention was attracted by the alto montaha atendon estar atraer most exquisite scenery^ the birds in melancholy esqiiisito selvas ave inelancdlico harmony, sang the departure of the dayj and we harmonia cantar retirada dia full of delight and pleasure, insensibly lleno deleite placer insensiblemente (fell asleep)* at the^ sweet murmur of the river dormirse dulce murmuro rio which (glided at) our feet. pasar por PERFECT DEFiNITE. RULE XLII. This tense is used to denote an action which has been performed, or continued, during a certain space of time of which the present makes a partj as, "Yo he acabado mis ocupaciones por hoi,'''' I have finished my occupa- tions for to-day. "Za he querido desde que la i;i," I have liked her ever since I saw her. "Hemos visto muchas rnaravillas en este siglo,^^ we have seen many wonders in this age. * When an infinitive will be found under an enclosure, the infini- tive must be put in the tense above, or contained in the enclosure. .SYNTAX» 315 CYote L This tense must be used to express the former actions oi individuals now living, if no particular time be mentioned; as, 'Ha escrito varios obras escelentes,''^ he has ^yritten various excel- tent Avorks. If we said that it was in his youth he wrote these works, the chain which links the time when the works were writ- ten, with the present period, would be cut oft', and therefore the Preterite should be used; as, "Escribio v arias obras escelentes, n sii mocedad,'''' he lorote various excellent works in his youth. This is the principal distinction between the Preterite and Per- fect Definite. Both denote an action that has taken place; but the action expressed by the latter must necessarily be connected with the present time. The Preterite, however, may be used ou all occasions, provided there be a certainty that the action i* terminated. We may, therefore, say, "Ze vi, or le he visto hoi,"' I saw, or have seen, him to-day. "Le hable, or he hablado esto semana,''^ I spoke, or have spoken, with him this v/cek. '-Le vi. and not le he visto hace un mimito,'''' I saw him a minute ago. J>J*ote 2. The English Perfect Definite, is sometimes translated in Spanish, by the Present Indicative; thus, "It has been raining- for these two hours," it is two hours that (since) it rains, hace dos haras que llueve, o estd lloviendo. "I have been in London for these two years," it is two years that (since) I am in London. hace dos ahos que estoi en Londres. If the sentence be negative, the Perfect Indefinite is then used in Spanish; as, "Hace cualro ahof que no le he visto,^^ I have not seen him for the last four years. If the action be entirely terminated, we use the Preterite; asj *^hace dos anos que su j^adre murio,'''' his father has been dead these two years. EXERCISES. We have petitioned— we have remonstrated — we haber peticionar representar have supplicated — we have prostrated ourselves suplicar prostarse before tlie throne, and have implored its interposition. delante dc trono implorar Our petitions have been slighted^ our remon- — ^ — - ser menospreciar repre- 3l(x SYNTAX. strances have produced additional violence and sentadon producir mas violencia insult, and v/e have been spurned from the foot of insidto ser echar pie the throne* Philosophers have made great disco- fiUsdfo haber hacer descubri- veries in the present age. God has imprinted in the mientos presente siglo estmnpar heart of man the love of liberty. corazon amor libertad (Note 1.) We have escaped many dangers through escapar peligro en life. He has done (a great deal of) good. I have vida hacer mucho bien travelled (very much) this year. viajar muchisimo ano {Note % ) (It is) now four years since he has hace cuatro que been with the army. He has been in the United estar con egercito hacer States for these five years. He has been gone for ana marchar the last ten months. They have not come to see meS VENIR d VER aie for three days, dia PLUPERFECT. RULE XLIII. This tense denotes an action which was concluded before another took place; that is, prior to some other lime specified in the sentence; as, "Ya habia leido d ^ See page 188, notes * and f. SYNTAX. 317 iibro cuando le compre,^'' I had already read the book when I bought it. "Habia acabado tni carta antes que el llego^'^^ I had finished my letter, before he arrived. J^oU 1 . The Pluperfect is translated by the Imperfect when- ever the first action is described as still going on at the time when the second took place; as, habla dos horas que yo estaba escriUendo cuando llego mi padre, I had been writing two hours when my father arrived: in which example, the verb being in the Imperfect tense, denotes that I Avas actually employed in writing at the time of my father's arrival. Mjte 2. It will be observed, that the Pluperfect is either the compound with the Imperfect or with the Preterite. The com- pound with the Preterite or as it may be called, Preterfect, is never used, but after the %vords despues que, after; asi que, as soon as; luego que, immediately after; cuando, when; no bien, no sooner than, &c. Examples: "cuando las hube oido a, todos, me marche,^^ when I had heard them all, I went away; '*«o bien lo hube dicho, cuando todo el pueblo esclamo;" &c. I had no sooner said it^ than all exclaimed, &c. EXERCISES, The clouds had almost disappeared when it 7nibe liaber cuasl desaparecer cuando t began to rain. The sun had' already^ risen, ^ and EMPEZAR Hover sol haber levantarse the birds had' already^ saluted^ a new day, ave haber saludar el mievo when we departed. He had been ill before. cuando partir. estar malo antes {Note 1.) I had been waiting an hour, when the haber esperar messenger arrived. We had then been there mensagero llegar hacer entonces estar six days. (Note 2.) (No sooner) had he appeared, when every apenas parecer 318 SYNTAX. one (knelt down.) When I had heard them all, iriv arrodiltarse huher oir (a todos) mind was more confused. As soon as silence etendimiento estar confuso silencio had been'^ restored, he began his speech. haber ser resiituir comenzar harengu FUTURE IMPERFECT. RULE XLIV. This future denotes an action which is yet to take place; as, ''•El sol saldra man ana,^^ the sun will rise to-morrow. ^'Corneremos a las tres,^^ we shall dine at three. EXERCISES. They will be there in time. What terms shall estar alii a tiempo palabra we find which (have not been) already exhausted? encontrar no se hay an ya usar Shall we resort to entreaty and humble supplication r SERviRSE de ruego humilde Shall we try argument.^ Besides we shall not PRO BAR argumento (ademas de eso) fight our battles alone. pelear hatalla solos FUTURE PERFECT. RULE XLY. This tense represents an action that is yet to take place, but will have taken place before or at the time >vhen another shall take place j as, '^Habre comido d hi una,p I shall have dined at one o'clock. "Yo h ^ See note (2.) page 264. SYNTAX. 319~ habre escrito antes de ese dla,^^ I shall ha\e written to him before that day. ^'bte 1. This English future, is, in some instances, rendered by the present tense in Spanish, when the completion of the first action, &c. seems to take place at the very point of time which is mentioned in the sentence; as, to-morrow I shall have lived in London two years, mahana hard dos aho:^ que yo vivo en Londres: that is the completion of my two years actual residence in Lon- don, will take place to-morrow; el aho que viene hard ciiico ahos que estan casados, nest year they icill have been married five years. J^ute 2. The Spaniards employ sometimes the future imperfect instead of the present, and the future perfect instead of the perfect definite, when they affirm something, either as present or past, of which they are not quite certain; as, ahora vendra de cenar, donde. el, y el que le guia, se habran emborrachado, he comes now (per- haps) from supping, where he, and the one that conducts him, have (probably) got drunk. Had the person who made the asser- tion been quite certain, he would have expressed himself thus; ahora viene de cenar donde el y el que le guia se han emborrachado. J^ote 3. The same construction takes place in asking a ques- tion, when the mind is, as it were, persuaded that the interroga- tory is almost unnecessary. Thus; Gil Bias, conceiving his situ- ation to be one of the most unhappy, puts the question with the future instead of the present; as, ;0 Cielo! esclame! ; habra siftta- cion mas infeliz que la mia? Oh Heaven! I exclaimed, is fAere a condition more wretched than mine? EXERCISES. Even when I shall have studied as much as he, I (tun estudiar shall not know so much. Shall we have finished, SABER haber acabar before he arrives.^ Shall we not have seen him. {antes que) llegue ver when he goes.^ {se vaya) 320 SYNTAX. {Note 1.) They shall have been married three years ser casar anos to-morrow. Next week we shall have lived manana (la semana que viene) vivir together six months^ junto mes {Note 2.) He has perhaps been deceived. They haber ser enganar have no doubt (fallen in company with him) to- ENCONTRARSE cti su companici {esta night. We saw him coming from that place, noche) ver venir de lugar where he has probably spent (the whole) day. donde pasar todo el {Note 3.) How can (there be) a more wretched como poDER haber misera condition than mine? (Is there) a man who (will HABER doubt) it? dude IMPERATIVE MOOD. RULE XLVI. This mood is used to express commanding, exhort- ing, entreating, or permitting; as, ''confiesalo,^^ con- fess it. ''Se bueno^^^ be good. ''Concedame este favor,^^ grant me this favour. '^Ilazlo,^^ do it. (J^Tote i -) It is necessary to observe, that this tense cannot be used with a verb vs^hich is preceded by a negative, but that, in such cases, the present subjunctive is employed; as, no lo digas, do not say it; no vayais, go ye not. The second person in both numbers is the only one wherein this deviation is conspicuous. For, the third person of both numbers, as well as the first person plural, are alike in both tenses. In fact, the Spanish Academj:, SYNTAX. '321 justly considering the latter as inconsistent in an imperatiye mood, have uniformly rejected it in their grammar. As, in this respect, we have followed the Academy, it is neces- sary to observe, that, the first person plural of the imperative, must always be translated, in Spanish, by the first person plural of the subjunctive present. {JsTote 2.) The future of the indicative, is sometimes used for this tense ; as, qxden hubiere hallado un manojo de Haves acudira al cotn-eo, whoever has found a bunch of keys, let him apply at the Post-office. EXERCISES. Bid them to come. Let us conquer them. Go DEciR (que vengcm) vencer away. Be cautious. Permit me to say. Grant marchar tener caucion permitir t decir conceder him that pension. Acknowledge thy crime. The confesar crimen war is inevitable, and let* it come! I repeat it, let ii guerra es venir" ' repetir come I {Note 1.) Trust it not, sir, it will prove a snare creer senor ser lazo to your foot. Sufter not yourselves (to be betrayed) para pie permitir t que os vendati with a kiss. Do not go late. con beso ir tai'd& (Note 2.) Those persons who (are solicitous) (to ac- individuo deseen quire a knowledge of) the Hebrew language, Mdll apply aprender hebreo idioma acudir ixi D street. He that is in favour of this measure, d la calle de D sea en favor medida will go to the general meeting. IR reunion ""Let, as a sign of the imperative, may be translated by qu£ 322 SYNTAX. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. OBSERVATION. The tenses of the indicative, correspond to those ot the sub- junctive. The only difference betAveen them is this, that the tenses of the indicative denote positive and certain actions or events; and those of the subjunctive, uncertain and doubtful. For example; aunque estaha alia, though he was there. In this sentence the act of his being there is expressed as certain, and therefore the verb is in the indicative. If we say, however, aunque estuviese alii, though he should be there; we now speak in a doubtful and uncertain manner with regard to his being there. For this reason the tense has been put in the subjunctive. There exists an erroneous impression concerning conjunctions and the subjunctive mood. It is generally supposed that a con- junction requires the subjunctive mood, merely because this con- junction is placed before a verb. It is not this conjunction that has any influence over the verb — but our meaning. Hence it is that the student should not be carried away with the idea, that any verb is placed in the subjunctive, because the conjunction which precedes, requires it. If I say, '■^Jiunque vitne hoi no le vtre^^ though he comes to-day I shall not see him, I speak of his arrival as certain, yet the conjunction forms no objection whatever, to the verb being placed in the indioative. Should my intention be to express his arrival as doubtful, then, the verb must necessarily l)e placed in the subjunctive; thus, ^-Jtunque viniese hoi no le vena," though he should come to-day I would not see him. There are a few conjunctive expressions, which, as they express doubt in themselves, if they be used at all, they require the subjunctive. They are, dado que, granted, con tal que, provided, &c. Of these we shall speak in their proper place. PRESENT. RULE XLVII. This tense represents an action doubtful or contin- gent that is to take place; as, '•^Aunque venga,^^ though he may come. Aunque vaya alii, though he may go there. As, in the present of this mood, futurity is expressed, we may use the future instead of the present, in all SYNTAX. 32S cases, except when the conjunction si, if, is used. We might have said with equal piopnetj, aunque viniere^ and aunque fuere alii. EXERCISES. Though the dogs niaj bark, they will not awake me. perro ladrar despertar Whether he come or not, I shall go. That he may que VENIR no m (para que) maintain the post, I have made many sacrifices. MAXTENER puesfo Iiabcr sacrl/icio IMPERFECT. RULE XLVllI. This tense represents a contingent action as going on now, or as having to go on some time hence^ as, '''Aun- que yo la amara ahora^"^^ though I should love her now. ''Quisiera que viniese,^- I wish he would come. J^ote 1. It will have been observed in the conjugation of verbs in etymology, that in Spanish there are three imperfects. The one ending in ra, as amara, the other in ria, as amana, and the other in se, as amase. We there gave an English equivalent, to every one of these imperfects. It must not be supposed from this, that would is always equivalent to ra, might to ria, or should to se, for every one of these imperfects might be so used as to re- quire all these auxiliaries in turn. These imperfects are used in the following manner: Jiff, may be used for either ria, or se; as, "Si yo amara,'''' if I should love. " Fo amara," l would love. (2.) Ria is used to denote wish or condition; ^'quisiera ir alli,^^ I should like to go there. "£i seria rico,'''' he would be rich. (3.) Se, is used whenever any conditional conjunction, or any verb of command precedes the subjunctive; as, "sitjo fuesevmd. yo iric," if 1 were you I would go. " Yo Le dige que viniese,'' I commanded him to go. These three rules would, we believe, be sufficient to 3£4 SYNTAX. guide the student in every instance. For, how many rules soevfci we may give, these three will always be those by which the stu- dent will be directed. As the three imperfects of the subjunctive are considered among the greatest difficulties of the Spanish lan- guage; we give the follov/ing observations and rules, which, with very little variation, we copy from Mr. M'Henry — to every one of which the author has annexed corresponding exercises. The Spanish Academy remarks, concerning the terminations ra, ria, and se, that the first may, in most instances, be substituted for either of the others. We shall therefore confine our observa- tions chiefly to the second and third terminations, believing that the remark of the Academy sufficiently denotes the extensiveness of the first. At the same time, we shall also warn the student, that in the subsequent examples, the termination ra must always be deemed implied, unless the necessity for its rejection should be pointedly noticed. Of the termination ra, ria, and se. Ofra. This termination is generally used in ejaculations; as, rqitien lo hubiera pensado! who would have thought it! ;dichosa yo si el esceso de mi dolor me hubiera qiiitade la vida! happy me if the excess of my grief had^iaken away my life! ;que de penas y tormentos me hubiera ahorradol how many afflictions and torments it would have spared me ! Of ria and se. 1. If the imperfect or pluperfect of the subjunctive be preceded in English by a conjunction, se should be employed; as, although he might come^ aunque viniese; unless he would have not come, amenos que no hubiese venidos provided he would come, con tal que viniese; if he would come, si el viniese. 2. When instead of expressing the conjunction if in English, the order is inverted, the same termination 1 SYNTAX. 325 iiiust be used; as, ivere we to practise (or if we were to practise) virtue, si nosotros practicasemos la virfud; had she (or if she had) ivritten Sfc. si ella hubiese es- crito, &:c. 3. As much as, or as many as, preceding the subjunc- tive in English, requires the termination se likewise; as, I gave you money to buy as many as we might loant, le di a vm. diner o para comprar cuantos necesitasemos; I gave them leave to eat as much as they ivoidd, les di Jicencia para comer cuanto quisiesen. 4. If any of the preterites of the indicative precedes the imperfect or pluperfect of the subjunctive in Eng- lish, with the sign anight, the termination se must be used; but if tlie sign be icoidd, we must use the termi- nation na; as, I wrote to him immediately, in order that he might arrive in time; and he answered that he voidd set out last niglit, le escribi i?nediat anient e para que llegase a tiempo, y me respondio que partiria anoche. N. B. In this sentence rla could not be changed to ra. 5. When the imperfect or pluperfect of the subjunc- tive is not preceded by any conditional conjunction, the termination ria should be employed; as, I would go, but I am afraid, yo iria, pero tengo rniedo; we would pay our debts, but we have no money, pagariamos niiestras deudas, pero no tenemos dinero. 6. It is necessary to observe that whenever the con- junction if, in English, is used in tlie sense of whether, the termination ria is the only one that can be employ- ed; as, I asked him if his father, or whether his father, would come to-morrow, le pregunte si su padre vendria manana; she wrote to us to know if we ivould buy the house, ella nos escribio para saber si comprariamos la casa. 28 326 SYNTAX. r. "When the verb by which the imperfect of the sub- jtinctive is governed, denotes promise or assurance^ the termination ria is the only one which can be us^d; as, me prornetio que vendria, he promised me that he would come; te asegure que saldria, I assured thee that he would go out. 8. The termination ria is the only one used to denote a supposed action, &c. done within a period of time not including the present moment; as, pero le pareceria que ddndome su mula gastaria ?nmos en el viage^ but (I suppose) it seemed to him, that by giving me his mule he would spend less on the journey. 9. When tvere is used in English for would be, and had for would have, the former is expressed with ria, and the latter with ra; as, it ivere (that is, it would be) the greatest folly to believe all that is said, seria, la ma- yor locura, creer todo lo que dicen; many crimes which had been (that is, which would bave been,) punished at other times, were then committed with impunity, muchos delitos que hubieran sido castigados en oiros tiempos, se cometian impunemente e7it6nces. 10. It is almost unnecessary to observe, that when in English, tvould, shoidd, might, are not employed as signs of the subjunctive mood, but as principal verbs, they must be translated by querer, deter, poder; as, he would not go, that is, he was unwilling to go, no quiso ir; we should forgive our enemies, that is, we ought to forgive, dehemos perdonar a nuestros enemigos; I know he might have, that is, he had it in his pow er to have written before, se que pudo haber escrito antes. EXERCISES. 1. Though lions might roar. If she should come. leon rugir si venir SYNTAX. 32r (To the end that) they might study, I bought many dfin de que estudiar comprar books for them. libro 2. Had we less pride and more humility, tener menos orgullo hwnildad (we would be) happier. Were we to follow the seriamos feliz seguir dictates of our conscience, (we would be) better. dictado conciencia seriamos Should you go, tell him I am unwell. iR DEciR estar malo 3. He obtained permission, to deliver as many OBTENER para decir *Drations, as he thought proper. They told him creer propio decir they (would only give him) (as much) money as he solo le darian cuanto diner o t could make in one day. poder hacer 4. I said to him that I would not go. They decir ir knew that they would arrive before me. They saber llegar {dntes-de) sent messengers ten days before, that every embiar mensagero {para que) thing might be prepared. A guard of tv/enty soldiers ser preparado guardia soldado was sent, that they might prevent any disorder. ser remitir prevenir desorden 5. I would go, but I do not dare. Would you ir pero atraverse not call a man ^ood, if he acted (according to) the Uamar obrar ses:un 328 SYNTAX. laws? Would men be so wicked if they only lei ser malo si solo considered, that after their death they must ronsiderar {despues de) muerte deberdn give an account of their actions, DAR cuenta 6. This gentleman sent me a word to know if caballero embiar recado para saber si I would see him. The general (had recourse to) tha*. VER us6 de stratagem, to be perfectly convinced if estratagema para estar perfectamente convencido si the enemy would not change their quarters. enemigo cambiar alojamienfo 7. The Duke promised the company that his duque prometer a compania attendance would be sure. If it were now in the presencia ser seguro ser de t (daytime,) I assure you that the first flower we dia asegurar primer Jlor would meet, would present so many wonders, encontrar presentar maravilla that you would be astonished. estar asombrado 8. The robbers (no doubt) imagined that we would ladrones imaginarse patiently submit to their cruelty. He thought, con paciencia someterse crueldad creer (I suppose,) that (I would be mean enough to) second tendria la bageza de favorecer his vile project. They did not speak to yoiu vil proyecto hablar because, no doubt, they were engaged, porgv.e estar ocvpad(^ SYNTAX. 329 9. It were a very injudicious thing, were I to &er injuicioso cosa accede to such propositions. It were a pity to acceder tal ser Idstima de lose so worthy a man. They had passed without perder digno hombre pasar sin stopping, if a celestial voice had not called them. pcvrarse voz haber llamar We had perished long since, had not his gene- perecido (mitcho timpo ha) gene- rosity been so great. rosidad ser grande 10. They would not follow his advice, so sEGui'v consejo (por eso) they were ruined.* You might have told it to arruinarse poder decir me. If we (turned out) so soon, people might SALiR temprano gente say we were crazy. We should comply with our DECIR estar loco complir duty, (at the sacrifice of) every pleasure, nay, obligacion {aunque sacrificdramos) placer {que digo) (even at the sacrifice of) every comfort. aunque sacrificdramos reposo PERFECT. RULE XLIX. The Perfect of this tense denotes a contingent action which has been commenced and completed sume time ago, or which is finished some time hence^ as, ''aunque no le hayd visto por diez afios, siempre nie manifiesta amor en sus cartas,'^^ though I may not liave seen him * Translate this with se. See (2.) page 264. 28* 330 SYNTAX, for ten years^ he always expresses sentiments of iove for me in his letters^ "no admitas a nadie, cmnque haya pagado," admit no person tliough he may have paid, EXERCISES. Men promise pleasures to themselves, though at jirometerse placer aunque the time they express their hopes, they may have tiempo espresar esperanza lost every power to gratify them. Provided PERDER poder de gratificar con tal que they have been faithful to their promise, set them fiel promesa poner at liberty. He said, though we have lost our en libertad DECIR PERDER money, though none of our former friends have dinero antiguo amigo haber come to assist u^, though fortune appears to VENIR ASISTIE for tuna be against us, despair not , my children. ser contra desesperar hijo PLUPERFECT. RULE L. This tense refers to a contingent action which was finished some time since, or before an action did, or will take place. This tense is used in the same man- ner as the simple perfect, which has been explained at large, in pages 324, 325 and 326, to which we refer the student. EXERCISES. Who would have thought that after having ereer [despite sde) haber befriended him, he should have become our {tratado como amigo) hacerse '" SYNTAX. 3S'l enemy? Would you not have been killed, had it enemigo morir not been for his incessant attention. Should we not incesante atencion have loved God, should we not have been good amar a ser Christians? Who, but a fool, would have ever acted cristiano sino tonto jamas obrar so rashly? ttmerariamente FUTURE IMPERFECT. RULE LI. This tense refers to a contingent action which will take place at a future time; as, '•'Si mahana Uoviere no iremos^^^ if it should rain to-morrow we will not go. ^^Jlunque el eclipse tomare lugar al tiempo mencionado,^^ though the eclipse should take place at the time men- tioned. EXERCISES. Though it may rain* to-day, the weather will not be LLovER hoi tiempo ser cooler. If my father weret to arrive next* (masfrio) llegar (que viene) Monday,^ I shall certainly relate to him this affair. lunes ciertomente relatar negocio Should my suit (be concluded) to-morrow, I shall pleito concluirse manana depart immediately. SALiR imediatamente *It was observed, in page 322, speaking of the present of tfie subjunctive, that it may be used for the future. We repeat the same thing now, with regard to the future. t See number 2, pages 324, 325. 332 SYNTAX. FUTURE PERFECT. RULE LII. This tense refers to a contingent action which will have already taken place some time hence, or before another action commences; as, "Si vmd. hubiere visto a mi padre antes de partir no debe tomar otra medida,"^ should you have seen^ my father before you go away, you need not take any other measure. EXERCISES. Even when such a thing should have happened aun cuando tal t cosa suceder before he arrives,t do not divulge it. Should it not 6ntes llegar divulgar have rained to-morrow by ten o'clock, we will find LLovER mahana a hollar all the plants withered. If they should have pro- todo planta asecado haber pro nounced the sentence before we reach the town-house, nunciar sentencia llegar cabildo we shall have walked in vain. pasearse vdno OBSERVATION On the difference between the Imperfect and Future of the Subjunctive. In the definition which we have given of the above tenses, we have said that both these tenses could represent a future action. That the student may not misapply them, he must observe, that the futu- rity expressed by the imperfect is always referred to time past, counting from the period we speak; and that which is expressed by * See number 2, page 324. I See antes de, page 185. SYNTAX. 33S the future, represents an action which is yet to take place in time to come. If we said, that such a person would be rich, if he had been economical, we have no reference whatever to time coming, only to time past. The futurity expressed by would be, extends only to the time in which the observation is made. In the phrase, ''the teacher ordered that the students should write exercises," there is futurity expressed, but it only extends to this present moment, for the students may have already complied with the wishes of the teacher, and consequently the imperfect should be employed. But if the phrase be, the teacher says, that every student who shall not write exercises wiU be punished, the act of writing the exercises is yet to take place, and therefore to commence after the time in which we make the assertion, the future, and only the future, could be used. The first sentence would therefore be translated by, El maestro ordeno que los disci- pulos escribiesen temas; and the second by. El maestro dice que el diseipulo que no escriba 6 escribiere temas sera castigado. We say, escriba 6 escribiere, for the present may be used for the future of the subjunctive, or vice versa, if the conjunctive if he not em- ployed. EXERCISES. The general issued an order that all the soldiers ESPEDiR orden soldado who might desert should be shot. I desertar (pasados por las armas) say that if he should not come to-day, I will not DECIR VENIR wait (any longer.) If the contract had been esperar inas contrato made* last year, it would be valid, and (there would KACEK pasado ano ser valido no habria be no) necessity that another should be made.* (There necesidad oiro ser hacer hai are) some men who would not shudder, (even if) aturdirse aimqi'^ "■ We again refer the student to note (2,) page 264. 334 SYNTAX. (the whole) world were to perish. By what appellation todo el mundo perecer por que nombre would we distinguish the wretch who should pay distinguir d malvado pagar with ingratitude the favours received in time of want? ingratitud recibir necesidad What words can express the pity we feel for poDER espresar compasion sbihtib. por him who should have an irresistible desire to do tenir deseo de hacer good and had not the means. bie?i tener medio INFINITIVE MOOD.— PRESENT. RULE LIII. This tense represents an action as going on at any indefinite time, without any distinction of persons; as, **Zes vimos andar,^^ we saw them coming. Pervertir, to pervert. Dormir^ to sleep. J^ote 1. The masculine definite article is often placed before an infinitive. When this occurs, the infinitive is a noun, and as such, called a verbal noun; as, "ei oir y el hablar son dos cosas mui diferentes,''^ to hear and to speak are two very different things. In such cases, the present participle is often used in English, with articles, or possessive pronouns. J^ote 2. The infinitive is used in an absolute manner for the pluperfect of the subjunctive. In that case the preposition a. must precede it. The phrase, a saber yo esto, is as grammatical and elegant as, si yo hvMiera sabido esto, had I known this. EXERCISES. We heard them arguing.* We saw him (taking OIR argument ar ver despe- *To hear and to see require the present indicative, and not the gerund, in Spanish. SYNTAX. 335 leave of) his father. He intends (to go awaj.) 'lirsc de padre intentar partir (Note 1.) His telling me this, was enough. To decir str bastante begin is not to end. To suffer with patience the comenzar ser acabar sufrir paciencia miseries of this life, is done bv few. 'miseria vida ser haceh por (Note 2.) If he had not acted thus, he would be obrar asi ser ruined. Had they not come, he would have arndrnar vexir haber killed me. matar PERFECT. This tense represents, without distinction of person? an action as past, but it is indefinite with regard to the time in which the action took place; as, ^^?ne acuerdo de haberle visto,^* I recollect to have seen him. ''*Nimca me olvidare de haberle oido cantar, I shall never forget to have heard him sing. EXERCISES. How could we have refrained from laughing at como PODER haber dejarse de reir such nonsense. Thev will have soon forgotten to disparate haber alvidarse have seen us. haber ver OF THE GERUND.* RULE LIV. The English participle present, is construed, iu Spanish, by tJie gerund; as, ''^Siendo ciertas las noti- * See page 84. 336 SYNTAX. c«as," the news being certain. ^'Estoi escribiendo,'^ I am writing. '^Paseando, or estando paseando,^^ walk- ing, or being walking. "Zos encontre leyendo,^^ I met them reading. J^ote 1. When the present participle expresses some circum- stance referring to the objective case of the verbs to see, or to hear, it is construed by the present infinitive; as, ^^La oigo cantar," I hear her sins^ing. -'Awic« vt representar esa comedia,^'' I never saw that play acting, or being acted. J^ote 2. Gerunds require the same prepositions as the verbs from v\^hich they are derived; as, "Arrepintiendose de sus culpas,-'' repenting of his crimes. "No atreviendose a saZir," not daring to go out. "Riniendo con todos,''"' quarrelling with all. JVote. 3. If the English participle follow the preposition by, we may use either the gerund, or the infinitive preceded by con; as, ^^La memoria se aumenta agercitandola, or con agercitarla," the memory is increased by exercising it. JVbfe 4. If the participle be used in English as a verbal noun, and there is, in Spanish, a substantive of the same import, this substantive should be preferred to the gerund; as, "£/ temor de JDios es el principio de la sabiduria,'''' the fear of God is the begin- ning of wisdom. "Sw ida es la causa de mi venida," his going is the cause of my coming. M)te 5. Instead of the compound, the simple gerund, preceded by the preposition en, is sometimes elegantly used; as, "En dici- endo esto se fue,^^ or habiendo dicho eslo sefue, having said this, he went away. EXERCISES. Ferdinand having disposed of every thing for Fernando haber preparado t {todo lo necesario) para a siege, of which he foresaw^ the difficulties* and dura- sitio PREVER t di/icultad tion,* appeared before Seville, on the 20th of Au- presentarse sevilla g7^st, 1247. People are always talking of happiness estar hablar felicidad SYNTAX. ^ 337 "ivhich is never found in this miserable world. We ser iiaw them quarrelling most violently for nothing, RENiR 77mi violentamente They were going from. Havana to Caracas, when they IR were surprised by a pirate who unmercifully mai- mer sorprendido pirafa cnielmente 7ncil- treated them. The Asiatics remembering the dignity tratar Jlsidtico acordarse of Berenice, and pitying her hard fate, coMPADECERSE desgraciudo siierte sent her succours. Clouds are formed from exhala- embiar socorro mihe ser formar ecsala- tions, arising* from the earth. (How many) have cion levantarse ciicmto repented for not having applied themselves during ARREPENTiRSE Jiaber aplicar durante their youth. Happiness does not consist in living, jiiventud consistir vivir but in knowing how to live. We shall obtain peace, sino saber t obtener by making great sacrifices. W^e ought to spend some sacrijicio pasar of our time in admiring the attributes of God. The admirar atributo changing of times, and seasons, belongs^ to Providence cambio estacion pertenecer * When the English present participle, can be resolved by the relative and the corresponding cense of ihe verb, this latter con- struction should always be used iu Spanish; for instance: arising; which arise, que se levantan; accruing^ which accrue, que resulta or rciultan. 29 338 SYNTAX. alone.' We may improve our style by reading solo poDER 7nejorar estilo her attentively the best models. atentamente modelo PASSIVE PARTICIPLE. RULE LV. This past participle is declinable, except when it is preceded by the verb huher^ to have; as, ''Ha escrito,'' he has written. ^^Ellos han llegado,^^ they have arriv-' ed. ''Seremos felices,^^ we shall be happy. "^/ ha estado mui malo, y ella ?nui buena,^^ he has been very ill, and she \erj well. J^ote 1. Tentr, is, sometimes, used instead of haber, before a participle; and, in this case, the participle is indeclinable; but when tcner governs a substantive, then the participle becomes de- clinable; as, " Tengo escrito," I have written. '■'■Tengo escrita una carta," I have icritten a letter. '■'■Todo lo tengo hecho," I have done e.y^T'Sf thing. ^^ Tengo hechas las diligencias necesarias.'''' I have taken the necessary steps. J^ote 2. The participle is, in Spanish, used as a case absolute; thus, acabado, being finished; hecho, being done; muerto, being dead; &c. When this occurs, it always begins the sentence. Examples: "Acabada la ccna, nos fuhnos a pasear,'" supper being ever, we went a-walking. "Tomada esta rerolucion, me levante, cuando me parecio que Leonarday Domingo podian yaestar dormidos,'''' this resolution being taken I rose, when it appeared to me that Leonarda and Domingo might already be asleep. ''Hecho este juramento, que estaba bien resulto d no quebrantar, mc fui a buscar algun ?neso?i," this oath being taken, which I was well resolved not to break, I went to look for some inn. EXERCISES. The cruelties which some barbarous nations have crueldad bdrbaro i SYNTAX. 3S.9 committed, are horrid. Alphonso the tenth, siirnamed cometer ser horrible Jilfonso apeUidar the sage, renewed the treaty which his father had sabio renovar tratado made with Abousaid. Ihave^ never ^ seen, ^ said he, so cruel a man. Greenland was discovered in the ninth Greolandia ser descubrir century by a Norwegian, called Eric; it is situated siglo Noruego llamar estar situado between Europe and America. Let us consider who has given us being, and for what end we have been ser Jin ser created; how many are the mercies received; and how criar ser favor cuan great the ingratitude with which « e have repaid them. ingratitud volver We have said to liim (to get up early in the morning.) que madrugase He concealed himself to avoid the praises he had esconderse para evitar cdahanza tener »o well deserved. Granada (being taken,) Ferdinand merecer tomar Fernando ordered* all its inhabitants (to go out) of it, carrying ordenar habiiante salir llevar with them all their property and treasures. The consigo efecto tesoro male issue of the Gotliic kings (being extinct) masculine Unea goiico estingcdr the crown of Leon passed to Vermundo's sister. coronar — - — pasar hermana 340 SYNTAX. RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES OF THE TENSES OF VERBS- The excess of the dis':emj;er, makes the physician estrernidad mal medico crupl. A good instructor endeavours to render agree- — ESFORZARSE a HACER ClgrU- able every thing which is useful. Youth want dahle util juvmtud {no tener) wisdom to deliberate. Youth sows the seeds aahidurla para deliberar sembrar semilla of repentance, by pleasure^ and the harvest is arreyentimiento con cosecha ser gathered in (old age,) by pain. God is propitious recoger vegez con pesadumbres ser propicio to those who implore him. Nero was a detestable implorar ser tyrant. The Lacedemonians sacrificed their children. tirano Lacedemonio sacrificar hijo He sets out to-morrow for Spain. The prodigal partir para prodige Jives rich and dies poor^ the miser lives poor and dies vivir MORiR avaro rich. Most* people live without reflection. As soon vivir hiego ast Csesar had entered the senate, the conspirators que entrar en senado threw themselves upon him. The king prohibited echarse prohibir the export of silk goods. I (shall have set out) estraccion seda genero purtir liefore thy return. We (have applied) often to him, vuelta acndir [muchas veces) a ■' See note 1, page 242. ■f See note 2, page 317 SYNTAX. 341 I do not permit his visits. Let us restrain his pennitir restrinir ambition. All his honour, riches, and powder, vanished riqueza poder vanecer immediately. We (had then corresponded with each correspotiderse other) for more than ten years.* When man considers how long (he has offended) his Creator, and (He (cuanto iiempo) ofender d has pardoned) him, he shudders. God (will reward) perdonar estremecerse recompensar the good, and punish the wicked. On the 4th of d bueno gastigar d malo March, 1825, James Monroe will have been President of Diego j)residente the United States eight years.t PcrhapsJ the ministers ministro are now signing the capitulation. I suppose (they estar firmando -^_^_^ suponer have learnt) this news. (Is there) a grief like his? oiR noticia haber dolor como Some said. Can this man be a Deity under the human DEciR PODER SBT deidttd bajo form.P Remember, man, that thou art dust. Forgive figura AcoRDARSE ser polvo perdonar them. Father, for they know not what they do. porque saber hacer * See page 317, note 1. t See page 316, note 2. I See page 319, note 1. 29* 34a M'K'TAX. Come to-morrow witli thj son, but come not'^ early. VENiR vExiR temprano Let us profit by his examf)le. Use thy authority aprovecharse egemplo usar de autoridad with moderation, and do not abuse thy power. How — abiisar de poder many men wouldt have perished in that battle! cuanto perecer batalla Nations would be happy, if wisdom were the only feliz sabidiiria ser unico object of sovereigns. Hadij: we no pride, ; we should soberano tener orgullo not complain) of the pride of others. We should quejarse be happy now, if Adam (had not sinned.) Caligula ser pecar — — commanded that the Romans (should render) him divine mandar hacer divino honours. Were| men to follow the dictates of reason, honor seguir jnecepto razon 'they would save themselves) many sorrows. Hadj cHiorrarse jjesadumbre Caesar been less ambitious, he would have done more ser menos amhicioso honour to human nature. DidJ you but know naturaleza solo saber where I am now, (you would put up) a thousand ofrecer ^•upplications to heaven, that (I might return) to your suplica porque volver ^The student must read with particular attention, note !, in page 320. t See ?'a, via, and se; pages 323, 324, 325. 1 See number 2, pages 324, 325. SYNTAX. 343 house. Oh! had I seen her before her death! Fearing vER {antes de) muerte temer that study (might fatigue) me. He ordered the general fatigar mandar que to take* the fortress, and to (put to death) (as many tomar fortaJeza y que matar a cuantos as) he found armed, and to pay for all the encontmar armado pa gar provisions whicH he might want. Without tempta- viveres necesltar tentacion tions (we should not be able) to know ourselves. PODER COXOCERSE The innkeeper to whom I related my adventure, posadero confar aventura with which the scoundrel was perhaps better de hellaco estar acquainted than I, pitied me. No one informado (compadecerse de) seemed to me, then, more suited to believe every PARECER eyitonces apto para creer thing. (I might choose) to tell him. Thou wdlt have qUERER DECIR (as manyt conveniences as) (thou mayesti choose) cuantas conveniencias querer • When the English preterite, being expressive of order or command, precedes an infinitive; this infinitive is, in Spanish, rendered by the imperfect of tlie subjunctive, with se; and the preterite is followed by the conjunction que: as, "He ordered the general to take the fortress," mando que el general tomase la foi- ialtza; that is, [he ordered that the general should take the fortress.] i Jis much as, is frequently translated by cuanto-Si; and, as many «s, by cu«nYos-as. + S*e present, page 305; and/itfure imperfect, page 331, 344 SYNTAX. He gave them permission to do what (they might DAR de HACEH happen to like;)* hence it is that they did then what QUERER (de aqui) they pleased^ they do now what they choosey and qUERER QUERER doubtless will do hereafter what they will.t Ye [sin dudd) (en adelanfe) # querer may stop in my hermitage ^ as long as poDER quedarse hermita {todo el tiempo que) ye like. He that hasj valour, let him follow me. QUERER TENER SEGUIR He had ordered that all neutral vessels which (should mandar neutral huque entrar enter) the ports of England, or should have been en piierfo ser searched by the English cruizers, should be confiscated registrado por crucero ser conjiscado (as soon as) they entered the ports of France. luego que entrar puerto AGREEMENT OF VERBS.!! RULE LVI. The verb agrees with its nominative case, in number and person I as, "Fo aprendo^"^^ I learn. "7m estudins^'^ thou studiest. '''Ella i;iene," she comes. '•'Nosotro» rez>/i05-," we laughed. " Fmd CG?2^a, " you sing. ''£llo$ * See observation, pages 332, 333. t See observation, pages 332, 333. I See Subjunctive Mood, page 112. H See page 305. ^SYNTAX. 345 nos encontrdron,^^ they met us. "^5* «si," it is so. ^'^El presidente es sabio,^^ the president is wise. EXERCISES. Nature begins 5 education naturcdeza comenzar; ' — dence is the eye of virtue. dencia ser ojo virtud make the comforts of life. GONSTiTuiR delicia vida Greeks the use of letters. Griegos uso de car act er are diseases, which no human finishes. Pru- — acabar pru- Innocent pleasures inocente placer es Cadmus taught the Cadmo ensenar d Vicious habits vicioso costinnbre aid can reme- ser enfermcdad humana ayuda poder reme- dy. The tjo great indulgence of parents, diar. demasiado indulgencia padres ruins children. The dog barks when we urruinar d hijo perro ladrar cuando t knock at the door. God has imprinted in the heart llamar d la puerta Dios haber estampar corazon of man the love of liberty. The prayers of the libertad oracion efficacious. No sooner had ejicaz no bien haber the voice, than he (grew ashamed) of la voz cuando el avergo)izarsei * The nominative case of an impersonal verb, is never express- ed in Spanish. The pronoun poderoso. "Ice is cold," el yelo esfrio. "Women are tender," las mugeres son ticrnas. "He is wise," el es sabio. "This is,'''' esto es. Speaking of the location, situation, &c. of a river, a city, momi- ment, or any other object; we have reference to the manner in which that certain object exists, but not to any of the qualities which naturally belong to a river, a city, or monument; such as dimension, beauty, greatness, &c. Kence it is, that all kinds of lo- cality, are always expressed by esfar; for instance: "Here is Lon- don, a city which is great in every thing," aqut esta Londres, ciudad que en todo es grande. "If this monument were placed on a high hill, its magnificence would be shown to a greater advantage," si este monumento estuviese colocado en im alia colina, su magnijicen-' cia se veria mas ventajosamente. If the verb, to be, and the present participle, be in English, used to conjugate a verb, it is plain that in Spanish, the verb estar must be employed. Saying such a person is running; such another teas jumping; a third njill be dancing, &c., I mean to ex- press the manner in which they did, do, or will exist; it being apparent, that it is not in the nature of man, to be, or not to be dancings running, Sfc; for instance, "£Z esta escribiendo,''"' he is writ- ing. '■^J^osotros estaremos comiendo a las siete,''^ we shall be eating at seven o'clock. "£/ estaba escribiendo cuando una bala le paso por medio da las piernas,'''' he was writing when a bullet passed through his legs. When we place the verb to be, before the past participle, or an adjectified participle, it is not so plain. On some occasions, we have reference to the qualities which must be considered as in- herent in the object of which we speak; and some others, as de- noting the manner of its existence only. Whenever an object has been acted upon by an agent, it has received a certain quality which has remained attached to its nature; and, therefore, it must be expressed by ser. Thus, for instance: "he is loved," es amado. "He is wounded," es herido. "He has been taken," el ha aido pi- endido. '■'■The house is cleaned;'''' la casa es limpiada. In every one of these phrases, there is an agent understood; and we have, therefore reference to the action which the object contained in them has received, which action, is now inherent in the nature SYNTAX. i57 of the object; since it must remain, so long as the object itself shall remain. But, if we had reference to the manner in which the object existed at the time we spoke of it, and not to the action it had received, then estar, would, doubtless, be used. The phrase, '■'■Thh house is cleaned,^'' imports that the house has undergone an opera- tion which has remained, and must always remain in it; and would, therefore, be translated as above. If, however, I say, '^This house. is clean,'''' I have no reference but to the manner of its present existence; and how long it will continue, it is not for me to in- vestigate; but it is taken for granted, that its existence of clean- liness may end. If it be said, "I loas wounded," I may either mean that I received from some individual, an injury, the effects of which can never be removed, or that, I was at a certain time existing in a wounded condition; but that the wound having been cured, I enjoy my former state of health. This sentence, taken in the first meaning, would be, indubitably, translated by ser; and in the second, by estar. El fue herido. El estaba herido. And thus will happen in the following and similar cases: '^Este libra es escrito por Lavizac,^'' this book is written by Levizac. ^^Este lilro esta escrito enfrances,^'' this book is written in French. ^'£sta quinta es hecha por el divertimiento de su 6?Heno," this country seat is made for the amusement of its pro- prietor. Esta quinta esta hecha con balcones,^'' this country seat is made with balconies. There are some qualities inherent in the nature of objects, the existence of which, at the time we speak of them, has already taken, or is yet to take, place. It is not to be supposed, that on this account, those qualities change their nature. Speaking, for instance, of a city which once was, or which it is believed at a future period will be large or small; — rich or poor; — splendid or miserable, &c., but now it is not so; we must speak of these quali- ties as past, or future; but as being, at the time of their exist- ence, descriptive of the nature of the city. For instance: "Bal- timore, seventy years since, ivas the retreat of the panther and the serpent; and now is the abode of seventy thousand souls," Hace setenta ahos que Baltimore era el recinto de la onza y de la sierpe, y ahora es la morada de seterUa mil almas. Speaking of a person who was judicious in all his actions, and at present, owing 358 SYNTAX. to circumstances, is no longer so; we must certainly speak of the quality of this individual as inherent in his nature, when it was in existence: as, "JEi ersi juicioso en todas sus operaciones,'''' he was judicious in all his actions. This rule is also applicable when we speak of the manner in which an object exists; thus, for instance: "JSi estaba aqui ayer, y sin duda estara aqm manana; he was here yesterday, and undoubtedly he loill be here to- morrow. It frequently happens, that the same quality may, in an object, be either natural or accidental; it may either express the natu- ral, or the accidental existence. When this occurs, we must select the verb which our meaning requires. Suppose we wish to say that the water of a certain fountain is naturally warm; and that the water of a certain tube is also warm, but that it has become so by the process of fire. In the first instance, we should unquestionably use ser; and in the second estar; thus: Esta agua es caliente; and, Esta agua esta caliente. The same would take place in regard to any person who had injured any one of his limbs. If it was supposed that his cure was beyond any me- dical or surgical operation, the injury would become as perma- nent as if it were natural; and, therefore, expressed by ser; but if, on the contrary, it was supposed of a short duration only, it would be a certain manner of existence. Translating "that man is lame" by este liombre es cojo,^^ his lameness is considered per- manent; and Este homhre esta cojo^ temporary only. If it be said, ^^Juan esta melancolico,'''' we mean, John feels now melancholy; taking for granted, that the moment the circumstances which rendered him so, subside, he will no longer be in this situation. But if we say, "Jiwtn es melancolico,^'' we convey the idea that John is of a melancholy disposition. And thus it is with re- gard to any other object which is susceptible of these two ex- istences. When we mention the occupation, or profession, -of an indivi- dual, we speak of it as its being a natural quality. It is well known, that every human being is considered as having a certain employment; this employment becomes, therefore, essential to the nature of man. His changing this employment or occupa- tion for another, is, consequently, no reason for its not being attached to his nature: ser is, then, the verb by which this quali- SYNTAX, 359 ty must be expressed; as, '■'■J^apoleon fue emperadcyr,^'' Napoleon ivas an emperor. "£Z ha sido capiian, pero ahora es general,^^ he . has been captain, but he is now general "£/ era zapatero, es satire, y sin duda sera carpintero,'''' he ic«s a shoemaker, is now a tailor, and I doubt not that he will be a carpenter. The author indulges a hope, that if the student peruse with at- tention the preceding observations, he will no longer feel at a loss to make the right distinction between Ser, and Estar,* how intricate soever the object of his difficulty may be. EXERCISES. History is the picture of times and men. Solomon retrato who was the son of David, and who built the temple coNSTRuiR templo of Jerusalem, was the wisest of kings. Health is the sabio salud support of life, and joy is the soul of health. apoyo alegria alma Reason was given to man to control his passions. razon para suhordinar It is honourable to be a friend to the unfortunate. honroso desdichado Attention is a very necessary thing to improve our atencion cosa para mejorar mind. The hundred gates of the city of Babylon entendimiento puerta Babilonia * Owing to the various meanings of some adjectives, it happens that when applied in one sense, they require ser, and when in another, eslar. Bueno, and malo, for instance. The first of these words means §ood, and also well; and the other bad, and ill. If a person wishes to say that he is not well; he will, of course, say: yoio estoi hueno; this being the manner in which he now exists; but that another is not good, he will say, el no es bueno; this being a quality descriptive of his nature. 360 SYNTAX. were of brass. Telemachus come to rest for thy bronce d descansar pues clothes are wet. When kings are beloved, it is a * vestido mojado certain proof that they deserve to be so. To comfort prueba merecer lo t consolar d the afflicted, is an act of mercy. Eternity is a cifiigido obra mesericordia continued circle, its centre is every where, but its continuo circulo centra {en todas partes) circumference is no where. All that is, was, or ever circimferencia (en ninguna) jamas shall be in heaven, earth, or sea, is known to God. cielo tierra -mar Those manners which (are becoming) w^hen they are 7nanera caer b'len natural, render people ridiculous, when they are hacer (a imo) ridiculo affected. People are afraid of seeing themselves what afectado ver {ellos mismos) they are, because they are not what they should be. deber Knowledge is the treasure, but judgment the treasurer tesoro tesorero of a wise man. He who is diligent, will be rewarded. diligente recompensado The temple of Diana was at Ephesus. Some nations templo d Efeso which are called frivolous, have produced the most frivolo grave men 5 and others, which are called grave, have produced the most frivolous. SYNTAX. 3^1 SER. RULE LXII. The verb, to be^ {ser^ is frequently conjugated iinper«^ sonally, with the nouns menester, Men, &c. and the adjec- tives, preciso^ necesario; as, "Es menester que los horn- bres sean realmente grandes, para atraer la aclainacion del siglo,^^ men must be really great to attract the ac- clamation of the present age. *'Es preciso que ye vaya,^^ it is necessary that I should go, or, I must go. *'Es necesario hacer atencion a las cosas del mundo,^' it is necessary that we should pay attention, or, we must pay attention to tiie things of the worlds J^'ote 1. As, ser preciso^ to be necessary, ser necesario, to be ne- cessary, &c., require the subjunctive; when we say, in English, it is necessary for me to go, for them to be here, &c., we must say in Spanish, it is necessary that I should go, that they be here, &c. Es necesario^ or, es menester que yo vaya, quo ellos se queden aqui. J^ole 2. There are some personal verbs which are often conju- gated impersonally; as, "basta que el lo dig-a," it suffices that he says so. *'No basta que el lea, debt leer 6ien," it is not enough that he reads, he must read well. Js'ote .3. When ser, to be, is used impersonally, and precedes a pronoun, the verb ser must agree with this pronoun in number and person; as, '■'■Soi yo quien lo hizo," it is I who did it. "5o7i ellos los que lo dicen," it is they who say it. EXERCISES, There n^eds* (no more) than a bad inclination (710 ser menester) sino t = to make a man vicious. (It is not enough) to think para hacer & viciose no bustar pensar * See observation, page 1^9, 362 SYNTAX. with exactness, we must also express ourselves ecsactitud [ser menester) espresarse with cle^ness. (It is necessary) to prefer our duty daridad ser preciso t preferir obligacion to our pleasure. gusto (Note 1.) (It is not enough) for a general to be pru- no bastar dent, it is also necessary that he be fortunate. It is afortunado not enough for us to study, we must learn. It is not esiudiar aprender enough for men to appear modest, it is necessary that parecer modesto they really be so.* realmente lo {Note 2.) It is the gospel that commands us to evangelio manda forgive our enemies. It is not those who speak perdonar a hablar most that men admire. It is thou who (hast deceived) mas admirar engahar us. Men- must^ obeyt the laws, since it is [ser menester que) puesque they that defend us. It was envy that occasioned DEFENDER euviditt ocasiouar the first murder in the world. asesinato mundo * So^ whem used in the sense of if, as aboye^ should always be translated by lo. t See obseryation, page 169 SYNTAX. .363 EXERCISES On the impersonal and irregular verbs. ^ But ]et us suppose that your general should suponer ^come out) victorious. I already told you, that although salir victorioso ya decir he may shed tears, they cannot pardon him. Al- verier lagrima poder pardoner though he may know me, he will not come. He conocer venir counterfeited ten dollar bank notes. Oh! and confrahacer {notas de banco de dies pesos) (how much) do I suffer with my disease. Do not cuanto t padecer enfermedad condescend to change your opinion without sufficient eondescender cambiar sin bast ante ground for it. (Give consolation) to the afflicted. fundamento consolar All heard Marcus Brutus. The Roman people did oir a Marco Bnito el Romano pueblo not regret the assassination of Ccesar, but they sentir asesiny'io Cesar pero regretted that after his death the vile Cinna sentir {depucs de) should speak ill of him. It (fell to his) lot to live decir mal caberle en suerte vivir so long. They ought to have reviewed the {ta?ito tiempo) deber rever works. Should we obtain the office we wish, how obra conseguir puesto desear cuan happy I would be. The trees blossom again. We rejiorecer * SQft Etymology, from page 125, to page 17C ^164 SYNTAX. would never oppose a negotiation. Let them propose oponerse a ^ proponer the conditions. (Make thyself acquainted) with their imponerse en proposals. Prefer virtue to riches. (They have propuesta anteponer com- composed) various works. If (they should expose) ])oner esponer her to his rage. Her groans attracted the attention cdlera gemido atraer of the hearers. To the end that the delinquents oyente [a Jin de que) delincuente (might take refuge) in the church. It snows very retraerse iglesia heavily. Although it should snow, the ceremony mucho ceremonia (will take place.) It thundered last night. If it efectuarse* thunder I shall not go. In summer it (grows light) verano very early. In the morning the field was co- teynprano manana campo tu- vered with soldiers.t There are men (whom we like) hrir de soldado que nos gustan and men (whom we dislike) without knowing the que nos disgustan sin saber reason. If there should be so many persons, we shall razon be uncomfortable. It is cold. It was so cold last incomodado hater frio hacer pasado * If an infinitive be found beneath an inclosure of twa or three words, the student must put it in its right tense, t See observation, page 166. SYNTAX. 365 winter, that some men were found frozen in the invierno hallarse congelado streets. It is extremely warm this summer, and no calle estremo calor verano sin doubt, it will be very cold next^ winter,^ Would duda (que viene) placer to God, he would become good. If it should please God^ hacerse placer I will go. Let them subtract the half of the sum. Al- ir subtraer mitad though (it may not be worth) the while. The profits valer pena ganancia (would be equivalent) to the labour. He will surpass equivaler trabajo sobresalir a liis predecessor in humility. The innkeeper conducted liumildad mesonero conducir me to the house of a carrier. If this orator were aii'iero never to introduce his similies. If the trees (should introducir — ctrbol not produce) fruit next summer. We shall producir fruta {el verano que viene) abide by your opinion. In order that (they might atenerse d nianie- keep up) their establishment. He would not entertain ner establecimiento tntretener them. Refrain thy passions. Though some accident co7ile)ier (may happen) to them, they never will infringe the sobrevenir [contravenir a) laws. The bad smell arose from the drain. We mal olor provenir caiio 31* 366 SYNTAX. prepared ourselves for the battle. I never retract prevenirse desdecirse de what I have^ once^ said. ^ They will bless the una vez bendecir hand. He (had predicted) that (they would curse) him. predecir maldedr Though he (should contradict) the assertion, I will contradedr afirmacioji not retract. This bread is blessed. pan OOVERNMENT OF VER:BS. RULE LXIII. An active transitive verb, governs the noun to which its energy is transmitted, in the objective casej as, "Pb te amare, I shall love thee, ""Dios aborrece el vicio,^' God hates vice. J^ote 1. In the following instances, the verb governs the objec- tive case, with the preposition a. 1 . "When tlie objective case is a person or any inani- mate object personified; as, ^'Dios ama al justo^^'^ God loves the righteous man. ''Atacaroh a Toledo,''^ they attacked Toledo. ^'Bonaparte nunca pudo conquistar a la Espana;^^ Bonaparte never could conquer Spain. 2. When tlie nominative, and the objective are in the same number^ both representing inanimate objectSy aiid the nominative exercising a certain power over the objective; as, '*A la leiia quema el fuego^^^ fire burns wood. "^7 verba rige al adverbio," the verb governs the adverb, "^Z sol alumbra a la tierra," the sun lights the earth. J^'ote 2. When the sentence contains two objective cases, of -^'hich. OBe, is, in Englisbj governed hy a verb, and th& other by SYNTAX. 36r the preposition to; the d, should, in Spanish, be omitted; as, '^In- troduciremos el conde [not al] a Ja tna?-gttesa," we shall introduce the Earl to the Marchioness. EXERCISES. They whom opulence has made proud and whom opidencia orgidloso luxury has corrupted, cannot relish the simple disolucion cori'ojnper gustar ■ pleasures of nature. We should fear and obey placer temer obedecer the Author of our being, (even him who) (has power) autor ser sz, a el que puede to reward or punish us for ever. God will reward premiar castigar para siempre recompensar the good and punish the wicked. Spain (used to govern) castigar gohernar Mexico, but now she has lost every power over it. Megico perder todo poder sobre When a person sees the present dissolution, he observar actual • would suppose that nothing but vice leads the world. creer sino regir Cortes sent four envoys to the Tlascaltecas to remitir embiado — ^__ para (request of them) entrance into their towns. pedirles eiitrada en ciudad OF VERBS GOVERNING THE INFINITIVE. RULE LXIV. If two verbs come together in English, and the se- cond be in the infinitive, it is generally used in the same mood in Spanish; as, "Z^eseo aprender," I wish to ham* ^'Es menester regir nuestras pasiones,^^ it is ne- cessary to rule our passions. 36S SYNTAX. J^ott 1. Verbs denoting to darcy to begins to teach, to learn, t* compel, to submit, to exhort, or invite, to prepare, to assist, to be destin- ed, and to accustom one''s self, generally require a before the infini- tive which they govern; as, "JVb me atrevo a hablar," I dare not speak. '■'■Empece a aprender el Espanol,''^ I began to learn the Spa- nish. "/S<^ puso a estudiar," he set about to study. "Le convide a cenar cowmig-o," I invited him to sup with me. '■'■Meestd siempre ecsortando a vivir oistianainentCf''^ he is always exhorting me to live like a Christian. .iNote 2. Verbs signifying to abstain, to cease, to deprive, tofinish^ govern the infinitive with de; as, "Se abstiene de beber vino,'''' he abstains from drinking wine. "JWe has privado de verla,''"' thou hast deprived me of her sight. ^^Acabare de escribir a la una,'''' I shall leave off writing at one. "Cesaron de atormentarme,'''' they ceased to torment me. J^ote 3. When the preposition to, before an English infinitive, denotes /or the sake of, it is, in Spanish, construed by por; and by para, when that particle means in order to; as, "There are many, who, to speak,'''' [that is, for the sake of speak'ing,] "speak nonsense," haimuchos que por hablar, hablan dispara'.es. "God has granted us the power of speech to convey our ideas," [that is, in order to con.' vey; or, that we might convey our ideas] "to our fellow beings," Dios nos ha concedido el poder del habla para coraunicar nuestras ideas d auestros semejantes. EXERCISES. Men (ought to) abstain themselves from whatever deber abstenerse may lead them to vice. A man ought not to poder conducir mention other person's faults, for he may fall into the Tuencionar falta poder caer en same. (It is better) to prevent evil than to be under valer mas mat bajo the necessity of punishing it. Men have no need castigar necesidad to shun society to be virtuous. Fortune causes* abandonar sodedad virtuoso hacer SYNTAX. 369 mir virtues or vices (to be se^n. ^ )^ He caused himself ver hacerse {to be beloved) by his subjects by his affability. The wnar de vasallo por afabilidad mayor ordered us (to be taken up. ) Men often corregidor mandar prender (suffer themselves) (to be overcome) by temptations, dejarse veneer because they dare not expose themselves to the atreverse esponerse sarcasms of the world. It was not easy (to meet with) sarcasmo hollar a more favourable conjuncture to free ourselves from conjuntura librarse his dominion. To obtain a convenient seat, it dominacion lograr comodo asiento was necessary to go very early, but who (would not temprano ma-- rise betimes) to have the pleasure of hearing his drugar gusto oir speeches? The victory is not yet gained. t The discurso alcanzar capitulation was not signed. There remains to us jirmar quedar * When an English verb being reflective, or expressive of com- mand, governs a passive infinitive; this infinitive must, in Spanish, be always active; as, "She did not suffer herself fo be seen,^^ no se dejo ver. "He caused him to be killed,'*'' le hizo matar. "He or- dered him to be brought,^^ le hizo traer. t The verb quedar, or esiar, with the preposition por, is used be- fore an infinitive, to denote, that the action of this infinitive, is not yet accomplished; as, "The letter is not yet icritten," la carta estd por escribir. J^bs quedan sets leguas por andar. "We have six miles iog-o.'*^ 370 SYNTAX. yet (a great deal) to suiFer. Nothing ought to be left aun mucho padecer undone. Our wrongs remain still unrevenged. We hacer agravio aun vengar ought to suffer with resignation all the evils which we sufiir mal cannot avoid. The republic of Colombia, appears to evitar have conducted herself very discreetly since the conducido discretamente desde day in which she dissolved her chains. Men ought di solver cadena to teach one another to practise virtue. Whoever ensenarse begins to learn a science ought not to leave it, aprender ciencia dejar until he is master of it He who is accustomed {Jiasta que sea) maestro acostumhrar to suffer, knows (how to appreciate) innocent pleasures. padecer apreciar Religion compels us to forego pleasures, and to re- ohligar olvidar deleite re- vere our superiors. verenciar ' VERBS GOVERNING THE INDICATIVE OR SUBJUNCTIVE. RULE LXV. When two verbs come together in English, and the latter is governed in the indicative or subjunctive by a conjunction, the Spanish verb will, in general, admit the same mood 5 as, '^Dijome este que pensaba paitiv mtes de amanecer, y que el tendria midado de disper- SYNTAX. ;Jri tarme^^^ the latter told me that he meant to set out before day -break, and that he would take care to awake me. Jte 4. The subjunctive must be employed after any conjunc- tive conjunction in which que is included; such as, — dado que, granted that; — con tal que, provided that; — amenos que-, unless that; — 710 sea que, lest; — antes qite; — sin que, &i'c. as, "Dado que me escriba no le respondere,''^ granted that you should write me, I shall not answer you. "Con tal que vmd. calle, yo me contentare ,''"' pro- vided you keep silent, I shall be satisfied. "Amenos que restituya el dinero no le perdonardn,''^ tmless he returns the money, they will not forgive him.f The tenses of the subjunctive are frequently directed by the governing; verb in the indicaiive; thus: — 1. If the governing verb be in iho^ present or the/ie- ture imperfect of the indicative, the verb governed ought *The conjunction that, in this case is generally used. t The student should also read attentively the rules given m e1;ymology, from page 112 to page 12L 372 SYNTAX. to be in the present or perfect of the subjunctive 5 as* "Ze suplico a vmcL que venga aqui mmtana,^^ I en- treat you to come here to-morrow. '^Le dire a. mi her- mano que no saiga hasta las tres,^'^ I shulltellmj brother not to go out till three o'clock. ''Dudo que haya Uegado aun,^^ I doubt his having yet arrived. "Celebrare que haya logrado el empleo,^^ I shall be happy to know that he has obtained the situation. 2. If the governing verb be in the imperfect, the perfect indefimte^ or the pluperfect of the indicative, the verb governed ought to be in the imperfect or pluper- fect of the subjunctive, with the terminations ta, or se; as, '''•Mi hermana queria que vinieramos toclos los dias,^^ my sister ivished us to come every day. ^'£1 goherna- dor le permitio que saliese," the governor ;9ermi7f erf him to come out, "Temi que hubiese venido la semana pasada,-^ I was afraid that he would have come last week. 3. If the governing verb be in the perfect definite or the future perfect of the indicative, the verb governed must be in the present or the imperfect -of the subjunc- tive with the termination ra or se; as, *'E1 rei ha man- dado que el embajador vuelva iinediatarnente,^^ the king has ordered that the ambassador should return imme- diately. "Fo le habra dicho su padre que no la vuelva a ver," his father has, no doubt, already told him not to see her again. "Ze habr4 dicho que viniese para decir- selo,''^ he {most likely) told him to come in order to tell it him. These directions are not equally applicable in all cases; regard must be had to the meaning of the govern- ing verb: thus, for instance, verbs of commandvig and of promising can never goyern the verb in the perfect SYNTAX. 373 or pluperfect of the subjunctive, because an order or a promise must necessarily precede its performancce Exercises. Despise not any condition lest it hap- despreciar ninguno situacion {no sea que) aeon* pen to be your own. Consider, man, that (every thing) tecer t todo has had a beginning, and that it will have an end. principio todo Jin Chimalpopoca, in the eleventh year of his reign reinado ordered a great stone to be brought to Mexico. God tnandar piedra truer has told us to fulfil his commandments, and (complir con) mandamiento (we would be saved.)* Although Duhesme, in eighteen salvarse hundred and eight, entered Barcelona in a friendly cntrar de amigahle manner, yet he wished the governor after modo sin embargo querer gobernador some days of his entrance, to give him the keys of that entrada dar Have capital. There are few persons of so penetrating a sublime genius, and so just a judgment as* (to be capable of) ingenio verdadero juicio que poder learning the arts and sciences, without teachers. Is it aprender sin maestro not (to be wondered at,) that this age should be so much de maravillarse siglo * See note 1, rule xviii., page 23%^ r>2 S74 SYNTAX. con-upted? Ferdinand the third ordered Seville to be CDrrom2:)er Sevilla attacked on the 20th of August, l£4r. Though the einbestir invention of machines in England, for the making indquina egecucion of merchandize, be useful to make them cheaper, and mercaderias util barato more abundant, is it not pernicious to those poor human pemicioso beings who were employed in making them? Provided ser emphado we act as God commands us, let the envious world ohrar mandar envidioso say w^hat it pleases. querer OF VERBS REQUIRING CERTAIN PREPOSI- TIONS. OF VERBS REqUIRIXG THE PREPOSITION DE. RULE LXVI. 1. Passive verbs require the preposition de or por' before the noun which denotes the agent: as, ^^Los ma- los son aborrecidos de, or por Dios»^' the wicked are hated by God. ^^El reo fue sentenciado por el juez.'' the culprit was sentenced by the judge. Ji'ote 1. Neuter yerbs, acMve intransitiye, as well as some re- flective verbs, govern a word with de, which denotes what causes their effects; as, Bramar de corage, to roar with passion. Enfer- mar de calentura. to sicken with fever. Tiritar de frio, to shiver with cold. *Por may always be used. But this is not the case in regard to de. For, generally, it may only be employed when the verb ex- presses an effect of the mind; as, ^'El es amado des« padre,'"' he is htcd bv his father. SYNTAX. 375 JVbfe 2. Verbs implying plenty or want, remembrance or oblivion, govern a noun generally preceded by de; as, ^^Lleno la casa de gente," he filled the house ivith people. '■^Acuerdate de tu Criador," remember thy Creator. "Se ha olvidado, de mi,"* he has forgotten me. J^ote 3. Verbs implying blaming, absolving, using, repenting, jeer- ing, 2ind pitying, generally govern a noun also with de; as, "JVo te alabes de valiente,'''' do not extol thy courage. "El se gloria de sabio,''^ he makes a boast of his wisdom. "Se arrepintio de sits delitos,^^ he repented o/his crimes. J^ote 4. Verbs implying distance or separation, generally require tie before the noun which they do not directly govern; as, "Me alejare de mi tierra," I shall remoye far from my country. "Apdr- tate de la ocasion," avoid the opportunity. "Cuando disper to del sueno," when he awoke from his sleep. "Escapdron de la prision," they escaped //om the prison. To all these verbs, may be added the following: Adolecer de enfei-medad, To be seized with illness. Agi-aviarse de algo. To take offence at something. »S.legrarse de las nuevas, To rejoice at the news. Avergonzarse de la respuesta, To be ashamed at the answer. Atemorizarse de algo. To be frightened at something. Airarse de la respuesta, To be angry at the answer. Abochornarse de la conversacion, To blush at the conversation. Abundar de riquezas. To abound in riches. Ahitarse de manjares. To be surfeited with meats. Apercibirse de armas, To provide one's self with arms. Armarse de paciencia. To arm one's self with patienc6. Abstenerse de lafruta. To abstain from fruit. Ahorrar de razones, To spare words. Apearse del caballo, To alight from the horse. Apewrse de sxi opinion^ To alter one's opinion. Apelar de la sentencia. To appeal from the sentence. Aseg^urarse del peligro. To shelter ourselves from the danger. * Except the expression, traer a la memoria, to remind; or olvi' dar, to forget, which admits no preposition whatever; as, "Le trdge d la memona la promesa,^^ I reminded him of the promise. "Olvido la respuesta,'''' he forgot the answer. 376 Begar de su autoridad, Bordar de oro, Bufar de ira, Calarse de agua, Cargar de trigo, Convencerse de lo contrariOj Comerse de envidia^ Confundirse de la que se ve, Convalecer de enfermedad, Degenerar de su nacimiento, Deponer de un empleo, Derivar de otra autoiidad, Descansar del trabajo. Descender de huen linage, Desconfiar de alguno, Desertar del regimientOj Desembarcar de la nave, Descargarsc de w^u, Descargarse de la casa, Desnudarse del veslido, Despoblarse de gtnte, Disgustarse de alguna cosa, Espantarse de la pregwitUf Eslraer una cosa de otra, Fasiidiarse de alga, Llevarse de aiguna pasion, Morir de dolor, Mudarse de casa, Ofenderse de la conducta, Salir del peligro, Zafarse de alguno, SYNTAX. To recede from one's autbopity To embroider in gold. To swell with rage. To be wet through. To load with wheat. To be convinced of the contraiy. To be gnawed with envy. To be confounded at what one sees. To recover from sickness. To degenerate from one's ances- tors. To depose from an employment. To derive from another authori- ty- To pest from labour. To come from a good family. To misirust any one. To desert from the regiment. To debark from the vessel. To exonerate one's self froT» something. To get rid of the houae. To pull off the suit. To depopulate. To be disgusted at something. To be astonished at the question. To extract something from some other. To be cloyed with something. To be led away by some passion, To die of grief. To change one's dwelling. To be affronted at the conduct. To come out safe from danger. To get one's self away from one. EXERCISES. Great men are persecuted bj envy. The West persegidr occidental SYNTAX.' ^77 Indies were discovered by Columbus, in fourteen hun- India descubierto Colon dred and ninety-two. Homer's Iliad (was translated) Ho7nero Iliada traducir by Alexander Pope. When boys cry with passion, Alejamlro llorar colera they ought to be severely reprehended. Some severamente reprehendido people are ashamed to do things which ought to be avergonzarse supposed the most honourable. The crew of the suponer honroso tripulacion vessel in which Columbus was, soon (grew tired) of navio Colon pronto cansarse being at sea, and all was quarrel and dissention. estar al mar (no habia sino) rina ■ O man, remember him who does you a service, and acordarse te favor do not forget, if you can, to do him another. No olividar one can say, I want noboby. Men ought never to no neccsitar nadie praise their wisdom. The last war between France alabarse t sabio idtima and Spain was so inveterate, that the Spaniards inveterado i^iad no mercy on the French, nor the French, on [fener misericordia) the Spaniards. Men ought to (avail themselves) [»:derse of every opportunity of doing good. An honest man ocaaion honrado 32^ 373 SYNTAX. (does not value himself) upon any thing. Thy parents preciarse padre will repent having lectured a simpleton so much. arrepentirse arengado mentecato We did not laugh at hearing him sing, but at seeing reirse oir cantar sino ver him dance. Those things which degenerate from bailar degenerar their nature (are apt) to be admirable if they are good, and most vile if they are bad. We renounce^ vil renunciat more^ easily^ our interests than our pleasures. facilmente OF VERBS REQUIRING THE PREPOSITION A,. RULE LXVII. Verbs of demanding, and of granting or refusings require generally the preposition c, before the noun to which their energy is transmitted^ as, ''Fide perdon a Dios,^^ he asks pardon frojn God. ''El amo nego la Ucencia al criado,'^ the master denied the leave to the servants JNote 1. Verbs implying yielding, or resistance, generally require « before the noun to which their energy is transmitted; as, '■'Sun- que declare ella su parecer, yo nosoi uno de los que som^ten su opinion al dictdmen de otros,'''' altiiough she may declare her opinion, I am not one of those, who submit their opinion to the opinion of others- ^^Me opondre a las leyes,''"' I shall oppose the laws. JVbfe 2. Verbs of comparing generally require a before the nouQ with which the comparison is made; as, "£i hip se parece, al pa- dre," the son resembles the father, '■'■La hija se semeja a la madre," the daughter is like the mother. ^'■Poi' lo demas, no es mas parecido un huevo a otro huevo," as to the rest, one egg is not more like y.nother egg. SYNTAX. 379 JVbfe 3. Verbs implying to belong, to concern, to happen, to play, as well as most of the impersonal verbs, generally require a be- fore the noun to which their energy is directed; as, ^'Pertenecemos si la tierra," we belong to the earth. '■'■Los bienes de un deudor cor- responden a sus acreedores," the property of a debtor belongs to his creditors. ^'Iinporta si los Cristianos," it concerns Christians. ^'■Desgracias acontecen si los incautos," misfortunes happen to the umcary. ^'Jugard a los naipes," he will play at ccfi-ds. ^'■Todo le parecia a ella 'U?iswereo," every thing seemed to her a dream. '^Le convenia a ella la propuesta,''''* the proposal was advantageous to her. Aofe 4. Verbs of condemning, require the punishment to be pre- ceded by the preposition a; as, ^'■Condendron at reo a galeras," they condemned the culprit to the galleys. ^' Sentenciardn al desertor a ser arcabuceado," they will sentence the deserter to be shot. The following and similar Abandonarse a su suerle, Accedzr d la propuesta, Acogerst d alguno, jlcomodarse nl reglamenio, Acostumbrarse al trabajo, Adlierir al niismo dictdmen, Agregarse a otros, Ajustarse d la razon, Apegarse a algo, Arreglarse a lo jiisto, Aparecerse a mnchos, Arrogarse algo a si, Alribuirlo d otros, Ceder a los ruegos, Ceiiirse d poco, Condescender d los ruegos, verbs belong to the above. To abandon one's self to one's lot. To accede to the proposal. To have recourse to somebody. To conform with the regulations To become used to labour. To adhere to the same opinion-. To join one's self to others. To conform to reason. To adhere to something. To regulate one's self by what is just. To become suddenly visible. To arrogate something to one's self. To attribute it to others. To yield to the entreaties. To limit one's self to little. To condescend to the entreaties. * Str, when used in the sense of to belong, requires de instead of 6 before the noun which denotes the possessor; as, la casa es de mi tioj the house belongs to my wide. 380 SYNTAX. Comimicar luz a otra parte, To give light to another place. Consagrarse a Dios, To consecrate one's self to God. Humiltarse a alguno, To humble one's self to some- body. Inspirar la venganza a, alguno, To inspire some one with ven- geance. Participar algo dmuchos, To impart something to many. Pe7initir mueho a alguno^ To allow a great deal to some one. Restituir lo robado a su dueho, To restore what was stolen to its owner. Rendirse a ta razon, To yield to reason. Siigetarse a las leyos, To subject one's self to the laws. EXERCISES. AVe cannot conceal our actions from God, (how ociiltar por s€cret soever they may be.) The Germans evacuated mas secretas que secin Aleinan evaciiar Barcelona where thev could not maintain themselves. manfenerse The adventures of Gil Bias, says Father Isla, were jmdre stolen from Spain, and adopted in France. The French robar aclopfar buy wool of the Spaniards, and then the Spaniards comprar lana Espahol buy it of the French, manufactured. He made war fabricar hacer upon the two sovereigns, and took from them* various soberano * Any preposition governing the objective pronoun in English, must be, in Spanish, changed into that preposition which the governing verb requires. The above from them, is therefore to be translated by Us; this being the pronoun equivalent to the English to them. SYNTAX. 381 places. I (went out) of Ithaca to inquire after my plaza salir preguntar por father, of the other kings who had returned from the vuelto siege of Troy, Men ought always to answer the sitio Troy a deber responder question* put to them with coolness and modesty. pregunta ponerse blandura modestia Speak to God as if you were heard by men. The king oido sent over a great store of gentlemen and warlike t 7iumero senor guerrera people amongst whom he distributed the land. The gente entre tierra Moors determined to be buried under the ruins Moro determinarse [dejarse enterrar) hajo of Toledo, rather than surrender. Mula, and Cartha- antes que entregarse Carta- thagena refused to open thoir gates to Infante Don genu rehusar abrir puerta '■ — — > Alphonzo, but they were obliged to open them in the Alfonzo obligado year one thousand two hundred forty-two. It is neces- sary that we should apply ourselves to improve our aplicarse mejorar minds. It is said that the natives of the Isle of entendimiento natural isla Wight, resemble very much those of the valleys of asemejarse valle Arragon. It concerns princes to judge of their " importar principe juzgar * Whkh are, or ivhich is.^ must always be expressed in Spanish 382 SYNTAX. ministers, but it concerns vassals to submit to ministro vasallo someterse their will. Mexico has ceased to belong to Spain. voluntad pertenecer Tantalus was condemned to a continual thirst, and to Tantalo continuo sed have the water up to his chin, and not (to be able) (junto d barba poder to taste it, probar VERBS REQUIRING EN. RULE LXVIII. Most verbs precede a noun, or an infinitive, with the preposition en, when the noun denotes in what the meaning of the said verb is conspicuous 5 as, "Zo5 con- denaron en las costas," they condemned them in the eoats, ^'EHa crece en virtudes^^^ she increases in viv' tue, ^'Siempre pensare en ti," I shall always think on thee. The following verbs may be included: Jibrasarse en deseos, To burn with desires. Mundar enriqiiezas, To abound in riches. Jlferrarse en sxi opinion, To be tenacious of one's opinion. ».9ndar enpleitos, To be engaged in lawsuits. Barar en tien'a, To run aground. Consentir en la propuestOf To consent to the proposals. Dar en mamas^ To be seized with some mania. Encenegarse en vicios, To wallow in vice. Esmerarse en algo, To exert one's self in any thing. Hallarse en la fiesta^ To be present at the feast. Imponer en algo, To instruct in any thing. Prorumpir en Idgrimas, To burst into tears. Medundar en benejieio de otrQ. To redouud to another's benefit SYNTAX. 383 EXERCISES. It is better not to abound with riches, than to abundar burn with the desires which they excite. If we abrasarse escitar thought oftener on the prodigies of nature; reflecsionar umenudo prodigio (how much more) (would we not admirej the wisdom cuanto mas admirar sabiduria of that Supreme Being who' rules (everything.*) supremo ser gobernar todo lo It is better not to be occupied, than to be thinking of ocupado pensar the ways of doing mischief. It is not those who 7nodo mal burst into tears the soonest,* that**feel the pronimpir Idgrima pronto sentir most. VERBS REQUIRING CON. RULE LXIX. Verbs denoting behaviour generally require con before the persons towards whoui the behaviour is directed; as, '''Ella se ha airado con su hermano," she is aifranted with her brother. ^'El se caso con su pri- ma," he married his cousin. ^'Me desahogare con mi padre," I will unbosom myself to my father. '•''Jus- tarse coil alguno," to settle with any one. Xote 1. VVlien the verb meters" is used in the sense of to med- dle, or to inierfere, it requires con before the noun, if it be a per- son, and en if it be a thing; as, '■'■Aconsejote, amigo, que en adelante * The soonest, should be translated by the comparative mas pronto, without the article. 384 SYNTAX. no te vuelvas a meter con semejante gente,^^ I advise thee, friend, not to meddle in future icith such people. "Wo te metas en negocios ag-enos," do not irt^erfere icith the affairs of others. OBSERVATION. When there is a noun in the sentence denoting the means whereby the action of the vferb is effected, it may be governed with con, de, or a, according to the following rules: — 1st, If the noun signify the instrument or weapon with which the action was done, it requires con before it; as, "£Z le mato con el pie," he killed him with the foot; "con un punal," xcith a poniard;'''' "con un martillo," with a hammer. 2d, If the noun be the name of the in- jury or blow given with the weapon or instrument, it requires to be preceded by de or con when used in the singular number, and by a when in the plural; as, '■^Ellt mato de or con un puntapie," he killed him with a Jc'ick; "a puntapies," icilh kicks; "de w con una pufialada,"* icith a stab of a poniard; "apuualadas,"?)!/ several slabs with a poniard; "de or con un marlillazo," toith the blow of a Jiammer; "a martillazos,"' by giving several blows with a hammer. • EXERCISES. That man who fulfils his duty, and acts (according cumplir obrar segun to) the precepts of our Holy Mother, the church, will precept santo inglesia (undoubtedly) obtain glory. We ought to behave sin duda portarse prudently (as w ell) to our friends as to our {con prudencia) asi coino enemies. Mothers sometinaes suffocate their children sufocar hyo * It is a peculiaritj' of the Spanish language that, by adding the syllable azo, oilo, &:c. to the name of an object, the compound word thus formed, is then expressive of a blow with the object itself. For instance: tintero, inkstand — tinterazo, a blow with an ink- stand; — libro, book — librazo, a blow with a book; — canon, gun — cahcnazo, a shot with a gun; — cwhillo, a knife— cuchiUada, a stab, or a blow with a knii<\ 1 SYNTAX. 385 with caresses, a fault as reprehensible as it is per- caricia costumbre per- nicious to the children. How many persons of (un- nicioso nino ir- questionable character,) did not the negroes in St. reprehensible conducfa ' Santo Domingo kill with blows, with stabs, and (in the garrotazo cucMllada de most atrocious manner that ever was heai'd nn modo mas atroz que ninugiino de los que antes se of before.) from 1791, to 1801. They threw a habia oido hast a echar curtain down with a single (shot of their gun. ) cartina (en tierra) solo cahonazo OF PREPOSITIONS REQUIRED BY VERBS OF MOTION. RULE LXX. Verbs implying motion to, towards or from a place, govern the noun denoting whence the motion proceeds with de, the noun wiiich shows its direction with a; and the noun expressing tlie space through which it passes with por; example: ''''Fueron de Londres a Chel- sea, por el parque,^"^ they went from London fo Chelsea, through the park. '^Vengo de la comedia, y me vol adonde esticve anoche, y donde pienso quedarme hasta mahana,^^ I corae fro7n the play, and am going whither I was last night, and where I think I shall stay till to- morrow. J^ote 1. When we mean to denote only the place to which the moving body seems directed, we use hmia or para, instead of a; as, "Fa hacia el Parque, pero no creo que llegue alld,^^ he is going S3 386 SYNTAX. towards the park, but 1 don't imagine he will reach it. "/SaJio para Londres,''^ he set out/or London. JsTote 2. The verb volver is also used before an infinitive, when we mean to denote the repeating of the action implied in the in- finitive; as, '■'■Volvl a leer la carta ^'*'' I read the letter over once more. " Volverd a pedirlo,''^ he will ask for it again. " Volvimos a entrar en la casa,''^ we re-entered the house. The following verbs belong to the above rule: *%alanzarse a los peligros, To rush on danger. Mordar una nave a olra. To bring one ship along side of another. ^pelar a otro tribunal, To appeal to another court. Jlpropincuarse a alguno^ To draw nigh any one. Arrojarse a la hatalla, To dart forwards at the battle. Jlxisentarse de Madrid, To quit Madrid. Balancear a tal parte, To vibrate towards such a side. Caminar por el monte, To travel over or through the mountain. Ladearse a tal parte, To incline to such a side. Jicercarse a, la lumbre, To draw nigh the fire. Copverfirs Id Dies, To turn tp God. Cmcimir a la junta, To attend the meeting. Mandarla carta a Espaha, To send the letter to Spain. Traer vinos de Francia, To bring wines from France. Emhiar a las Indias, To send to the Indies. EXERCISES. The promptitude with which men sometimes pass p res fez a pasar from the bitterest grief to the greatest joy, is emargo dolor alegria really astonishing. The rapidity with which {en realidad) asombroso rapidez light passes is prodigious; only being seven or luz pasar prodigioso solamente est a eight minutes in its progression from the sun ^o the mimito ' ■ • - sol SYNTAX. 387 earth; in* this short space of time traversing^ se- tierra corto espacio travesar veral millions of miles. Through (how many) dangers milla por cuantos peligro did not the great American hero pass, and he always he roe (came out) of them without the least injury. He salir sin menor daho was going towards Rome, when (he was attacked) by a asaltar gang of (highwaymen.) Columbus went to the courts cuadriUa ladron Colon of England and Portugal (to inform) them of the dar noticia existence of a new world, and he was, in both, heard ecsistencia {las dos) with universal contempt. He did not understand the desprecio entendcr letter, and he read it again. (Not being able) to carta leer no pudiendo salir succeed, he again tried the experiment. hien hacer prueba OBSERVATION OX gustar AXD f altar. There are two neuter transitive verbs in the Spanish language, s^itstar and fallar; which, when translated into English by to likty and to want, or to be in icant of. the sentence requires a different construction from that which the student would at first imagine. As by means of the preposition a, (which, when those parts of grammar are used in the above sense, is absolutely necessary,) their action is transmitted to him that forms the nominative case, which nominative case must, in Spanish, be the objec- tive; and the Spanish objective, the English nominative. Thus, for instance: "/ like him," el me ^ista a mi. [that is, Ae pleases me.] "/ want books," me faltan libvQS. [that is, to me hooks are J88 .SYNTAX. necessary.] This kind of sentence begins generally with the pre- position a, and if it govern the third person, the additional pronoun le or les, is employed. [See the second and third paragraphs of page 262;] as, -'A Dios no le falta logica, ni la usa,''^ God neither wants logic, nor ^tses it. "A los hombres siempre les falta algo,''^ men are always in ivunt of something. "A eltos no les gusto et fiano," they did not like the evil. Tlie verb pesar, to be sorry for, or to, has this same peculiarity, with this exception, that it is only used before an infinitive with the preposition de, [of;] as, for example, ^'Jl ml me pesa de ha- bcrlo heclio," / am sorry to have done it. EXERCISES. When men have all they wanted before, new wants falta urise. I did not like the manner in which they aacer moclo treated him. The audience liked the orator. The trafar audit orio poor are always in want of riches; and the rich riqueza frequently want charity. It is not those who [muchas veces) caridad have sublime genius and profound erudition that ■ . ingenio men like the most, but those who have the best heart sino t and the greatest judgment. The fortress was in want of provisions, and surrendered to the besiegers. He vzveres entregarse sitiador who is sorry for having committed wrong, is gene- hecho daho vous, and may become good. Seeing the many poder {Jlegar a 8er) viendo SYNTAX. 389 benefits wMcFi we receive from the bountiful hand of favor bundadoso the Almighty; who can be so vile, as not to be Todopoderoso vil i^orry to have committed so many irreverences against irreverencia Him. ADVERBS. RULE LXXI. Most of the adverbs in mente, are formed from ad^ jectives; as, from cartes, polite, cortesmente, politely; from comun, common,^ comimmente^ commonly. If the adjective have two terminations, the feminine should be selected to form the adverb; thus: alto, alta, high; altamente, highly: — piadoso, pious; piadosamente, pious- ly. When two or more of these adverbs in mente^. modify the same verb, all the adverbs lose the termina- tion mente, except the last; thus for instance, "j&/ ha- bla clara y elegantamente," he speaks dearly and ele- gantly. ''Cuando calumnian a tu amigo abierta y desca- radamente, dejiende su caiisa,'^^ when thy friend is ca- lumniated, openly and boldly defend his cause. iN'ote 1. Adverbs of manner are mostly placed after the verbj as, ^'■Lo habia dicho frecuentemente," he had frequently said it, **Ab hemos hecho bien," we have not done xoell. J^ote 9.. Sometimes the abverb begins the sentence, for the sake of elegance; as, "Imediamente me puse en marcha,^^ I marched immediately. JSoie 3. Mas, and menos, -when they da not begin the sentence, should follow the verb which they modify, as, ^*Q,ueria mas de lo que me dieron,''^ I wanted more than they gave me.. "Tengo meaoa de lo que peiisa&a," I have less than I thought. . 33* 390 SYNTAX. JVbfe 4. Sz and no being used as an objective case to some verbs, require que before them, unless they be used as substan- tives; as, "You say yes and 1 say wo," vmd. dice que si, y yo digo que no. "He answered not a icordy" no respondio ni un si ni wnno. OBSERVATION ON jcmos, nuHca, no, AND 7nui. Jamas, is sometimes coupled with nunca, never, and with siemprBf ever, to render the expression more energetic; as, ^^JVunca jamas lo hare,'''' I shall never do it. "Que vives y reines por siempre jamas,''"' who livest and reignest for ever and ever. Two negatives in the Spanish language, strengthen the nega~ tion; as, "A^o tengo nada,'''' I have nothing. ".ATo he visto a nadie,^'' 1 have seen nobody. If the negative adverb commences the sen- tence, the no then cannot be used; as, ^^nada fewg-o," I have no- thing; — A nadie he visto. Sac. J\lui, which is translated by very, cannot qualify a verb, in such cases, mucho must be used; as, "J)fe gusta mucho,'''' 1 like him very much. '■^ Se asemrja a su pudYe mucho,'''' he resembles his father very much. OF PREPOSITIONS. PULE LXXII. Prepositions govern the objective case; as, ''PocU- mos ser buenos y felices, sin riquezas, we may be good and happy without riches. C\''ote 1. The preposition segun, has the peculiarity of beir^g used alone with a verb in its indicative or subjunctive mood;, as, ^^Segun creo,'''' according to what T believe. '•'■Entonces el arriero segun swpe con et tiempo,^'' then the carrier, as I was afterwards informed. EXERCISES ON PREPOSITIONS AND ADVERBS. A friend who candidly and judiciously w^arns us candido juicioso advertir ef our faults, is a treasure which we cannot easily yerro tesora facU SYNTAX. 391 acquire, nor sufficiently appreciate. When the gen- adquirir suficiente apreciar eral asked him whether he did not want more pregimtar si necesitar than those hundred men to conquer the enemj, he conquistar answered, no. Never despise your inferiors^ responder despreciar — — (on the) contrary, treat them with kindness and al trafar cariho affability, and relieve them when they are in need. afabilidad socorrer (rnenesferoso) man never let a day* pass^ without giving thanks dejar sin gracia to the Almighty for all the benefits he has ( Todopoderoso) heneficio bestowed upon you. After she had read the history conceder t of Nero, she exclaimed with a doleful voice, Neron esdamar lastimoso never, no, never (would have I thought) that men creer (could become) so cruel and depraved. It is better poder hacerse depravado to suffer with resignation, than with impatience, the sufrir impaciencia calamities of this world. Youth is very much in- ccdamidad mundo clined to vice. Persons sometimes offend others {la gente) ofender very much, without wishing to do so.* No one can be desear *When so^ stands for if, it is always construed lo; as, "You ?ire rich, but I am not so,''"' vmd. es rico, pero yo no lo soi, "It is 392 SYNTAX. pronounced happy before his death. Let us not delay llamar diJatar until to-morrow, to become good. Respiration is the hacerse principal and most essential function of animal life. funcion vida Children, discountenanced by their parents for nino {tratados confrialdad) padre any fault, find refuge in the caresses of foolish fait a refugio caricia malvado flatterers. That the authority of man should prevail lisongero autoridad reinar with men, either against or above reason, t contra 6 (mas de lo qve es razonahle) is no part of our belief. Our antipodes are not beneath fe antipoda us, nor are we beneath them. The art of engraving ni esculpir on copper, was invented at Florence, by a goldsmith en bronce inventar Florencia platero named Finguerra, in the beginning of the sixteenth llamar principio century. If we are all informed of what has been srglo informar before us, we shall not be entirely ignorant of what {del todo) is to be after us. aay intention to come, and see you; — well, do so," /engro inlencwn (te venir a verle: bien hdgalo. SYNTAX. 393 OF CONJUNCTIONS.- RULE LXXIII. The conjunction hut, not being preceded by a nega- tive, is expressed by pew, or mas; and after a negative, it is construed sino; as, "Fo soi rico, pero or mas no soi dichoso,'^ I am rich, but I am not happy. *'i\^o es dichoso, sino rico,^^ he is not happy, but rich. '^Todos fueron alia, pero or mas sw hermano llego el primero,^^ they all went thither, but his brother arrived the first. '^ No fueron el lunes sino el martes,^^ they did not go on Monday, but on Tuesday. J^ote 1. It is to be observed, that although sino is the most pro- per to be used after a negative, pero, or mas are preferable when the verb is repeated; as, "They did not go on Monday, hut they went on Tuesday," no fueron el Lunes, pero, or mas fueron el Martes.] Jfote 2. The exceptive but being preceded by an interrogative pronoun, or by a negative, is rendered by sino; and not foiiowing a negative, is construed menosj as, "^:Quic/i lo dijo sino nnc/.?" who said it but you? "£/ no come sino fruta,'''' he cats nothing hut fruit. "JE^ coine todo menos la corltzu,''' he eats all but the rind. ''Todos fueron alia menos su hermanu,'''' they all went thither but his brother. J^ote 3. When the word hut is used as a substitute for some other words, it is generally rendered, in Spanish, by the words which it represents. Thus: He was hardly gone out but (ivhen) the house fell down, apenas hvbo salido cuando se cayo la casa. But (if it were 7iot) for me, he would die with cold, si no fuera por mi el se moriria de frio. But that I thmk (if I did not think that) it would vex thee, I would tell it thee, si yo no pensara que le molestase, se lo diria. *See pages 188, 189 and 190. t Pero is sometimes used as a substantive, and then it signifies defect; as, ella no tiene pero, she has no blemish. 394 SYNTAX. There is no one but is (that is not) a sinner, no hai ninguo que no sea pecador. He went no day into the country but he returned (that he return- ed not) loaded, nins:un dia fue at campo que no volvio cargado, I have but (only) one servant, tengo solo tin criado. I came but (I came not till) yesterday, no viene hasta ayer. That means no more but (than) to tell me to go away, eso no quiere decir mas que decirme que me vaya. The annexed conjunctions are translated in the follow- ing manner: t^s is 007710; example: black as pitch, negro como la pez. As being followed by so, is expressed asi como; exam- ple: as he rewards virtue, so he punishes vice, asi como premia la virtud, asi castiga el vicio. As meaning tvJien, is cuando; example: we met her as we were going home, la encontrdmos cuando ibamos a casa. Neither and nor is ni; example: he will neither sell it 7ior give it, no quiere venderlu nl darlo. Neither^ at the end of a sentence, is translated tampoco; as, nor I neither^ ni yo tampoco.* Rather: this adverb, when used as an adversative con- junction, is resolved into antes or antes bien; exam- ple: I owe him nothing, rather [on the contrary] he owes me something, yo no le debo nada, antes or a-ucs bien el me debe algo. Whether is si; example: tell me whether he will come or not^ digame vmd. si el vendrd 6 no. Whether^ in phrases like the following, is expressed by * When either comes accompanied by a negative, it is translated like neither; example: I will not see them, nor she either. "Fo no quiero verlos, 7ii ella tampoco." SYNTAX. 395 que; example : lohether he comes or not, I don't care any thing, que venga 6 que no venga, no se me da ncida, Botli, meaning as well ns^ is translated either asi coma, or tanfo conio; as asi el como yo vendremes, both he and I will come; tanto el conochniento de libros^ como de hotnbres es necesario; both the knowledge of books and men, is necessary. However^ or howsoever, is rendered, jpor or por mas; as, however great a man may be, he must always be humble, por grande que sea un hombre, debe siempre ser humilde; how horrid soever vice may be, it will always find followers, por mas horrible que sea el vicio, siempre encuentra secuaces. EXAMPLES. None but God can know our thoughts. Every thing conocer but the hour of death is-uncertain. I do not complain quejarse of the law, but of her servants. Death is terrible, but ministro judgment will be more so: let us not fear then the juicio lo pjues hour of death, but the day of judgment. What his juicio valour achieved was much, but what his mind suffered ob ra r esp iritu padecer, was more. Fame is the rev/ard of conquerors, but fama recompensa conquistador virtue will have another recompense. Of what ser\nce premio servicio was the death of Nero to the Romans, but to make Neron de dar 396 SYNTAX. an opening for Otho and Vitellius? The happiness entrada a Oion Vitelio dicha of a liberal and opulent man, does not consist in dadivoso rico having riches, but in spending them, and not only in gastar spending them, but in spending them well. But for thee, niY son would have been murdered. Without asesinar friendship, the world would be but a wilderness. Why desierto does he grieve? He ought rather to rejoice at seeing ajligh se deber alegrarse himself among us. As he lived, so he died. Whether thou be rich or poor, thou art not less obliged to be virtuous. He died on the twenty-fifth, as the clock fallecer reloj struck three. We travelled without knov/ing whether dar saber it would be possible to arrive before day -break. I did llegar amanecer not like his verses, nor his prose either. For a person gustar verso prosa to succeed, he must possess both genius and {teller buen escito) ingenio judgment. Both vice and virtue are frequently mis- equi' taken. How polite soever we may be, we must always vocar nrbano SYNTAX. ' 397' be dignified. However certain a man may be of (guardar dignidad) cierto a thing, he should, (on no occabion,) be positive. deber nunca positivo OF INTERJECTIONS.* RULE LXXIV. Adjectives employed as interjections, require de be- fore the noun to which they are applied; as, "Pobre de mi padreP^ oh! mj poor father! "Desdichada de mi madreP'^ oh! my unhappy mother! J^oie 1. The interjection ai, when used like the English 100, requires de before the following noun; as, ai de ti! ivo to thee! ;ai de aquellos que mueren en sus pecados! too to them who die in their sins! JsTote 2. The interjection ete is used with the personal pronouns only, and always joined to the objective case; as, "Etela que ric?ie."' lo she comes! "Eteme aquitjafuera de OvudoP'' behold me here, or, tb here am I, already out of Ovicdo! EXERCISES. Oh, my father! my friend! how gi-eat has been my ingratitude! Oh, piety! oh, virtue! how insensible have ingratitud I been to thy charms! Unhappy we, how shall we encanto have courage to fight with our friends! Happy thou, valor pelear Telemachus! with such a guide thou hast nothing to fear! Wo to me, should death come before I am pre- jD re- pared! Lo, here they come ! prepared to insult us. parar insidtar, * See page 190, 398 SYNTAX. OBSERVATION. It was considered expedient to give, in the first edition of this grammar, a specimen of the various modes of translation which had been heretofore adopted. Experience has taught us, that they increased the size of the book, without affording any imme- diate or Demote utility to the student. As it has always been our object to render this grammar, as useful and acceptable as study and reflection would permit us, w^e have substituted in place of those models, a few short extracts, which will serve both as pro- miscuous exercises of the syntactical rules, and lessons to pre- pare the student for translation and composition. PRUDENCE. Hear the words of prudence, (give heed unto) her prudencia atender a counsels, and store them in thine heart: her max- ^ consejo guardar mac- ims are universal, and all the virtues (lean upon) her: sima defender she is the guide and mistress of human ]ife.« Put a guia dueno f bridle on thy tongue; set a guard before thy lips, freno d lengua poner guarda d labio lest the words of thine own mouth destroy thy i^paraque) {no destruir) peace. Let him who (scofteth at) the lame, (take care) burlarse cojo guardarse that he (halt not himself:) whoever speaketh of cogear another's failings wdth pleasure, shall hear of his own falia deleite with (bitterness of heart.) Of much speaking cometh amargura repentance, but in silence is safety. (Boast nrrepenthniento (el siiencio) teller seguridad SYNTAX. 399 not of thyself,) tor it (shall bring) contempt upon alabarse eso grangear tnenosprecio t thee: neither deride another, for it is dangerous. biirlarse j^eligroso ' DODSLEY. GRATITUDE. There is not a more pleasing exercise of the deleifabie operacion mind than gratitude. It is accompanied (coi'azon humano) with so gi-eat inward satisfaction, that the duty interior ohligacioii is sufficiently rewarded by the performancCv quedar recompensar ohra It is not, like the practice of many other virtues, como practica difficult and painful; but attended with so much plea- pe7ioso seguh' de- sure, that were there no positive command which hiie mcmdato enjoined it, nor any recompense (laid up) for it ordenar recompensa preparar hereafter, a generous mind would (indulge in) {en el otro mimdo) alma practicar it for i\iQ gratification it affords. — — ofrecer addisox^ DISCRETION. There are many shining qualities in the mind brillante prenda entemlimi'- 400 SYNTAX. of man; but there is none* so useful as discretion: ento (it is this) which gives a value to all the rest, est a es la aprecio demas which sets them (at work) in their proper times * [la que) hacer trahajar and places, and turns them to the advantage of lifgar iy la que) volver vcnfaja the person who is possessed of them. Without it> learn- cono- ing is pedantry; wut, impertinence; and vir- I'imiento pcdanteria ingenio impcrtincncia tue itself, looks like weakness. Discretion is mismo {tener apariencia de) flaqueza ibe perfection of reason, and a guide to us in all the razon guia t t duties of life; and does not only make a man ohligacion solo the master of his own parts, but also of t d.ueho propio calidad sino fambien (de other men's. The discreet man (finds out) the las de otros homhres.) encontrar lalents of those he converses with, and knows how hahlar t to apply them to proper uses. lie carries his aplicar adecuado fin llevar thoughts to the end of every action, and pensamlento termino ohra considers the^ most distant, as^ (well as) the most remoto asi como immediate effects^ of it. imediato t t addison. * Which is, being understood, it must, in Spanish, be supplied by qiiesea- SYNTAX. 401 EMPLOYMENT OF TIME. Time is precious, life short, (and consequently) not corto por consigidente ni I moment should be lost. Sensible men know hov/ deber perder sensato t to make the most of time, (and put out their whole y to do lo emplean en sum to interest.) They are never idle, but conti- cosas utiles ocioso nually employed in rational amusements or study. divertimiento It is a universal maxim, that idleness is the mother ociosidad of vice. Itis, ^ however,' certain,- that (de todos los vicios) (sin embargo) laziness is the inheritance of fools^ and nothing indolencia propiedad tonto can be more despicable than a sluggard. Whatever despreciable haragan business you* have, do it the first moment you ocupacion cumplir al t can, never by halves, but finish it without interrupt 7nitad ferminar tion, if possible. [si es posible) chesterfield. TRUE AND FALSE MODESTY. Nothing is more admirable than true mudesty. verdadero modestia * Addressing, in this general manner, tu should always be used, in Spanish. 34* 402 SYNTAX. and nothing is more contemptible than the false. The aborrecible falso one guards virtue, the other betrays it. True modesty proteger vender is ashamed to do any thing that is repugnant to the repugnante rules of right reason: false modesty is ashamed to regia huena razon do any thing that is opposite to the humour of the contrario himiour company. True modesty avoids every thing that is compaha - evitar criminal, false modesty every tiling that is unfashionable. {no es de moda) The latter is only a general indetermined instinct: solo indeterminado instincto the former is that instinct, limited and circumscribed {que se circunscribe) by the rules of prudence and religion. JUDGMENT. Deeply impress your mind with the vast profundamente grabar {en tu) alma t grande importance of a sound judgment, and the rich and necesidad solido juicio preciosa inestimable advantages of right reasoning. Review ventaja verdadero discurrir repasar the instances of your own misconduct in life, and caso {impropia conduta) SYNTAX. 40S observe how many follies and sorrows (jou had es- locura pesar ahorrarse caped) if from your (early years,) you had taken desde mocedad due pains to judge aright concerning persons^ {el trabajo) juzgar verdaderamente de times, and things. Do not hover always on the tiempo pararse en surface of things, or ('take up) suddenly with mere superficie ni ceder [de repente) a mero appearances, for this will fill the mind with aparienda pues llenar entendimiento errors and prejudices, and give it an ill habit of error preocupacion (le acostumbraria a mal) thinking; but penetrate into the depth of matters (as pensar t penetrar t fondo materia tanto far as) your time and circumstances will allow. (:omo {te lo permitan) WATTS, PART IV. PROSODY. That part of grammar which treats of the aceent, Jiiid establishes the laws of versification^ is called Prosody. OBSERVATION. In Orthography, pages -4 7, 48, 49, we spoke of accent as a written sign, denoting that the vowel upon which it is placed, must be pronounced with more force, than any other letter in the same word. The accent in prosody is taken in a different sense. It refers not to that orthographical mark, but to the stress, by which a certain letter of every word is distingtiished from the rest. Majesty seems to be inherent in the Spanish language, and this quality is very apparent in its pronunciation. No syllable* or consonant is ever accented; vowels only are susceptible of this distinction. The consequence of this custom is, that every word has a vowe] long, which must necessarily tend to render this language full and sonorous. In some words, the vowel upon which the stress is placed, is distinsuished by that mark or acute accent mentionjid in Or- thography. But, in some others, the vowel is considered suffi- ciently conspicuous without any sign Avhatever. Hence the student must not onlj know the accented vowel of every word, but those words which require this vowel to be designated by that orthographical accent. It is presumed that this task may, in a great measure, be compassed by carefully perusing the rules which are now laid down. They will, we are satisfied, guide i:he scholar in all instances, with regard to the laying of the * Very frequently we speak of the accented syllable, instead of- the accented vowel of a word. PROSODY. 405 stress on the right vowel of every word in reading; and if they do not, in the same manner, present to his view all the words that require the accent to be marked; practice will soon make him familiar with those few cases Avhich theory could not have explained, but by numerous and confused rules. The consideration that no individual can obtain a good pro- nunciation unless he be well acquainted with this part of gram- mar, has induced us to use our utmost exertions in endeavour- ing to render the Spanish accent precise, clear and easy of •acquisition. If the student should find that this has been accom- plished, we shall consider our toils fully repaid. ACCENT. P.ULE I. Every monosyllable has a vowel long,* without any accent; as, caU lime; can^ dog; so/, salt.t EXCEPTIONS. 1. Those monosyllables which have two significations, are ac- cented Avhen they are slowly pronounced; as, el, the; el, he; se^ itself; se, I know. 2. The vowels c, e, c, w, when used by themselves, are accent- ed; as, void Madrid, I am going to INIadrid; padre e hijo, father •and son: el 6 yo, either he or I; dlez u once^X^xn. or eleven. RULE II. In words of two or more syllables ending in a vowel, the stress is laid on the vowel before the last, without any marked accent; a.s^pano, cloth;* verrfe, green; tin- few, inkstand; hortelano^ gardener; almirantazgo, admiralty-court. * The vowel upon which the stress is laid, is, in Spanish, called aguda, or lar^a, [acute, or long.] t Some of these rules have already been given in Orthography, speaking of the accent as a sign. 406 PROSODY. EXCEPTIONS. 1. The accent will be written in those words composed of the first and third person of the preterite, or any person of the future indicative, and a pronoun; as, temile, I feared him; terminose, it was terminated; concluyolo, he concluded it; amardnse, they will love themselves. 2. The esdrujulos* have always the antepenult vowel long; and it is always marked with the accent; as, impetu, impulse; cdmara, chamber; santisimo^ most holy; altilocuo, using high sound- ing words. Under these words are considered those which are formed from a verb and a pronoun; as, oyeme, hear me) deten- ganse, let them stop. 3. Any tense of a verb to which two pronouns are affixed, have the fourth vowel (counting from the last,) long, and marked with the accent, except the tenses mentioned in the first exception of this rule, which have the antepenult long and accented; as detengamelos, let them be stopped for me; di3;eronse\o, they said it to them; b'lscantele, let them seek him for you; traerdselo, he will bring it to her; //eucselo, you took it away. 4. The adverbs terminating in mente, follow, in every respect, the adjectives from which they were formed; as, indastriosa-mente; industriously; bdrbara-menie, barbarously. * The esdriijidos are those words which, ending in one or two vowels, and consisting of more than two syllables, are accented on the antepenult vowel. This is one of those instances in which theory could not show the number of these esdrujulos, unless they were given in a catalogue, which, as it would be very numerous, could not be acquired without considerable labour. The arrangement of the above rules, supersedes, we think, the necessity of all this trouble. The student knows well, that ac- cording to the 2d exception to Rule II. the esdritjulos are marked with the accent; no mistake can therefore be committed in pro- nouncing them. This kind of words is also very easily distin- guished, and a little practice in reading, will educate the scholar's ear in a manner, as to place beyond difficulty, this part of Pro^' sody. PROSODY. 4or 5. There are some vowels, which, contrary to the present rule, have the last vowel long. In this case it always bears the accent; as, alia, there; aqui, here; cafe, coffee-house ,^ Perw, Peru. RULE III. Words ending in a diphthong, or two vowels, have their penult vowel long, without being accented j as, *'serio, serious; feria, fair; mutiio, mutual 5 duo, duettoj reo, culprit. EXCEPTION. 1. The orthographical accent will be used in all those words, the last syllable of which is long;* as, minue, minuet; J\Ionjui, Monjui, [a fortress in Catalonia.] RULE IV. Words of three or more syllables, terminating in the diphthongs ia, ie,i io, iia, ue, no,, have generally their penult long, without the marked accent^ as, con- cordia, concord; emperio, empire; desaguo, discharge of water; desague, channel. EXCEPTIONS. 1. When the above terminating; vowels are not a diphthong, the accent must be written on which ever of the two vowels the stress happens to be laid; as, Jilosofia, philosophy; ganzua, a picklock. RULE y. Words which end in ae, co, au, eo, ec, oe, 00, (these letters not being diphthongs,) are accented on the penult without anv mark; as, ^*bacalao, codfish; kermosea, he beautifies; arcabuceo, the act of shooting criminals; lincdoe, aloes; Feijoo, Feijoo; (the name of a great Spa- nish writer] loo, I praise. * A little practice will soon make the student acquainted with these. t A diphthong is considered like a single vowel, although both '-^wels are fuily pronounced. 408 PROSODY. EXCEPTIONS. When the above vowels are diphthongs, the word to which they belong, has the antepenult long, and marked with an accent; as, Cesdrea, imperial; eterea, etherial; ciUdneo, cutaneous; momentaneo, momentary; heroe, hero. RULE VI. Words ending in a consonant have the last vowel long, but not marked with the accent; as, caridad^ cha- rity; ahnacen, store-house; albahil, bricklayer; borrador, the rough copy of any writing; correr, to run; amar, to love; advertii\ to take notice of. EXCEPTIONS. All words ending in a consonant, which have not the last vowel long; the vowel upon Avhich the stress is laid, must be marked With the accent. The number of these words is very trifling, in comparison to those which come under the general rule, yet we think it too considerable for insertion. The following will serve as examples, and, it is believed, to guide the student in all the rest: arhol^ tree; volumen, volume-; rlrgen, virgin; indrtir, martyr; crisis, crisis; alfertz, ensign; Aristotdes, Aristotle. RULE VII. The plural follow the singular of words in every respect whatever; as, '•-drhol^ drbohs^ trees; hortelano, konelatios, gardeners; espiritu, espiritus^ spirits. RULES TO KNOW ON WHICH VOWEL TO LAY THE STRESS IN THE TENSES OF VERBS.* 1. If the termination of the tense of a verb be an a. e, or 0, alone, or followed by n or s, the penult vowel * They comprise all the regular, and many of the irregular yerbs, PROSODY. 409 is aeeented;* as, eonsidero, I consider 5 amas, you love; Henen, they have. Except the first and third persons singular of the perfect indi- cative, the last vowel of which is always accented; as, considers, I considered; eonsidero, he considered. 2. Verbs have the accent on the first vowel of the termination,! if this consist of more than one vowel; as, consider-dba, I considered; consider-dhamos^ we consi- dered; consider 'dramos; consider-as emos. Except the future indicative, which has the accent always 011 the second voAvel of the termination; as, considcr-are ; am-ards; eonsider-aremos. S. If the termination of a verb contain an /, either alone, or immediately followed by an a, or an 5, the accent is on the t; as, correspondi; correspondia-n; preservar-iais; atormentar-iais; siifr-is. 4. Verbs ending in (/, or r, are always long; consi- derad^ corresponded^ venid; correr^ consegidr. No vowels upon which the stress is laid in the tenses of verbs, will be marked %\ith the acute accent, but those in the following tenses: 1. The first and second persons plural of the imper- fect indicative, will have the vowel, upon which the stress happens to be laid, marked with the accent; as, amdbainos; escribiamos; confesdbais; const ruiais. 2. All the persons of the preterite, the first person plural excepted; as, ame^ sacdste, convido, vendimos. consumisteis, enternecieron. * We shall then give rules which will show the persons that require the accented vawel marked. 7 The termination of a verb is the syllable or syllables added to its radicals, seepages 101 to 108. 35 410 PROSODY. 3. All the persons of the future indicative^ sls, ado- lecere, concluirds, celehrard, sorprenderemos, conten- dreis, lisongeardn. 4. The first and second persons plural of the three imperfects, and of the future, of the subjunctive; as, an- duvieramos, tendrian, amariamos, partieremos, compre- hendiereis. I After very mature reflection, we have decided to write the versification in Spanish. The reasons which have prevented us from presenting this treatise in English, are explained at the end of this grammar, where it has been deemed expedient to place t)iis second part of Prosody.] APPENDIX. COLLOQUIAL IDIOMS. To act as, hacer de; as, ''^He acted as a teacher dur- ing the voyage," hizo de maestro durante el viage. To afford, estar 6 hallarse en estado de, tener los me- dios; as, ''How many things would one buy if he could &fford its^^ cuantas cosas no compraria uno si tuviese los medios. To agree, speaking of eating, is rendered by sentar hien; as, "Chocolate does not agree ivith me," el cho- colate no me sienta bien. Speaking of climates and seasons, by acomodar; as, ''The climate of Havana does not agree with me," el clima de la Havana no me acomoda. Amiss if, when it is followed by not to be, is rendered hj no ser fiiera del easo; as, "It would not he amiss if you ^vent thither," no seria fuera del caso que vmd. vaya alia. To answer, corresponder, in such expressions as the following. "This year's crop does not ansiver our ex- pectations," la cosecha de este ano, no corresponde a. nuestras esperanzas. To answer for, {i. e. to stand security for,) salir fia* dor; as, "I loill answer for him," yo saldre fiador por el. Answer, hacer or acomodar, "I have a pair of shoes which ivill ansiver 3^ou," tengo un par de zapatos que le acomodaran. 412 APPENDIX. To avail one's self of an opportunity^, vahrse de ia- f*casio7i. To became, hacerse; '*He became rich after his mo- (lier's death," se hizo rico despues de la muerte de su madre. To become, meterse; he became a priest, a soldier, &c. &c., se metio sacerdote, soldado, 4'C. To become, speaking of dress, is translated caer^ or seniar; as, "This coat does not become you well," esta casaca no h cae bien. To become, is translated ser, in such expressions as, "What will become of my father?" que sera de mi padre? To become, ir a parar, hacerse; as, "What has become of my hat?" que se ha hecho de mi sombrero? "If such maxims and such practices prevail, what is become of national liberty?" ^si tales macsimas y tales costicmbres prevalecen, d donde ha ido a parar la liber- tad nacionul? To be the dupe, enganar, quedar burlado; "Rome was the dupe of the manner in which Nero began to Feign," los principios del reinado de Neron, engaiiaron a los Romano s. To be in tlie right, tener razon; to be in the wrong, no tener razon; "He is in the right to complain," tiene razon de quejarse. To be obliged, quedar agradecido a uno; as, "/ am very much obliged to you," le quedo mui agradecido. To be near, estar a pique de, or por poco; as, "I was very near falling," por poco me cai, or, estuve a pique de caerme. To be fond, gustar d unoi as, "J am fond of read- ing," d mi me gusta el leer. APPENDIX, 413 To be sure not, giiardarse Men de; as, "Carry this letter to him, but be sure not to tell him who sent you," llevale esta carta, pero guardate bien de decirle quien te embio. To be within musket-shot, gun-shot, &c. estar a tiro de fusil, de canon, 4'C.^*^as, *'The two fleets were within gun-shot, and very near beginning the engagement, when we left them," las dos escuadras estaban a tiro de canon, y a punto de empezar la funcion, cuando las dejdmos. To be well off, estar bien, or rico. To be in great favour with some one, privar con al- guno. To be very near to, or upon the brink, estar a punto de. '*I loas very near falling down," estaba a punto de eaerme. To be, in such expressions as the following, is trans- lated ir/ as, "The abdication was nothing to the sub- jects," nada les iba a los vasallos en la abdicacion. To be to blame for, tener la culpa dt; as, ".^m / then to blame for his cruelties?" ^pues que tengo yo la culpa de sus crueldades? To be even, estar or quedar en paz; "I shall pay you this bill, and we shall be even,"^^ le pagare esta cuen- ta, y quedaremos, 6 estaremos en paz. To be easy, or to do without, pasarse; "When T have wine I drink it, but when I have none, / am easy with- out it,^^ cudndo tengo vino le bebo, pero cuando no ten- go, me paso. To be so kind as, or so good as, tener le bondad de; as, "i?e so kind as to write to your friend that I enjoy a perfect health," tenga vmd. la bondad de escribar a su amigo que yo goxo de perfecta salud, .35* 414 APPENDIX. To bespeak, encomender, apalabrar. To be beyond one's reach, estar fuera del alcance de lino. To bid adieu, or to take leave, despedirse. Birth day, dia de cumple anos. To be oyer^ pasar; as, "The tempest is o?;er," pas6 /« fempesfad. To bring up, criar; as, "My parents brought me up in this manner," asi me criaron mis padres. To catch cold, resfriarse. To care, in such expressions as, I care nothing, or I don't care, is translated darse or importar; as, "/ care nothing for his talking," nada se me da por su hahlar; •'What care I?" ^que me importa a ml? To choose, elegir; but in such expressions as the iollowing is rendered dar a uno la gana; "Why don't you tell me your name? because I don't choose," ^^Porque no me dice vmd. su nomhre? porque no me da la gana. To come to pass, suceder, acontecer. To depend upon, fiar de; as, ''Depend upon my word," fie vmd. de mi palabra. To do, in such expressions as the following, is ren- dered ir; as, "How do you do.^" ^como le va? (i. e.- how does it go with you.) Droll saying, dicho gracioso. Droll affair, cosa vara. Drop tears, soltar Idgrimas. Engine, mdquina. Steam engine, mdquina de vaho^ or vapo'^. Fire engine, bomha de fuego. Pile engine, martinete. To fancy, afitojarse; as, ''He fancied that he could Team without study, but he soon perceived that he was APPENDIX. 415 mistaken," se le antojo a el que podna aprender sin estudiar, pero pronto vio que estaba engahado. To fare, tratarse; as, ''He fares like a king," se trata co)7io d rei. Fashionable, d la moda. Fast and loose, inconstante. To find fault with, hallar que decir; "^q finds fault with every thing," en todo halla que decir. To favour, (i. e. to resemble,) parecerse; "That young man favours his mother," aquel joven se parece a su madre. Fellow, applied to a pair of objects which ought to be similar, is rendered compahero-a; as, "My boots are not fellows,'^^ mis botas no son companeras. To fetch a sigh, dar un suspiro. To fill up the time, emplear el tiempo. To find in one's heart, determinar. To find out, descubrir. Fortnight, quince dias, A fortified town, plaza de armas. From top to toe, de cabeza d pies. To furnish a house, adornar tma casa con muebles. Fresh water, agua duke. To get, grangear^ ganar, adquirir. To get oft", deshacerse de alguna cosa. To get ofi", escapar, huir. To get up, levantarse de dormir, 6 del asiento. To get through, salir de, pasar por. To get clear off, zafarse, libertarse. To get well, restcdjlecerse de alguna enfermedad. To get a good name, tener buenafama» To give up the ghost, entregar el alma d Dios. To give one's respects, dar muchas memorias. 416 APPENDIX. To give evidence, atestiguar. To give one his own, reprehender, reganar. To give out, publicar, darse d conocer por quien no es. To give up, ahandonar^ entregar. To give way, ceder, hacerlugar. To give in, rendirse. To go about, procurar, intentar^ emprender. To go to the bottom, irse a pique. To go on, atacar, p)'oseguir, seguii\ To go through, agecutar alguna cosa. To grate the teeth, rechinar los dientes. To happen to be, ser 6 estar por casualidad; as, "I happened to he there, when he arrived," estaba yo por casualidad all I cuando el lie go. To happen not to be, no hallarse; as, "I unfortunate- ly happened not to be there when they paid, and thus I lost my money," ^or desgracia no me halle yo alii cu- ando pagdron, y asi perdi mi dijiero. Hard, t/wro, solido, firme, dificil, &c. When hard follows a verb, and stands in the place of an adverb, it is translated in Spanish by that word, which it repre- sents; thus, for instance: to study hard, {to study ea- gerly,) estudiar con ahinco; to drink hard, {to drink to excess,) beber con esceso. Hence it is, de aqui es, de aqui dimana. To hit the nail on the head, acertar 6 dar en el hito. To have, or to be an instance, tenerse egemplar; as, **There never was an instance of such a thing here," jamas se tubo aqui egemplar de tal cosa. Instant, [when applied to the present month,] corri- ente; as, "On the tenth instant," el diez del corrienfe. In witness whereof, y para que conste, or en fe de lo APPENDIX. 417 cual; as, '^In witness whereof^ we have granted these presents, in the city of Baltimore," &c. en fe de lo cual, or para que conste, damos lapresente, en la ciudad de Baltimore, &,'c. To have a high opinion of one's self, or to think high- ly of one's self, estar imo lleno de si mismo; as, ''He has a very high opinion of himself," el estd mui lleno de si mismo. To have a sore leg, arm, hand, throat, &c. dolerle a uno la pierna, el brazo, la garganta, 8fc. To have a turn for mathematics, languages, &c. estar inclinado a, or tener disposidon para^ las matemdticas, idiomas, 4^c. To keep, fener; as, ''He keeps a shop," el tiene tienda. **A good table," buena mesa. To knock down to the highest bidder, rematar en el mayor postor. To lay the blame on, echar la culpa a, "People some- times lay the blame on the innocent," a veces la gente echa la culpa, al inocente. To learn by heart, aprender de memoria. Long, when applied to time, is rendered by tiempo,^ ''^How lo7ig is it, since you arrived in this country?" cuanto tiempo hace desde que vmd. llego en este pais. To look to, when applied to inanimate objects, caer; as, "The windows of my room look to Washington Square," las venta^ms de mi cuarto caen en la plaza de Washington. To have weight with, hacer fuerza d; as, "All you say has no weight with me," todo lo que vmd. dice no me hace fuerza d mi. *^nd the verb to be, by haaer. See pages 167, and 168, 41S APPENDIX. To look well," sick, &c. applied to persons, is, tener huen d mal semhlante^ a car a; as, "(jHow do I look?'* ^que semblcmte tengo? *'You look sick," vmd. iiene semblante de enfermoo. To look handsome, uglj, &c., parecer, or tener apa- riencia; as, ";How pretty he looks!" ;que hermoso pa- rece.' or ;que hermosa apariencia tiene! To make over, ceder^ transferir, traspasar. To make pay, llevar; as, ''They made me pay eight dollars for last night's supper," me llevaron ocho pesos por la cena de anoche. To make a fine show, hacer gran papel. To be the matter with, /e?ier, ajligir; as, ''What ivas the matter with you last night?" que tenias, or que te afligia anoche. To matter, importar; as, "It matters not," or ''it is no matter," no importa. To miss, echar m,enos; as, "As soon as I got up, I missed my purse," luego que me levante, eche menos rai bolsillo. Objection, reparo; as, "He had no objection in giving me letters of recommendation," no tuvo reparo alguno ra franquearme cartas de recomendacion. To oblige, agradar grangearse 6 atraerse la volun- tad 6 benevolencia de otros, agradecer, or estimar a uno; as, "You are very polite, and consequently oblige every person," vmd. es mui urbano, y por consigidente, se atrae 6 se grangea la voluntad de otros. "Sir, you will extremely oblige me, by writing to me as soon as you arrive at New York," le agradecere, or le estimare infinitamente, que al instants que llegue a Nueva York me e^ariba. APPENDIX. 419 Occasion, [when it implies necessity] necessidad^ as *•*;! shall have no occasion to buy these books now, shall I?" Yo no tendre necessidad de comprar estos libros ahora, ^es verdad? Old, [when applied to the age of a person] edad; as, *'How old are you," ^que edad tiene vmd,? and it might also be rendered by, cuantos ahos tiene vmd. lite- rally, how many years have you. Out of, por or de, in such expressions as these; "He did it out of mercy," lo hizo de Idstima. "Of friend- ship," por amistad. To own, [when implies acknowledgment] confesar, [when implies possession] ser; as, '*he owns it," el lo confiesa. '*He owns it," [i. e. he possesses it] es de el. To part with, deshacerse de; as, "/ would not part with this library for all the world," no me desharia de esta libreria por todo el mundo. To pass one's word for another, empenar uno su pa- lab j^a por otro. To pay the tribute of nature, morir. To perform one's promise, cumplir uno con su pala- bra. To play, [when applied to musical instruments] tocar; as, ''I have been told you jtlay very well on the vIb- Hn,^^ me han dicho que vmd. toca el violin mui bien. To play the fool, hacer el tonfo. To please, dar gusto^ agradar; as, ''I would do every thing to please you,''^ todo lo haria para agra- darle. To please, [when implies request] servirse; as. ^'Please to come soon to-night," sirvase viiid. veair temprano esta noche. 420 APPENDIX. To put to death, matar. To put up, aguantar sitfrir. To rap, or knock at the door, tocar a lapuerta. To revenge an affront, vengarse de una afrenta. To right one's self, tomar la justicia por su mano. To stand in need of, hacer falta a imo; as, "/ stand in need of some Spanish books," a mi me hacen falta algimos libros espaholes. To search a house, registrar una casa. To stand security, salir Jiador por otro. To sell for cash, or ready money, vender de contado. To sell on credit; vender aljiado^ 6 a plazos. To sell by auction, almonedear. To settle disputes, cornponer pendencias. To settle accounts, ajustar cuentas. Short of money, escaso de dinero. To sink a mine, cavar una mina. To sleep soundly, dormir a pierna suelta. To smell of, or like, oler a; as, "They all smelled of gunpowder," todos olian kpolvora. To snuff the candle, despavilar la vela* Soon, in such expressions as the following, should be translated tardar, to stay long; as, ''How soon will your father be back, dear Charles? ^cuanto tardar^^^w padre en volver? querido Carlos, To spare, [when implies omission] perdonar; ''He spared no labour to become learned," no perdono fa- tiga para llegar a ser erudito. To spend, [when applied to time or seasons] pasar; as, "how delightful it is to spend the summer in the country, " cuan delicioso C5, pasar el verano en el campo. To speak to the purpose, hablar al caso. APPENDIX. 421 To split with, laughing, reventar de risa, literally to burst with laughter. To spoil, hechar d jierder; as, "Boys generally spoil their books before they have learned what they con- tain," los nihos genercdmente echan a perder los libfos antes de liaber aprendido lo que contienen. To stand upon an end, erizarse. To stop one's mouth, tapar la boca. Strange face, cara desconocida. To succeed, scdir bien, acertai\ lograr itno su interi' to; as **I wish you may succeed./' me alegrare, que vmd. ucierta, 6 que le saiga bien. "It is almost impossible for poets to succeed without ambition," es cuasi impos- sible que los poetas logren su intento sin ambicion. Sweets of life, las delicias de la vida. To take amiss, llevar a. mal; as, "I hope you won't take amiss what I say," espero que vmd. no Uevera kmal h que digo. To take, or make a tour, viajar. To take for granted, dar por supuesto. To take care not to do a thing, guardarse bien de hacer algo; ''^Tahe care not to discover me," guardate bien de descubrirme. To take an oath, jurar 6 hacer juramento. To take in, enganar, estafar. To taste of, or like, scdjer d; as, ''This wine tastes of. or like vinegar," este vino sabe a vinagre. To think one's self an honest man, a great mathema- tician, &:c. '•"Tenerse por hombre honesto, por gran matemdtico, 4'C." Thus far, or so far, hasta aqui. To give or put into any trouble, molestar; as, '^I am 36 422 APPENDIX. sorry, to put you into, or to give you any trouble,'* siento niolestarle. Upon pain, sopena,- as, '*No person shall desert i^pon jKiin of death," nadie desertara sopena dc muerte. To wear out, or to exhaust one's patience, hacer per- der la paciencia. To wind up a watch, dar cucrda d un rcloj. Witty sapng, chisie. To wonder, is not translated in Spanisli in such ex- pressions as the following: as, "^ J ivonder whaiher these complaints will ever end?" si se acabardn jamas esta.s qiiejas. '*I wonder whether we shall see land to-day," si veremos tierra hoi? To word a letter, dictar uno carta. If, in common conversation, the verb is repeated in linglish in the affirmative, when the sentence is in t!ic negative; and vice versa, in the negative, when the sen- tence is in the affirmative; to render, as it is presumed, the interrogatory more expressive, the words ^es ver- dad? [it is true?] ^no es verdad? [is it not truer] are used in Spanish: Example; '^You have seen my father; have you not? Vnid. ha visto d ml padre ;no es verdad? •'He \\i\\ not travel much; — will he?^^ El no viajard niucho ;es verdad I "you would go there, if permitted; wou'dn'tyou?" Si se lo permifiesen, Vmd, iria alia ;no es verdad? SYNONYMES. Aqitl, Acd. Aca,, means here, or hitlier, as well as aqui, with this diftereiice, that acd applies more forcibly to this place^ here; for instance: come here, [the very spot which is marked] venga^ vmd. acd; I live here, [i. e. in this house, mansion, country seat, &c. ] aqui vivo. Ahi, All'i, Alia. Their equivalents in English are, tlitre, thither^ or that place.) but they can, by no means, be indiscrimi- nately used. Ahi always denotes a place near at hand, and generally supposes it close to the person addressed; ^s, "Examine, O man! thy heart, thou wilt there see the motives of thy actions," ecsamina, homhre^ tu cora- zoii, ahi verds los motivos de tus acetones. All'i and alia both denote a remote place, but tlie latter should always be used for, to that place; as, "I shall go there {to that place) to-morrow," yo ire alia manana. "Do you not see there, on that rock, how many men there are," no ves alii, or alia sobre aquella pena, que de horn- hres Jmi. Luego que, Despues que. As both these adverbs may be rendered in Englisli by after, it must be observed, that the former circum- scribes the time within determined boundaries, and con- -^equently equivalent to so soon as; example: "After he arrived, he came to see me," despues que llego; (some time after,) me vino d ver. "-Luego que llego;-^ (immediately after,) 7ne vino d ver. 424 APPENDIX. Bespacio, Poco a Poco. Both these expressions mean an action which is ef- fected in a slow manner. There is however this differ- ence: despacio is applied to the slow operation of the action in itself; ;?oco a poco, denotes the slow operation of its progress towards the end. If we saj, ''Fui poco ^ poco gonando terrene,^'' I went by degrees gaining- ground. We mean, that, although slowly, we gained some of the ground wliich was to be gained. If des- pacio be substituted, we then have relation not to the slow progress we made in gaining ground j but our s/ozt'- ness^ in the act of gaining it. Adulador, Lisongero. Flatterer is the English equivalent of these two words. They cannot, however, be indiscriminately used in Spanish. Adulador [from Adidator~] is the person who thinking, that, because persons are susceptible of flattery, he must sacrifice truth, justice and opinion to the object of his adulation. The lisongero is the per- son, who, by means of his manner and mode of expres- sion, can give to all his praise the semblance of truth — he persuades with ingenuity,* and introduces himself into the good opinion of the person flattered by indi- rect and insinuating means. Hence it is said, that a wise man must despise the one that uses adulation, or the adidador, and fear him who uses flattery, or the lisongero. This latter adjective is, therefore, applied to those expectations, anticipations, &c. which, in appearance, are delightful; but, in reality, mere sha- dows. APPENDIX. 425 Romper^ Quebrar. The import of these verbs is to destroy any object by separation, or fracture. Romper, however, is not so limited in sense as quebrar. It is used with regard to any thing physical or abstract, which is susceptible of being broken. Quebrar is only used in reference to a tangible substance of a vitreous or inflexible nature: we therefore say, '^El rompio el co7ifrafo,^^ he broke the contract. ^'El quebro el vaso,^^ he broke the tumbler. '''EUos rompieron los libros, y quebraron los jarros,^^ they tore the books to jrieces^ and broke the jugs. L\ Irsc. Both these verbs import the act of leaving a place— the first, however, is used when the place for which the first was left, is mentioned; and the second, when no reference is made but to the place from which w^e sepa- rate ourselves. It is said, therefore, "F« a. 3Iegico,^^ he goes to Mexico; and ^^Se va de Megico," he goes away from Mexico- Honra, Honor. As these two words have, in English, one equivalent only, — \Jionour~] their difterence should be perfectly understood. When we speak of a man having honor, we mean that he is honourable in all his transactions and dealings; or that he has been born with honourable principles. Honra is the effect of these qualities. Honor, cannot be given, it must exist in the man. Honra is always received from a superior, or the public in general. We say, ^'Su honor es toda la honra de su fa7mUa,^^ his honour [hor.'^'irable princi- ples,'] is all the honour of w^hich his family can boast. .36* 426 APPENDIX. "El president e le hizo Za honra de nombrarle consid^^' the president did him the honour to appoint him consul. No Obstante^ Mmque^ Bienque. These three conjunctions are always employed to exclude an opposition, but their import is not exactly the same: no obstante^ serves to exclude a positive oppo- sitionj aimqice, one that is contingent; and bienque, serves to modify the first idea, diminishing its force. Examples: ''-The Romans won the battle, although their force was much smaller," los Romanos gandron la batalla, no obstante que susfuerzas eran mucho mas pequenas. "I shall make sail to-morrow, although the wind may be contrary," manana saldre, aunque el vi- cnfo sea contrario. ''The emperor and the prince are both great generals, though the latter is certainly very superior," el emperador, y el principe son grandes gene- rales, bienque este en realidad es mui superior. Opinion, Farecer, Dictdmen, Opinion (from opino) denotes opinion only as con- ceived, the others as declared; but /?arecer (from^a- reo) implies such an opinion as is given on the existence or non-existence of a thing, the truth or falsehood of an assertion. Dictdmen (from dicto) tends to influence future conduct. "Every one has his opinion,^^ cada ami tiene su opinion. "I am of opinion that he vdll conquer," soi de parecer que vencerd. ''They would not follow his opinion,^^ no quisiSron seguir su dictd- men. For que, Pues, When these words are employed to denote cause, motive, Of reason, they are synonymous; but porqut APPENDIX. 42r expresses a positive inference, and pues one that is only probable; as, "Ha does not know his lesson because he has not studietl it," el no sabe la leccion porque no la ha estudiado. "He shall never learn the English, be- cause it is very difficult," el nunca aprenderd la lengua Inglesa, pues es tnui dificiL Sospecha, Recelo. Both these words imply suspicion, but sospecha may allude either to good or evil, when recelo can only allude to evil. The first, therefore, denotes every kind of suspicion, and the second that which is accompanied wdth a degree of fear only. Their derivatives sospechar and sospechoso, and recelar and receloso, are subject to the same distinction; as, "I /ear, or suspect that he will impose upon us;" recelo 6 sospecho, que Slnos engahara, "He raised the stone, suspecting that it concealed a treasure," levanto la losa sospechando que ocultaba un fesoro. - Vcneno, Ponzoha. Veneno denotes any species of poison, either as sim- ple or compound; ponzona generally implies animal poison, sometimes vegetable poison, but in its natural state only; as, "^/ veneno 6 la ponzona de las viboras,^' the poison of vipers. " Todos los cosmeticos son vene- nos preparados,^^ all cosmetics are prepared poisons, '^Sospecho que habia veneno oi la bebida,^^ (not pon- zona) he suspected there was poison in his drink. Foz, Palabra. Both these terms are rendered in English by words but they can, by no means, be indiscriminately used in Spanish. Foz, implies a word considered as uncon- 428 APPENDIX. nected and imuttered, and should, therefore, be adopted when we treat of the structure, the real meaning, or the derivation of words: — palabra denotes an uttered word considered as a component part of a sentence, and re- gards all the circumstances which refer to the pronun- ciation, the figurative meaning, or the energy of words. "This Dictionary contains many words," este Diccion- ario contiene miichas voces, "I took them at their word," les cogi la palabra. "The word ennui is a French tvord, and a icord very difficult to pronounce," /« voz ENNUI 68 voz franccsa^ y palabra miii dificil dt pronunciar. A VOCABULARY OF THE MOST NECESSARY WORDS^ Of God, ^'C. Digs, God. el cielo, heaven. Gesu-Cristo, Jesus Christ el paraiso, paradise. elEspiritu Santo, the Holy la gloria, heaven. Ghost. nn angel, an angel. d Redentor, the Redeemer, un santo, a saint. el Criador, the Creator. wi martir, a martyr. una criahira, a creature. un prof eta, a prophet. la naturaleza, nature. un evangelista, an evange- un espiritu, a spirit. list. im cuerpo, a body. tin patriarca, a patriarch. TTie Elements. Elfuego, the fire. el agua, the water. el aire, the air. el mar, the sea. la tierra, the earth. APPENDIX. 429 El sol^ the sun. la luna, the moon. una estrella, a star. im planet a, a planet. un cometa, a comet. los rayos del sol, the rajs of the sun. la luz, the light. las tinieblas, darkness. elfrio, cold. el calor, heat. im vapor, vapour, steam. el viento, wind. icna nube, a cloud. la lluvia, rain. el granizo, hail. The Planets, ^c, el rocio, dew. la nieve, snow. la niebla, fog. una tempestad, a tempest. iin reldmpago, a flash of lightning. el trueno, thunder. un trueno, a clap of thun- der. el rayo, a thunderbolt. un terremoto, an earth- quake. el diluvio, the deluge. una imindadon, an inun- dation. Una ocasion, an opportuni- im dia, a day. una Jornada, a journey. el amanecer, day -break. la manana, morning. el mediod(a, mid-day, noon. el ponerse el sol, sun-set. la noche, the night. un dia de trabajo, a work- ino; dav. Of Time. un dia de fiesta, a holy day. un rato, a while. un instante, an instant; una semana, a week. un mes, a month. im aho, a year. un siglo, an age. la eternldad, eternity. el principio, the beginning, el medio, the middle. elfin, the end. The Days of the Week. Domingo, Sunday. Jueves, Thursday. Lunes, Monday. Viernes, Friday. Martes, Tuesday. Sdbado, Saturday, Mihcoles, Wednesday. 430 APPENDIX. The Months of the Year, Enero, January. Julio, July. Febrero, February. Agosto, August. Marzo, March. Sepfiembre, September. Abril, April. Mayo, May. Junio, June. Octubre, October. JVovievnbre, November. jDiciembre, December. Seasons and Holidays. La primavera, spring. la semana santa,\vo\y week. el verano, the summer. el otono, the autumn. el invierno, the winter. la canicida, dog-days. las niieses, the harvest. las vendimias, vintage. el esquileo, sheep-shearing- time. el dia de ano nuevo, new- years day. carnestolendas, 6 carnaval, carnival. Miercoles de Ceniza, Ash- Wednesday. la quarestna, Lent. el Domingo deRamos^Vdlm. Sunday. PaSqua de Besurreccion, Easter Sunday. Fiesta de Pentec6stes,y^\i\i- suntide. el Corpus, Corpus-Christi. Dia de todos Santos, All- saints day. el Adviento, Advent. Navidad, Christmas. Vigilia, Vigil. dia de ayuno, fast-day. dia de viernes, fish-day. dia de came, meat-day. Individuals atid Ages, Un hombre, a man. una inuger, a woman. un viejo, an old man. una vieja, an old woman, un muchacho, a boy. unjoven, a young man. una muchacha, una moza, a young girl. un niho, una niha, a child. una do7icella, a maid. un gigante, a giant, icn enano, a dwarf. la infancia, childhood. la juventud, youth. la edad viril, manhood . la vejez, old age. APPENDIX. 431 TTie Human Body. El cuerpo, the body. los 7nie7nbros,t\\e members. la cabeza, the head. los sesos^ the brain. el pescuezo, the neck. la cabellera^ the queue. las sienes, the temjiles. la f rente, the forehead. las cejas, the eye-brows. cl ojo, the eye. las harbas, the beard, las espaldas, the back. los hombros, the shoulders. el espinazo, the back bone. el p echo, the breast. cl esiomago, the stomach. el costado, the side. las costillas, the ribs. el corazon, the heart, el higado, the liver. la nina del ojo, the eye-ball, los pidmones, the lungs. /o57?a/7J«c?05,the eye-lashes, la Iriel, the gall. las orejas, the ears. /a nariz, the nose. /a ventanas de la nariz, the nostrils. nariz roma, Roman nose. nariz aguilena, Grecian nose. la cava, face. las facciones, the features. cl carillo, 6 megiUa, the cheeks. la boca, the mouth. los labios, the lips. las quijadas, the jaws. las enczas, the gums. la lengua, the tongue. el paladar, the palate. /« garganta, the throat. /o5 dientes, the teeth. /«.s entranas, the bowels, /a vegiga^ the bladder, /a sangre, the blood. ^ 436 APPENDIX. ^^ames of Individuals according to their Rank, Pro- fession or Employment. El papa, the Pope. un medico, a physician.' nn cardenal, a cardinal. tin cirujano, a surgeon. nn arzobispo, an archbishop im boiicario, an apotheca- nn obispo, a bishop. rj. un dean, a dean. un conierciante,SiUierc\mnt. un canoniga, a canon. un mercader, a mercer. un vicario, a vicar. un corredor, an exchange un cura, sl rector. broker. un teniente de cura, a curate un tendero, a shop-keeper. un emperador,2ii\ emperor, un escribiente, a clerk. iina emperatriz, an empress un sastre, a tailor. un zapatero, a shoemaker. un sombrerero, sl hatter. an ret, a king. ^, una reina, a queen. un principe, a prince. una princesa, a princess. an conde, an earl. una condesa, a countess. un marques, a marquis. un carnicero, a butcher. un panadero, a baker. un especiero, a grocer. un cervecero, a brewer. un carpintero, a carpenter. una marquesa, a marchio- un cantero, a mason. ness. un lor, a lord. una sehora, a ladj. un caballero, sl gentleman. una darna, a lady. el corregidor, the mayor. unjuez, a judge. un jjastelero, a pastry cook. un confitero, a confection- er. un peluquero, a hair-dress- er. un vidriero, a glazier. un pintor, a painter. un alcalde, a justice of the un librero, a bookseller. peace. un impresor, a printer. im abogado, a counsel. un grabador, an engraver. un procui^ador, a solicitor, wn remendon, a cobbler. ?m escribano, a notary. zm mcindaderOj a porter. APPENDIX. 437 un cerragero, a locksmith, un cartero, a letter carrier. tin albeiiar, a farrier. el pre goner o, the crier. un relogero^ a watchmaker. Names given to Persons according to their Native Place. Un Europeo, an Europe- an. un Asiano^ an Asiatic. un Africano^ an African. un Americano, an Ameri- can. un Ingles, an Englishman. un Escoces, a Scotchman. un Irlandes, an Irishman. un EspahoU a Spaniard. un Gadituno, a native of Cadiz. un Sevillano, a native of Seville. U7i Madrileno, a native of Madrid. un Gerezano, a native of Xerez. un Porteho, a native of Port St. Mary's. un Poteno, a native of Ro- ta. icn Estremeno, a native of Estremadura. un falenciano, a Valen- cian. un Castellano, a Castilian. S7'* un Andaluz, an Andalu- sian. [guese. un Portuguez, a Portu- un Prances, a Frenchman. un Flamenco, a native of Flanders. un Itcdiano, an Italian. un Napolitano, a Neapoli- tan. un Ginehrino, a Genoese. un Genoves, a native of Geneva. un Suiz, a Swiss. un Aleman, a German. un Austriaco, an Austrian. un Sacson, a Saxon. im Bdvaro, a Bavarian. un Holandes, a Dutchman. un Bohemio, a Bohemian. un Hungaro, a Hungarian. un Prusiano, a Prussian. un Polaco, a Pole. un Griego, a Greek. un Turco, a Turk. un Persa, a Persian. un Chino, a Chinese. un Negro, a Negro. 458 APPENDIX. un Catalan, a Catalan. mi Vizaino, a Biscayan. un Manchego, a native of la Mancha. un Malagueno, a native of Malaga. un Granadino, a native of Granada. ten ^isturiano, a native of Asturias. un Gallego, a native of Gallicia. un Dinainarquez, a Dane. un Sueco, a Swede. wi Muscovita, a Musco- vite. un CartagineSf a Carthagi- nian. un Jlrabe, an Arabian. un Egipcio, an Egyptian. un Algerino, an Algerine. un Indio, an Indian. un Moro, a Moor, un JRuso, a Russian. un Navarro, a native of Navarre. un Arragones, a native of Arragon. un Criollo, a Creole. un Mont an es, a Mountai- neer. un Serrano, a Highlander. Of a City and its Farts. etna ciitdad, a city. una villa, a town. un lugar, a village. una aldea, a hamlet. los arrabales, the suburbs. una calle, a street. un call ej on, a lane. una plaza, a square. el cano, the kennel. el mercado, the market. una casa, a house. la casa de cabildo, the town-house. una parroquia, a parish. la casa de comedias, the play-house. la pescaderia, the fish-mar- ket. la carniceria, the flesh mar- ket. la panaderia, the bread- market. el Matadero, the slaughter^ house. un edificio, a building. un palacio, a palace. el muelle, the wharf. una tienda, a shop, una iglesia, a church. una ayuda de parroquia, a chapel of ease. el Correo, the Post-office. APPENDIX. 439^ una universidad, a univer- sity. • un colegio, a college. una academia, an acade- my. un hospital, an hospital. una casa de locos, a mad- house. U7ia cdrcel, a prison. un cafe, a coffee house. unafonda, a hotel. unfigon, a cook's shop. una posada^ an inn. la Bolsa, the exchange. la Aduana, the Custom- house. el Ahairantazgo, the Ad- miralty. una oficiana, an office. un escritorio, a counting- house. el teatro, the stage. los bastidores, the scenes. el patio, the pit. un oposoento 6 palco, a box. un monasterio, a monaste- ry- im convento, a convent. un almacen, a warehouse. una fdhrica, a manufac- tory. un taller, a work shop. una escuela, a boys' school. escuela de ninas, a girls' school. Of the House and its Divisions, El solar, the ground floor. tin alto, a story. el primer piso, the first floor. el portal, the porch. el patio, t!ie court. las escaleras, the stairs. un escalon, a step. una alcova, a bed room una anticdmara, an anti- chamber. un tocadar, room. los corridores, the galleries. un ciiarto, a room. el comedor, the dining- room- una sala, a parlour. la estrada, the drawing- room. un desvan, a garret. un tejado, a tiled roof. una ventana, a window. un balcon, a balcony, dressing- una puerta, a door. el aldabon, the knocker. %m retrete. a closet* el umbral, the threshold. 440 APPENDIX. la despensa, the pantrj, la cocino, the kitchen. una alhacena, the cup- board. ?m mirador, an observa- tory. la bodega, the cellar. la caballeriza, the stable, la cochera, the coach house. el jar din, the garden. el parque, the park. Of Household Furniture. Una armadura de cama, a bedstead. las cortinas, the. curtains. la alfombra, the carpet. un phimon, a feather-bed. un sillo7i, an easy chair. un canape, a sofa. un estante, a book-case. una papelera, a bureau. un escritorio, a writing desk un colchon de lana, a flock- el aparador, the sideboard. mattress. un espejo, a mirror. un gergon depaja, a straw- una araha, a chandelier. mattress. una almohada, a pillow. una sdbana, a sheet. una funda de almohada, a pillow-case. los cobertores, the blank- ets. la colcha, the counterpane. una silla^ a chair. una mesa, a table. un forte piano, a pianoforte. un guardaropa, a ward- robe. un gabinete, a cabinet. un biombo, a screen. tm bahul, a trunk. to2« Cf/;*«, a box. una gaveta, sl bureau draw- er. un cajon, a table drawer. La mesa, the table. el mantel, the table cloth, una servilleta, a napkin. un cuchillo, a knife. un tenedor, a fork. una cuchara, a spoon. Of the Table, ^»c. una garrafa, a decanter. unjarro, a jug. «n servicio de mesa, a table service. un servicio de te, a tea-ser- vice. APPENDIX. 441 im salero, a saltcellar. un plato, a plate. una salcera, a sauce-tu- reen. ias ampolletas, the cruets. el pimentero, the pepper- box. el mostacero, the mustard- pot. un vaso, a tumbler. la tetera, the teapot. ima cafetera, a cofFee-pot, un c/iocolatero, a chocolate- pot. el molinillo, the mill. el azuquero, a sugar-basin. el lechero, a milk-pot. itna fasa, a cup. un platUlo, a saucer. Of Meat Came, flesh. came cocida, boiled meat. came asada, roasted meat. pescado, fish. vaca, beef. carnero, mutton. tocino, bacon. un pavo, a turkey. tm pichon, a pigeon. una perdiz, a partridge. unfaisan, a pheasant. un pato, a duck. U7i ganso, a goose. pan, bread. pan fresco, new bread. ternera, veal. vejiado, venison. cordero, lamb. janion, ham. c«zo, game. i■ whereof is master, for this present voy- No. 1, to 3. J age, James Quick, now in the harbour of Havana, and bound for Philadelphia, to say: 3 Boxes of sundries, being marked and numbered as in the margin, and are to be delivered, in like good order, and well-condition- 468 APPENDIX. dicionada j marcado con la marca del m^rgen, con lo eual prometo, j me oblige, llevuiidome Dios en buen sal- vamento con el dicho mi navio, al espresado puerto, de acudir j entregar por vos j en vuestro nombre; dichos generos igualmente enjutos y bien ocondicionades (salvo los peligros de mar) a D. P. 6 a quien por el alii fuere parte; pagandome de flete a razon de con capa y averia. Y en fe de que asi me abligo cumplir os doi tres conocimientos de un tenor, firmados de mi nombre por mi, 6 por mi escribano; el uno cumplido, los otros BO valgan. En la Havana, a 18 de Agosto de J 820. LETRA DE CAMBIO. Nueva York, a. 28 de Diciembre, de 1824. A ocho dias vista se serviran vmds. mandar pagar por esta mi primera de cambio (no habiendo hecho por la segunda, ni tercera) j a la orden de Don M. R. la cantidad de valor recibido de dicho Seiior, que anotaran vmds. en cuenta, segun aviso de s. s. s. q. s. M. B. J.C. Primera A los Sehores E. y V. en la Havana. El Endoso. Pagiiese a la orden de Don Ji. B. Nueva York, ^c. M. R. APPENDIX. 469 ed, at the aforesaid port of Philadelphia, (the dangers of the seas only excepted,) unto D. P. or his assigns, he (or they) paying the freight for the said goods, at the rate of with primage and average accustomed. In witness whereof the master of the said ship has af- lirined to three bills of lading of this tenor and date; one of which being accomplished, the others to stand void. — Dated in Havana, August 18, 18£0. A BILL OF EXCHANGE. Exchange for First. Neiv-York, Bee. 28, 1824. At eight days sight of the first exchange (second and third of same tenor and date unpaid,) please to pay to the order of Mr. M. R. the sum of value received, and charge the same to account as advised by Your obedient servant, J. C. To Messrs. E. 4* V. Merchants^ Havana. The Endorsement. Pay to Mr. A. B. or order. New-York, Sf-c. M. R. 4f) VERSIFICATION. It was our intention, at first, to have presented this part ol ' Prosody in English, as in the first edition of this grammar. %h^it following considerations however, have induced us to present it in Spanish: 1st. That after the student has gone through the grammar, we think he will have made a sufficient progress to understand any grammatical rule, although it be laid down in Spanish. 2d. That it is very seldom persons will attend to versification before they are tolerably vv^eil versed in this language. For these individuals, the rules written in Spanish will, unquestiona- bly, be preferable. 3d. That whether the rules be in English or Spanish, the ex- amples elucidating them must absolutely be in this latter lan- guage; it being impossible to give any adequate translation. 4th. That v.'hen the peculiarities of an idiom are to be ex- plained, if they must not be placed in contradistinction with the rules of another, it is always better that they should be written in the language which they are intended to elucidate. We conceive these reasons to be sufficient to sanction oui change. Indeed, as our anxiety has been, throughout this gram- mar, to promote the advancement of the student, it could scarcely be supposed, we would give place to any arrangement, which, in our opinion, did not tend to this great object. As our zeal, how- ever, might carry us so far as to mislead us, we have thought it proper to explain the motives which have induced us to make so remarkable an alteration. De la Versificacion 6 arte metrica. Versificacion es el conjunto de un numero determinado de silabas, arregladas segun ciertas leyes. Rima es la correspondencia que tienen los sonidos finales de unos versos con los de otros. Hablando del acento en pagina 404 se dijo que todo monosilabo tiene acento, esto es, que todo monosilabo tiene vocal larga. As^ APPENDIX. 47] es, pero en la versificacion, tendran esta vocal larga 6 enfdtica, segun la naturaleza de la linea en que se liallen. I^i aigunas que estan mas dispuestas a ser enfaticas que otras, y al contrario: y otras, que si se quiere, se pueden 6 bo hacer enfaticas. Ademas del acento prosaico de que se ha hablado tratando del acento; se usa muchas veces de otro, que se llama poetico, a fin de guardar la medida; particularmente en los polisilabos. Pro- nunciandado la voz desgraciddamente, que tiene su acento verda- dero en la cuarta silaba, estamos obligados a dar un poco de fuerza a la primera y quinta, y se producen tres tfoqueos. El acento prosaico en todo ritmo, esta obligado muchas veces a ceder al poetico: pronunciaudo velozmente silabas enfaticas; y con fuerza, otras que son breves. Aunque los versos espafioles, esten regulados por lo general per el enfasis 6 silabas enfaticas, contribuye mui esencialmente un cierto balance de cantidad. En todos los versos solemnes 6 graves, se vera que sobrepasan las silabas largas a las cortas; y que, al contrario, en los versos donde el muylmionto os x'aIo:^ y vivo, se hallara que las silabas cortas, son las que prevalecen. Tenemos en el idioma castellano dos especies de versos; los que se forman 6 dividen segun pies; y los que segun su ritmo particular. De la division de versos segun sus pies. Todos los pies en la poesia consisten de dos 6 tres silabas; y se pueden reducir a muchas clases; pero se puede decir que lo'= usados en nucstro idioma son los tres siguientes: — Troqtjeo, Yambo, Antapesto. El Troqueo consiste de dos silabas; la primera larga o enfatica, y la segunda breve; como, te-mo; me-nos; Pe-dro. El Yambo tiene tambien dos silabas; la una breve; y la otra enfatica; como, te-mor; fe-liz; ser-vtl. El Anafesio se compone de tres silabas ; las dos primer&s breves, y la ultima enfatica. Las silabas que no son enfaticas se demostraran por esta senal ^ o ), y las que lo son, por esta (-). fcja medjda troealca mas corta que se halla en nuestro idioma. 4f£ APPENDIX. consiste de un troqueo y medio pie con rima doble d de dos sila- bas: V. g. * Claros I ri os. Celos I fri OS. En la medida trocaica se introduce algunas veces un yambo; Ni me I deja el | llan to De cir I como | que do. Jamas escede a cinco pies la medida trocaica y rara vez se compone de tantos; el siguiente es un egemplo de trespies con rima doble 6 de dos silabas: — Hombre | que sin | asco | so rba. La medida yambica mas corta que se halla en nuestro idioma consiste de un yambo hipermetrico, 6 con rima de dos silabas; Se mue | ve, La na [ ve, Mas le I ve, Que iin a | ve. Se escriben con medida yambica los versos ecsametros d he- roicos, consistiendo de cinco pies; y, siendo de rima doble d d« dos silabas, consisten de once silabas, por lo cual se llaman tam- bien endecasUabos: Pas t5 I res que j dor mis ] en la | maja da Se introduce muchas veces un troqueo en el primer verso de ia medida yambica; y hai poetas que le introducen en otros pa- rages de la linea. Graves ) mi ra | das y ] mi rar | sua ves. Y cuan | to el mar | el a? | re el sue | lo encier ra. Si me J quie res J o frez | co a tu | belle za. Los %Q.napesto& se hacen de varias dimensiones, pero nunca esceden a cuatro pies. Se omite por lo regular la primera sila- ba del primer pie. Los a I nimds ar } den en Dios | abrasa dos. Del ritrno 6 nma. Los versos se dividen en parejas; 'd versos cuyos ritmos estaa eguidos; esto es, el primero,^ rimando con el segundo; el terce- APPENDI5t. 473 vo, con el cuarto, &c. y coplas; 6 versos alternados; esto es, el primer verso, rimando con el tercero; y el segundo, con el cuay- !o: V. g, "La noche ya senora de este miindo "Con cadenas de sueno el mas prq/wndo "Los mortales tenia aprisionados "Que mas muertos estaban que embarga^fos.*' "Caciques, del Estado defensores, "Codicia de mandar no me convida "A pesarme de veros pretens57'es "De cosa, que a mi tanto era debida.^' Hai tambien otras especies de rima en los tercetos, 6 versos de tres llneas; en los citm-tetos, 6 versos de cuatro lineas; quintetos 6 de cinco, &c. en que se hallan varios modos de hacer consonan- cia. En los tercetos, por egemplo, el primer verso puede se^' suelto;* y el segundo hacer consonancia con el tercero: 6 el primero, puede rimar con el tercero; y el segundo ser suelto. En las piezas compuestas de tercetos; el primer y el tercer ver- so hacen consonancia; y el segundo, la hace con el primero del fcrceto preeedente, v. g. "En aquel prado alH nos reclinamos, "Y del Cefiro fresco recogieiitZo "EI agradable espiritu, respiramos- "Las flores a los ojos ofreciendo "Diversidad estrana de pint?/rrt, "Diversamente asi estaban oliendo; "Y en medio aquesta fuente clara y pura, '•'Que como de cristal resplandecTa "Mostrando abiertamente su hondwra, "El arena que de oro parecia ••De blancas pedrezuelas \a.ndda "Por do manaba el agua se bullfa." En la lengua castellana hai dos especies de rima; la una aso- •:.mte; y la olra consonante. Rima asonante requiere las misraas * Versos sueltos, is blank verse, 40* 474 APPENDIX. letras en ambas lineas, desde la vocal en que carga ei acentf* hasta el fin 5 v. g. "Pues defended el reino rostros bellos "Que yo pondre la planta en vuestros cuellos.'^ La rima asonante solo requiere una similaridad de voeales, pero no de consonantesj y asi es que ligero puede formar aso- nancia con cubierto; amores con noches; melones con azotes, &c. v. g. "Sordo a las voces, con que el hombre intenla "Delenerle en su curso, al tiempo cdno "Ni el vuelo acorta, ni el semblante yuelve, "Ni presta oidosa sus ruegos blant/os." Sin contravenir a las reglas de la poctica, la mismo voz se puede usar al fin de las dos lineas rimantes; con tal que se usen en sentido diferenle. De este modo sagrado puede rimar con sa- grado, si uno de estos dos vocablos significa cosa sagrada; y el, otro aiilo, alber^ue, &c. Muehas veces se escriben versos de medida latina; y en este case, los versos tienen sus nombres diferentes segun el numero de pies de que consisten. Asi es que se llaman sdficos adonicos los versos cuyo metro consiste de cinco pies, de los cuales, el tercer siempre debe ser dactilo, y los otros son yambicos. A ca- da tres versos saficos hai un addnico, que consta de un pie dacti- lo y otro espondeo. Hai otros de otras medidas que no se ponen aqui, porque apenas jamas s6 usan. Los siguientes son saficos adonicos de Lope de Vega. ••Amor poderoso en el cielo y iierra* "Dulcisima guerra* de aquestos sentidos. •';0 cuantos Tperdidos con vida inqukta, "Tu imperio siigeta! •'Hai algunas composiciones poeticas, en las cuales, como se ye arriba, la ultima vcz de un verso, hace consonancia con la uegunda del siguiente. Estos versos no son mui frecuentes; pues se escriben mas para hacer vcr la facilidad con que el poeta puede vimar, que ya porque sean mas harmoniosos; o mas confcrmes a ias reglas de la versificacion castellana. APPENDIX. 475 "Con vanos deleites y locos empleos, "Ardienles desaos y helados temores, "AJegres dcloies y dulces engahos "Usurpas Ids anoS."^^ Be la division de verso segun sii rima. Los versos espanoles se dividea en tres espec4es A^udos, Llanos, J Esdrnjulos. Los versos Agudos 6 bien scan deuna sola rima, tienen el acen- to sobre la ultima silaba; como, "Mas aunque muera por tl "No te lo dare a entente?-; "Por que no me quiero ver "Como te viste por nu." Los versos Llancs son aquellos sobre cuya peniiltima silaba ■argala pronunciacion; 6 bien sean versos de rima doble; como, "0 musa celestial! tu, que asisflsfe "A el alarde glorioso, y las hWeras "De los fulgentes querubines v7sle "Tendidas ya las inclitas bant/eras; •Los nombres dime, que en el cielo ohie ■'De tanto campeon, que en duraderas * "Laminas, guarda el libro de la vida: "Honra a sus altos triunfos bien deblda."' Los versos Esdrujulos son los que tienen la antepentiltima silSt- ua acentuada; 6 bien sean versos de rima triple; v. g. "Silvano mio, una aficion rSirisima, "Una beldad que ciega luego en yiendola, '•Un seso y discrecion escelenffsima; "Con un dulce habla que en oyendola, "Las duras penas mueve eterneciendolas : — "jQue sentiria un amador perdiencZoZa?" Hai ademas de estas tres especies de versos, dos mas; que son; versos de pie quehrado; y versos sueltos. Los versos de pie qmbrado se usan generalmente en las compo- siciones dramaticas, que son inumerabjes en nuestro idioma. Estos consisten por lo regular de cuatro pies yambicos y pueden 476 APPENDIX. formarse de menos tambien si se quiere; el siguieute egempio consiste 4e cuatro pies. Tambien se cuentan todos estos versos por silabas como se vera despues. Piles I si a mar | ga la | verdad, Quie I ro echar f la de [ la b5ca, Y I si al al 1 ma sii [ hiel to | ca, Es I cander ^ la es ne J ce dad. Los versos suellos son aquellos que solamente tienen un cierto ritmo, pero, las voces finales de unas lineas no hacen asonancia, ni consonancia con las de otras; al contrario, se evita cuanto sea posible la menor correspondencia, que en cuanto a sonido, pueda ecsistir. Es precise advertir, que entre los poetas espanoles, no se tiene mucho cuidado en la rima de unas palabras con otras; y asi es que hai muchos pedazos de poesla IJamada asonante, que en todo rigor pertenece a la suetta. Sin embargo, esto no de- pende ni de la falta de habilidad del poeta; ni de su descuido; solo de la lengua. Es esta tan rica y magestuosa, que habiendo correspondencia de metro, no necessita los ornamentos adventi- cios de la rima para darle brillantez y realce. Mas es asameja nuestro idioma, en cuanto a eso a los idiomas antiguos griego y latino, que ningun otro ecsistente. No podremos pues ilamar versos sueltos los que solo no hacen asonancia con otros, sino que sera preciso no haber la menor dependencia 6 co||pcsion de sonido: Egempio: "Canta con voz suave y dolorosa, "0 musa, los amores lastimeros, "Que en suave dolor fueron criados. ••Canta tambien la triste mar en medio •'Ya Festo de una parte, y de otra Abyde "Y amor aca y allayendo, y viniendo, •'Y aquella diligente limbrecilla '•Testigo fiel, y dulce raensagera, '•De dos fieles y dulces amadores. •'0 mereciente luz de ser estrella, -'Lucienle y principal en las estrellas, •'Que fueron desde aca al cielo enviadas, - ''Y alcanzaron alia notables nombres. ''Pero comienza ya de can tar, Musa, APPENDIX. 47r "El proceso y el fin de estos amantes: "El mirar, el hablar, el entenderse, "El ir del uno, el esperar del otro, "El desear y el acudir, confqrme, "La lumbre muerta, y a Leandro muerto." Asi los versos Agudos, Llanos y Esdrujulos, como tambien los sueltos pueden consistir de varias medidas. Sin embargo, es pre- eiso observar, que en castellano los versos se cuentan mas por silabas que por pies; y para que se tenga buen conocimiento de las varias dimensiones que tenemos de versos, se pondran a con- tinuacion todas ellas. Con esta advertencia, que los agudos tienen una sflaba menos que lo que se cuenta; los llanos, son ecsactos; y los esdrujulos, una de mas. Los versos que con tienen once silabas 6 cinco yambos; se 11a- man endecasilabos; como, "Sal I ga I mi I tra | ba | ja | da | voz { y | rom | pa "El I son I con ) fu | so y | mi | se | ro | la | men ( to *'Con J e I fi I ca I cia y | fuer | zas j que in | ter ( rom ( paia "El { ce I les I te y I ter | res | tre | mo | vi | mien | to." Los que contienen diez sflabas, se Uaman decastlabos: ■'Los I que an | dais | em | po | llan | do o | bras j de o | otras "Sa I cad [ pues, J a | to | lar | vues | tra | cri | a | : "Ya I di I ra 1 ca I da au I tor; | es | ta es | mi | a; "Y j ve I re [ mos [ que os [ que | da a | vo I so j tros." Hai tambien composiciones de nueve silabas sin otro nombre particular, v. g.: •'Si 1 que | rer | en J ten | der | de | to 1 do, "Es 1 ri 1 di i cu 1 la 1 pre i sun | ci 1 on, "Ser 1 vir I so I lo 1 pa I ra u 1 na I CO I sa "Su I e I le I ser [ fal [ ta 1 no ) me 1 nor," Los versos de ocho silabas se llaman: versos de redondills mayor; v. g. "Al i in I fier j no el ] tra j cio Or | fe | o "Su 1 mu ( ger | ba j jo i a | bus | car, "Que 1 no 1 pu 1 do a j pe I or j lu I gar s'Lle 1 var | le ] tan | mal i de [ se 1 o " 478 APPENDIX. Se hallan tambien versos de siete silabas, sin darseles outj nombre particular; v. g. ij^Quien | es | a | quel | que | ba | ja "Por I a I que | 11a | co | li | na, "Su j bo 1 te ] 11a en j la | ma | no, "En I el I ros | tro | la ] ri j sa,"? A los versos de seis silabas se les da el nombre de redondilU menfff; come, "Fres I cos | ai | re | ci | llos, "Que a I la j pri I ma I ve I ra, "Des I te I geis | guir | nal ( das "Y es I par | ceis | vio | le | tas; "Ya I que os | ban | te | ni | do "Del I sa I CO en I las | ve | gas," &c. Se encuentran tambien versos de cinco, cuatro, ires y dos sila- bas de los cuales se pondra un egemplo a continuacionj Cincij sildbds. Cuatro silabas. "0 I que I de I ma I les "Yo | sui J vi j va "Ven I los I mor | ta | les, "Soi j ac | ti | va; "Si I hu I ye I la [ paz: "Me ] me | ne | o, To I do es I te I mo I res "Me | pa | se j o "I I ras I ren ] co | res "Yo | tra | ba j jo, "Si j hu I ye | la | paz." "Su | bo y | ba | jo.'? Tres silabas. "Dineros son calidad, "Ver I dad: "Mas ama quien mas suspira "men 1 TI I RA." Dos silabas. "Ingrata, hermosa Antandra, "En cuyas centellas "£e I lias "El alma es salamandra." Hai versos de catorce silabas y versos de doce, 6 de arte mayor; y estos no son mas que la reunion de versos de siete y seis sila- bas: "Yo I leT I no I se I don | de, [ que en I la { len [ gua ] her j bo ta j ria, | APPENDIX. 4Td •■'Sa j lu I dan | do a un [ to j mi j llo j la j yer j ba } pa j rie | ta I ria, | "Con I so I cor | ro | ne | ri j a | le | di | jo | de es j ta | suer [ te" ^•"No I he ( mos | de j reir | nos | siem | pre | que | oho | che j a "Con I an I ci I a I nas ] fra | ses | un | no | vel | au j tor?" Se debe advertir que los versos de catorce, de diez, y de nuevc noo son de uso mui frecuente. Los versos de ocho, seis, cinco, cuatro, tres y dos silabas se co- nocen bajo la denominacion de versos de redondilla; y los de once y siete por la de versos italianos. Llamanse versos enteros los que se componen de once, ocho j seis silabas, en contradistincion de los compuestos de siete, cinco, ciitttro, tres, y dos que sellaman quebrados, 6 de pie quebrado. De estos ultimos ya se hablo. Se ban dado aqui los varies modos de forinar versos en nues- tra lengua de una manera mui compendiosa por ecsigirlo asi lbs limites del libro. No se ban escrito como en un tratado cuya intencion es la de enseiiar completamente el mecanismo de nues- tra versificacion, sino para dar de ella una idea clara y concisa, que es todo lo que se requiere para saber leerla con precision, rectitud, energia y efecto. A continuacion se pondra el raodo de escandir; esto es, averiguar el numero de silabas 6 pies de que consta el verso. La mayor dificultad que occurre en escandir nueslra poetica, es saber, cuando en las voces que contienen una combinacion de dos vocales, si estas se deben suponer dos silabas separadas 6 una sola. Sin embargo esto se puede aprender facilmente con atender con cuidado a las observaciones siguientes: — Cuando el acento prosaico no cae sobre ninguna vocal, se con- sideran las dos como a diptongo; v. g. Por pies anapestos Dich5 | sos voso [ tros a quien I 16s cuidd \ dos. Por zllahas Di | cho j sos | vo ] so | tros | a | quien | los [ cui \ da I dos. Si el acento prosaico cae sobre la segunda de las dos vocales, cuenta por lo regular como a diptongo; pero, si sobre la prime- ra, como a dos silabas ; v. g. 480 APPENDIX, For -pies anapestos Los a | nimbs ar [ den en Dfos \ abra si. j doi For sUabas Ma | ri | a j vir | gen | be | 11a j Ma J dre J es j po | sa. Si la primera de c'os vocales es a 6 e se cuentan por lo regu- lar como a silabas separadas sin hacer atencion al acento; v. g. Por pies anapestos Que en v i | da 6s qxi^ma \ is en fue j go a mo j ro I so. Por silabas Que en | vi | da | os | que | ma | is J en j fue j go | a I mo I ro I so. Si una voz termina en vocal, y la siguiente comienza con vo- cal, la terminante nunca se cuente: Por pies irocaicos Entro | con e | lla aquel j que tan [ tos da j iios. Por silabas En | tro | con | e | lla a | quel | que | tan j tos j da I nos. •Si la pronunciacion cargare sobre la vocal terminante; en- tonces por lo regular se cuenta como a silaba separada: — Por pies irocaicos EuTRd | en un | jar din ( heri j do de | amor | Por silabas En [ tro | en | un | jar | din [ he | ri | do | de j a | mor. Cuando una voz termina en una vocal y la que sigue comien- za en h la elision se quede d no hacer: — Por pies Irocaicos Ni al | terror | de HORRen | da gue | rra. Por Silabas Su a \ mor | pues | no | se j ha | ha ] bla | do. Siempre que la vocal terminante, preceda a una y usada como a consonante, se cuenta por silaba separada: — Pies anapestos Do estan | do 16s cuer [ pos cai | dos e yer | tos. Por silabas Do es 1 tan do | los ] cuer | pos [ ca | i j dos j e [ yer I tos. Estas reglas sera suficientes para poder escandir cualquier pedazo de poesia, asi por pies como por silabas. Se vera que muchas veces una linea tiene una silaba de menos, la cual se anade al principio del verso siguiente. Tambien que al fin de una linea hai un medio pie mas 6 menos ei cual se quita 6 anade al principio de la otra. ALPHABETICAL INDEX.- A. Papre. A, a vowel, its sound, 26 A, a preposition, 184 A, a preposition, forming the contraction al, with the arti- cle cZ, 68 A, required after some verbs, 378 ABOUT, its various meanings, 185 ABBREVIATIONS used in writing, .... 49—54 \CCENT, an orthographical mark, 4^? Which are the words that bear this mark, . 47 — 49 On what syllable this stress should be laid, . 405 — i09 WTiich are the words whose stress is expressed by the orthographical accent, and which are those that are not distinguished by this mark, . . ib. A certain stress of the voice placed on a vowel, ob- servation, 404 ACCENTS of Adjectives, rule 16, . . '. . .229 ADJECTIVE, the definition of it, 67 When it requires a neuter article, '. . 70, 71, 213 Divided into two classes, 221 Formation of their plural number and feminine gen- der, . .• 71, 221 How rendered when they qualify articles of commerce, ib. Agreement of adjectives, 222 What kind of adjectives are used when two or more nouns are to be qualified, ib. How two or more adjectives agree with a plural noun, 225 * As this work is intended, not only for the rudiments of the young begmner, but as a book of reference for those who have already become proficient in the Spanish language; it has been presumed that an index, by means of which any matter contained in this grammar might instantly be found, could not but be a de- sirable object 41 48£ INDEX. Pagt. Position of adjectives with regard to the noun which they qualify, 226 Adjectives which preceding the substantive lose their termination, 229 Adjectives requiring certain prepositions, . . 244 — 247 Peculiarities of the adjectives alguno, ninguno, tercero, 231 ADMIRATION, how used in Spanish, .... 48 ADVERB, the nature of it, 179 ADVERBS, of place, time, manner, quantity, comparison, order, affirmation, negation, and doubt, . 179 — 182 How adverbs in mente are generally formed, • 389 Place of the adverb in a sentence, notes 1, 2, 3, . ib. ADVERBIAL phrases, 183 Si, and no, require sometimes que, note 4, . . 390 Two negative adverbs are, in Spanish, used to strength- en the negation, . 390 Adverbs requiring de, or a, . . . . 182-183 Jamas, J^unca, J^o, and jyiui, . . . . . 390 AFTER, a preposition, its various meanings explained, . 185 AGREEMENT, or concord and government explained, . 191 ALPHABET, with the English pronunciation, . . 25 ALPHABETIC* list of all the irregular verbs, . . 156--164 ANAPESTO, 471 ANCIENT terminations of Spanish verbs, placed in contra- distinction with the modern, . . . 175—178 APPENDIX, See Words, Commercial Documents, Dialogues, kc. 411 APPOSITION, which are the nouns used in apposition, . 217 ARRANGEMENT, the Syntax of this grammar has been ar- ranged dififerently from that of the second edition, preface, 7 ARTICLE, its nature, 67 Use and nature of the neuter article Lo, . . 70, 213 Use and translation of the English article a, . . 214 The Spanish indefinite article agrees in gender, num- ber and case, . . • 193 ^ As this list is arranged in an alphabetic manner, in which any of the irregular verbs may be found in a glance, the necessity of including them in this index, is entirely superseded. INDEX. 483 Page. When the indefinite article is used, rules 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 194-204 When the article is omitted. . , . 205—213 Use of some or antj, notes 2 and 3, . . . 206 AS, a conjunction, its various meanings explained, . 394 When as, preceded by so, requires a different transla- tion in Spanish, note 1, 239 AT, its various meanings, 185 AUGMENTATIVE, and diminutive nouns, . . . 67 AUXILIARY verbs, their nature and use, . 89, 351, 359 Their conjugation, 85 — 100 B. B, a consonant, its sound, 26 B'^FORE, BY, their various meanings explained, . 185 TO BE thirsty, hungry, and how translated, . . 352 BLANK verse, 476 BOTH, its peculiarities explained, .... 395 BUT, a conjunction, 393 How but is translated in its various significations, 393, 394 c. C, a consonant, its sound, 26 CASE, the nature of it, . . . . . . .65 Reasons supporting that in Spanish there are but two cases — note *, 65 — 68 The pronouns have two objective cases, . . 77 — 80 Use of these two objective cases, . 257 — 262 Position of the two objective cases, . . 252—250 The author has assigned but two cases to the Spanish language, 65 — 68 CARDINAL numbers, . . . , . . 72 — 73 COMMERCIAL documents, 461 COMPARISON, nature of it, . . . . • . .71 Words used in Spanish to denote comparison, . 235 So much, as much, so many, how translated — note 1, 236 When mas precedes de when gue,— note 2, and |, ib. Irregular comparatives, ib 4^4 INDEX. Manner of rendering the indefinite article tht when it deriotes comparison, ..... 239 Cual used sometimes to compare — note 4, . . ib. Cuanto and Tanto, how translated — note, rule 18, ib. Spanish comparatives are sometimes used for English superlatives — rule 20, 242 How the English superlatives are rendered in Spanish, rule 19, 240 How Sprnish superlatives are formed— note 1, 240 — 241 Various peculiarities of superlatives, . . . ib. Irregular superlatives, ib. The least, and the most, are translated sometimes mas and menos.^ without the article — note *, . 383 COLLECTIVE nouns, the nature and use of them, . 40, 349 COLLOQUIAL idioms, 411 CONCORD, the same as agreement, 191 CONJUGATION, the manner in which the conjugation of regular Spanish verbs is formed, . • . 101—108 Conjugation of regular verbs, 109—116 Conjugation of passive or reflective verbs, . 117—122 CONJUNCTIONS, their definition, .... 188 Their division, . ib. Their peculiar use and construction, . . 393—397 What conjunctions govern the subjunctive mood, note 4, 371 The copulative and disjunctive conjunctions, operate differently on the verb, .... 346, 347 CONSONANTS, the sound of them, .... 26-30 CUAL, a relative pronoun, .... 79, 278, 282 CUYO, see p-onoun, a relative pronoun, . . 79, 278, 280 CH. CH, a consonant, its sound, . . . . . . 27 D. D, a consonant, its pronunciation, very peculiar, 7iote t, 26 Various notions entertained respecting its sound when it terminates a word, . . ib. INDEX. 485 Page. DECLENSION, Articles, Nouns and Pronouns declin- ed, 67, 70, 77, 89 DEFECTIVE verbs, 85, 169—170 DEGREES of comparison, 71 Comparatives, how made, and used, . . 235—339 DEMONSTRATIVE pronouns, use and definition, 79, 80, 288—295 DERIVATION, how nouns are derived from other parts of speech, 55 DIALOGUES, the most useful and necessary, To salute — Paying a visit — Concerning the state of the weather — At rising in the morning — To break- fast — At dinner— On drinking tea — To go to bed- On speaking to a tailor — On speaking to a shoema- ker, 443 DIURESIS, an orthographical mark, .... 47 DIFFERENCE between Haber, and Tener, . 89, 351—353 Between Ser and Estar, .... 354 — 359 Between the imperfect and preterite of the indi- cative, observation, . . . . . 311 DIMINUTIVE Nouns, 57 DIPHTHONGS, the number of them in the Spanish, . 31 Two vowels cease to be a diphthong when one of them is accented, lb. When accented, when act, . . . 405 — 409 DISTINCTION between Ser and Estar, . . . 354—359 DIVISION OF VERSES, 471—475 E. E, a vowel, its sound, . . . . . . . 26 EL, pronoun, •• . . 77 Definite article, 68 In what cases is this word marked with the ortho- graphical accent, 405 EMPHASIS, never so strong on particular words as it is in English 30 ESTAR, its conjugation, 9? Difference between Ser and Estar, . . 354 — 359 ESTAR, or quedarpor, for what translated, note I, . 369 41* 486 INDEX. Page. ETYMOLOGY, the nature of it, ..... 55 See the Etymology of the article, page 67, of the noun 56, of the adjective 69, of the pronoun 75, of the verb 81, of the adverb 179, of the. prepo- sition 184, of the conjunction 188, of the inter- jection, . . . . ' . , . . 190 EXCEPTIONS, to the gender of nouns, . . . 60—64 To the rule of the-prosodical accent, . . 405 — 409 EXCLAMATION, same as admiration, .... 46 EXERCISES, of great importance, and preferable to any other mode of learning any language, see Preface. Exercises, some attached to every rule, note, and observation, which see. Recapitulatory exercises in the article, . 211 — 213 . in the adjective and noun, 232 — 235 in the pronouns, . . 301 — 305 in the tenses, verbs, 340 — 344 EXTRACTS, used for promiscuous exercises, on the ir- regular verbs 363— -366 F. V, its pronunciation, 26 FALTAR, on gustar, 387—388 FEET, poetical feet, 347 FOR, a preposition, its various meanings, . . 186 FORMATION, of the tenses of the Spanish regular verbs, 101—108 Of the gerund and participle, .... ib. The FORMER, how translated, rule 38, . . . 233 FUTURE, perfect and future imperfect, rules 44, 45, . 318 ■ perfect and imperfect of the subjunctive, 51, 52j 331—332 G. G, the sound of it, - • 27 SENDER, the nature of it, 58 In Spanish there are five dififerent genders, but pro- perly speaking, two only, .... ibid. Rules to distinguish the gender of nouns, . . 58 — 59 Ejiceptio^s to these rules, .... 60—64 INDEX. 48r Page* (GENITIVE, no gmitive, or possessive case in Spanish, . 219 GERUND, nature of it, 84 How it is formed, 107—108 Use and application of it, .... 535 — 336 GOVERNMENT, the nature of it, .... 191 Government of verbs, 366 Which are the kind of verbs that govern the infinitive, 367 Verbs governing the indicative, or subjunctive, 370 Which are the conjunctions that govern the subjunc- tive, 371 GRAMMAR, the nature of the Spanish Grammar, . . 25 GRANDE, when it loses its termination, . . . 229 GUSTAR, observation on gustar, and f altar, . . 387 — 388 H. H, never sounded in Spanish, 28 HABER, an auxiliary verb, its conjugation, . . . 85 — 89 The use of Haber, 351 To HAVE JUST, how translated, 352 HISTORICAL sketch of the Spanish language, . . 17-24 HOWEVER, how translated in Spanish, .... 395 1. I, its sound, 26 IDIOMS, colloquial, . . . . . . . 411 IMPERATIVE mood— rule 46, 320 IMPERFECT indicative— rule 40, . . . . . 309 Difference between the imperfect and preterite of the indicative, observation, 311 IMPERFECTS of the subjunctive, . . . 324-326 Difference between the imperfects and futures of the subjunctive, observation, 33^ IMPERSONAL verbs, 164-170 IN,^ its various meanings, , . 186 INFINITIVE mood, 83, 334 INNOVATIONS, in the tenses of verbs, . . . .175 INTO, its various meanings 181 lliJTfiRJECTIONS, the nature of them, . . . .190 488 INDEX. Tage. Adjectives used as interjections require de, . .397 How the interjection ai, is translated, ... ib. INTERROGATIVE pronouns— rule 35, ... . 286 INTERROGATION, an orthographical mark, . . 46 IRREGULAR verbs, 156-164 comparatives, 235 superlatives, . . . . . . 247 IT, meaning so, is translated by Zo, 391 J. J, a consonant, its peculiar sound, 28 JAMAS, an adverb, used sometimes with nunca, . . 390 K. K, its sound as in English, 26 This character is only retained in the Spanish lan- guage, to be used in foreign words, , . . ib. L. L, its sound, 26 LA, le, los, las, articles, 68, 193 LANGUAGE, sketch of the Spanish, 13 The LATTER, how translated— rule 38, ... 293 LETTERS, voicels and comonants, .... 26-30 Commercial letters, 461 LL, a consonant, its sound, ...... 28 M. M, a consonant, its pronunciation, 26 MODELS, of the irregular verbs, .... 125—155 MOOD, the nature of the infinitive^ indicative, imperative, 2iud subjunctive moods, 83 Use of the moods, .... 305, 320, 322, 334 In what cases conjunctions require the subjunctive mood, note 4, 371 MULTITUDE, nouns of multitude known by collective nouns, which see, . . . ... ; . .57 Use of the collective nouns, rule 61, . . . 349 INDEX. 489 N. Page. JV, a consonant, see its sound, .26 NEGATION, two negative adverbs in Spanish, confirm the negation in a stronger manner — observation, . 390 "When any other abverb except no, begins the sentence, one negation is only used, ib. NEITHER, and nor, how translated, . . . . 394 NEUTER, adjective, 70,213 NEUTER Article, . 70, 203 Verb, 81 NO, an adverb, always preceding the verb, . . . 179 No, with another adverb of negation strengthen the negative, 390 If the negative adverb precedes the sentence, the 7io is not used, ib. NOMINATIVE, its nature explained, .... 66 It always precedes the verb, except in the imperative and interrogative sentences — rule 24, . . . 250 The nominative case is, in Spanish, placed more fre- quently before, than after the verb — note* . . ib. If it be a pronoun, it is seldom expressed in Spanish, note 1, 251 In Spanish there are but two cases, the nominative and objective — note* 65, 68 NOUN, its nature explained, 56 Two modes of distinguishing their gender, . . 58 The number of nouns, how formed, ... 64 Spanish nouns have but two cases, ... 65 Singular nouns joined by a copulative, require the verb that agrees with them, to be in the plural, . . 346 Singular nouns connected by a disjunctive, require the verb that agrees with them, to be in the singular, 347 Nouns of multitude require, when they are definite, a singular, and when indefinite, a plural noun, . 349 Some authors do not sufficiently attend to this rule, note *, . 350 Nouns do not take the article used in apposition, rule 10, 208 4^ INDEX. Page. The Spanish nouns have no possessive case, . 219 Nouns are divided into p'oper, common, and abstract, 66 The Spanish language has augmentative and diminu- tive nouns, . 57 How they are formed, ib. Declension of nouns, 68 — 71 NUMBER, the nature of it explained, .... 64 There are two numbers, ib. Cardinal and ordinal numbers, . . . 72 — 75 The plural number of adjectives formed like that of substantives, . 71 NUNCA, an adverb, used sometimes with ja?na5, . 390 N. N, its sound, . . . .... 28 0. 0, a vowel, its sound, 26 OBJECTIVE case, the nature of it, ... 6ft Use of objective cases in the personal pronouns, 257 — 269 ON, a preposition, its various meanings explained, . 187 ORDINAL numbers, 73 ORTHOGRAPHY, its nature shown, .... 26 The alphabet Avith an English pronunciation, . ib. The orthographical notes, [few excepted,] are the same, and used for the same purpose in Spanish as in English, . . . . . . .49 The reason of the variety of opinions concerning the sound of c, 6, d, t, v, explained, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30 Rules to pronounce the Spanish without any foreign accent, . 29 Division of the Spanish words into syllables, . . 45 Words similar in sound, but different in spelling, 44 Rules for spelling according to the modern usage of the most eminent Spanish authors, . . 43 Orthographical accent, when used, . . . 47 Words in Spanish are spelled as they are uttered, 44 OVER, a preposition, its various meanings explained, . 187 INDEX. 491 P. Page, P, its pronunciation, . . .... 26 PARTICIPLES, a list of verbs having the participle irregu- larly formed, . 171 Participles which have an active signification and are used as verbal adjectives, . . . .174 Participle past, its nature and properties explained, 83 Formation ot the participle, . . . 107 — 108 Use of the participle, 338 The participles sometimes require the verb ser, some- times the verb estar, .... 356 — 357 The past participle is used as a case absolute in Spa- nish, note 2, ....... 338 Participle present, like the gerund, . . 84, 335 PARTS OF SPEECH, we have, like the authors whose divi- sion is most universally adopted, assigned nine parts of speech to the Spanish language, . . -.56 PASSIVE participle, the same as participle past, . 83, 338 PERFECT indefinite, or preterite indicative, rule 41, . 310 Perfect of the subjunctive, rule 49, ... 329 Difference between the imperfect and preterite of the indicative, observation, 311 PERSONIFIED, nations, toions, cities, &c., take the article, rule 3, . ...... 197 PERSONS, three belong to each number, ... 82 POETICAL feet, of how many syllables they consist — their division, . 471 POR, sometimes is used with estar or quedar, to show that an action is not finished, . . , . 369 POSITION t)f the nominalive, rule 25, ... 250 Position of the 1st objective case, rule 25, . . 25S 2d objective case, rule 26, . 256 Position of adjectives, rule 16, .... 226 POSSESSIVE pronouns, . . . .78, 270—276 PREPOSITIONS, their nature explained, . . . 184 Which are the prepositions deemed such, . ib. English prepositions with their correspondent ones in Spanish, . . . . . 185, I8i 493 INDEX. Page. The use of prepositions, ..... 390 Tliey always govern the second objective case of the personal pronouns, ..... lb. They always precede the relative pronouns, note 1, 284 Prepositions required by verbs of motion, . . 389 PRETERITE, or perfect indefinite, rule 41, . . 310 Difiference between the imperfect and preterite, ob- servation, 311 PRESENT of the indicative, rule 39, ... 305 Of the subjunctive, rule 47, .... 322 Present participle, the same as gerund, . . 84, 335 PRONOUN, its nature explained, . ... 75 Pronouns are divided into five classes, the personal, jjobsessive, relative, inleri'ogativey demonstrative, and indefinite, 76 Personal pronouns, their declension, . . 76 — 77 They have two objective cases, ... ib. The necessity that the student be well versed in them, observation, .... 252 — 253 Position of the nominative, .... 250 Position of the first objective case, . . . 253 Position of the second objective case, . . 256 Use of both objective cases, ... 257, 259 The pronoun VMD. is considered a third person, like el, 249 Observations on the personal reciprocal pronoun se, 263-266 Observations on the difference between le and lo, 267 — 269 The two objective cases are sometimes used to- gether, . . . ~ . . . 261 — 262 Possessive Pronouns, their declension and quantity, 78 Their agreement and use, 270 Sometimes the article used in place of them, obser- vation, 274-276 'Relative Pronouns, their declension and quantity, . 60 Their agreement and relation, .... 279 Their use and peculiarities, 280 JFTio, f/iai, f/iaf vj/iic/i, and M;^af, how translated, . 281 He who, she who, or that, they or those who, how trans- lated, . . . . . . . . . 285 INDEX. 493 Page. Interrogative Pronmms, they are the relative used to ask questions, 286 Who always, quien; ivhich, cual; and lohat, que, . ib. Demonstrative Pronouns, their use and quantity, . 288 How they are to be applied in regard to distance, . 2'30 When he, she, they, those, are translated by the articles, when by the demonstrative pronouns — rule 37, ib. The ^a«er, and the /o7-mer, how translated, , . 293 That is, meaning namely, esto es — note 2, . . ib. Indefinite Pronouns, their quantity, .... 295 The explanation of each one in particular, . 295-298 PLUPERFECT, of indicative, 316-318 of subjunctive, .... 330,331 PROSODY, its nature explained, 404 Difference between the orthographical and prosodical accent, 404, 405 Rules showing Avhere the accent of each word is to be placed, 407-410 No person can read the Spanish with propriety who is not well acquainted with the accent, , . 405 PUNCTUATION, nearly as in Enghsh, .... 49 PURITY, to read with purity it is necessary to attend to the observations in pages . . . 26,42,404,410 Q- Q, a consonant, its sound, 28 QUE, when used as a substantive is always accented — rule 35, 286 QUESTION, when a question is asked, the note of interro- gation is placed both before and after, ... 46 In quesiiom, the nominative follows the verb, . 250 QUIEN, a relative pronoun, 279, 280 R. R, a consonant, its sound, 28 RATHER, how translated, 394 REGULAR verbs, in what manner their conjugation is formed, 101-108 Conjugations of regular verbs, . . . 109-116 42 494 INDEX. Page. A list of regular verbs to exercise the student, . 122 Regular comparatives, how formed — rule 17, . 235 superlatives, how formed — rules 19, 20, 240-242 Ra, ria, se, the terminations of three imperfects of the subjunctive, .... 323—326 RELATION of relatives, .... 279 RELATIVES, ...... 278 REPETITION of the objective case, how used, . 261, 262 RHYME, its definition, 472 S, a consonant, its sound, .... 29 SCANNING, or rules to measure verses, both by feet and syllables, 479 SE, a personal reciprocal pronoun, explained at large, 263 — 266 SER, difference between Ser, and Estar, . 364—359 How Ser is translated with preciso, necesario, &c. 361 How Ser is translated, when impersonally used, . ib. SIMPLE and compound adverbs, . . . 179 SKETCH of the Spanish language, . . . 17—24 SOUND of the letters, ..... 26—30 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD, its definition, . . .322 When directed by the tense which precedes it, 371, 372 What conjunction governs it, note 4, . . 371 SUBSTANTIVE, the same as noun, . . 56, 67, 219 SYLLABLES, rules for dividing them, . . 45, 46 SYNONTMES, between Aqu'i, Acd; Mi, Mli, Mid; Luego que, Despiies que; Deapacio, Poco a Poco; Mulador, Li- songero; Romper, Quebrar; Ir, Irse; Honor, Honra; JVb obstante, Aunque, Bienque; Opinion, Parecer, Dicfdmen; Porque, Pues; Sospecha, Recelo; Veneno, Ponzona; Voz Palabra, .423 SYNTAX, its nature explained, . . . 193 Of Pronoun, see j)ronoatn. Of Verb, see verb, &c. SPELLING, rules showing the manner in which words are to be spelt in Spanis^h, . ... 43 The various late changes in Spanish spelling, . ib. INDEX. 495 Page. SO, meaning it, is translated by lo, note,* . . 391 SUPERLATIVES, how formed and used, , 240, 24?. T. T, a consonant, its sound explained, . . • . 26 TENER, an auxiliary verb, its conjugation, . . 89 — 93 Use of tener, . . . . . .351 How this verb is translated with the adjectives, thirsty, hungry, &,-c. ..... 352 TENSES, their nature explained, . . ". 305, 338 Present of Indicative, . . . 305, 306 Imperfect of the Indicative, .... 309 Perfect Indefinite, .... 310 The difference between the Imperfect, and Perfect Inde- ^ni^e, clearly shown, . . . 311 — 313 Perfect Definite, .... 314 Pecxt/tarifies of the Perfect Definite, . . 31S Pluperfect, .... 316, 311 When the Pluperfect is used, . . . ib. Future Imperfect, .... 318 Future Perfect, ... . . . . ib. Peculiarities of the Future, . . . . 319 Imperative Mood, its use, 320 Subjunctive Mood, explained, 322 Present of Subjunctive, ib. Imperfect of SubjunctiA-e, 323 Peculiar use of the three imperfects of the Subjunc- tive, 323—326 Perfect tense, 329 Pluperfect, ........ 330 Future Imperfect, 331 Future Perfect, 332 Observations on the Tenses of the Subjunctive, . ib. Of the termination ra, ria, and se, . . 322 — 326 Rules for the correct application of these three imper- fects, ib. — ib. Different significations of the Preterimperfect, and the Imperfect Future of this Mood, . 332— S3S 496 INDEX. Page. Infinitive Mood, its nature explained, . . 334 Use of the Infinitive, ib. Present, Perfect, Gerund, compound of the Gerund, Pas- sive Participle, . . . . . 335—340 TENER, see difference between Hab er Ziud Tener, . 351—352 TERMINATIONS, changed to form the tenses of regular verbs, 101—108 Ancient terminations, .... 175 — 179 TRIPHTHONGS, those which belong to the Spanish, . 31 u. U, a vowel, its sound, 26 UNDER, its various meanings explained, . . . 187 USE of the lenses, 306,338 of the definite article, rules 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, . 193, 205 of the neuter article /o, 213 of the noun, rule 13, 219 of 1st and :id objective cases, rules 27, 28, . 257, 259 » of the tenses, present, indicative, 305 — imperfect, 309 — perfect, 310— perfect definite, 314 — pluperfect, 316 — future imperfect, SIS — imperative mood, 320- subjunctive, present, 322 — imperfect, 323, 324, 325^ 326 — perfect, 329 — imperfect, 330 — future imper- fect, 331 — future perfect, 333. . of prepositions, , 390 of conjunctions, . 393 USTED, a personal pronoun, explained, . . . 249 Its contraction, vmd., 86, 249 V. V, a consonant, its sound, 26 — 30 V, a contraction of Ustedf 86—249 V, and B, distinct in sound, ,. 30 VERB, its nature explained, . . . . . 81 Divided into Active, Passive, and J^euter, . . ib- Conjugation explained, 85 Mode of conjugating regular verbs, , . 109 — 1 1 How regular verbs are formed, . • . 101 — 108 INDEX. 497 Page. A conjugation of the auxiliary verbs, . 85 — 100 Mode of conjugating a passive verb, . . 117 — 119 Mode of conjugating a reflective verb, . 119 — 121 A list of all the irregular verbs, . . . 126 — '164 Difference between the ancient and modern termina- tion of verbs, 175 Defective verbs, a list of them, . . . 169 Impersonal verbs, a list of them, • . • . 164 Construction which some of them require, . 169 A short essay on the use of Ser and Estar, . 354 — 359 Active verbs govern the objective case; and with the preposition a, they govern a person, . . 366 — 367 Verbs governing the indicative or subjunctive, . 370 Passive verbs require the preposition dp., or for, 374 Neuter verbs, active intransitive, as well as some re- flective verbs, govern a verb with de, . . ib. A list of verbs requiring the preposition de, . ib. Verbs which require the preposition a, , . 378 — 380 Verbs requiring en, 382 Verbs requiring con, 8S3 Verbs of motion require either the preposition a, de^ por, or hacia, ....... 589 Observation on ^ustccr, faltar, and pesar, . . 387 VERBAL Adjectives, those which are formed from verbs, or participles adjectively used, . . , 174 VERSE, its various dimensions explained, . , 471 Troqueo, Yambo, Aaapesto, ..... ib. Division of verse according to its rh}Tne, . 475 Called Agiidos, Llanos, Esdrujulos, ... ib. Of verses, called pie quebrado, .... ib. Verses, called versos stieltos, [blank verse,] . . 476 VERSIFICATION, its nature explained, . , . 470 Of Rhyme, 472 A curious manner of rhyming, the last word of a verse, with the second of the following, . 474 Manner of measuring the Spanish verses, . . 479 VMD., a personal pronoun, its nature, use, and application explained, ....... 86—249 498 INDEX. \^f^ VOCABULARY, of the most useful and necessary words — Of God, &c.~The Planets, &c.— Of Time— The Days of the Week — The Months of the Year — Seasons and Holidays — Individuals and Ages — Thin|i;s be- longing to the Body — Natural Actions — The Five Senses — Defects and Maladies of the Body, &c. &c. 428 V'OWELS, their sound exhibited, 26 w. W, this character does not belong to the Spanish alphabet. WITH, a preposition, its meaning explained, . . 188 WITHIN, a preposition, &c. ib. WITHOUT, a preposition, &c ib. WORDS, the most useful and necessary words, . . 428 X. X, a consonant, its sound, ...... 29 Y. Y, a consonant, its sound, ...... 29 Used also as a vowel, ib. Many authors npv*»r uco